Ascent Reference Guide

Software Reference Guide
Revision 22/02/2013
Legal
COPYRIGHT © 1999-2013 Bently Nevada and GE Energy (New Zealand)

Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored

in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of GE Energy. For information, contact:
GE Energy
Level 2, 22 Moorhouse Avenue
Christchurch
New Zealand
Email [email protected]
Disclaimer
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Names

and data used in examples are fictitious unless otherwise noted. This
document is distributed as is, without warranty of any kind, either
expressed or implied, respecting the contents of this document,
including but not limited to implied warranties for the document’s
quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular
purpose. Neither Commtest Instruments Ltd nor its employees, dealers,
or distributors shall be liable to the user of this document or any other
person or entity with respect to any liability, loss, or damage caused or
alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by this document.
Ascent Reference Guide

Contents
Contents
Section 1 — Overview ..................................................................................... 1
Install Ascent ............................................................................................................1
System Requirements ..................................................................................... 2
Upgrade from Previous Version ................................................................... 2
Software Licensing ........................................................................................... 3
Install Ascent using Software License........................................................ 4
License Manager............................................................................................... 9
Set Ascent Interface Language................................................................. 18
Data Structure and Storage Capacity...................................................... 21
Storage Capacity ........................................................................................... 22
Data Storage Location ..................................................................................... 23
Key Terms and Concepts ................................................................................ 24
Section 2 — Basic Operation ....................................................................... 28
Start Ascent ............................................................................................................ 28
Create Database.................................................................................................. 29
Create Folder ......................................................................................................... 30
Delete Folder.......................................................................................................... 31
Open Folder ............................................................................................................ 32
Navigator................................................................................................................. 33
Select Different Database............................................................................... 34
Button Toolbar Captions ................................................................................. 35
Create Machine using Build Mode ............................................................. 36
Create Machine .............................................................................................. 37
Add Point .......................................................................................................... 38
Add Measurement Location ....................................................................... 39
Copy Point ........................................................................................................ 40
Create Parameter Set / Schedule Entry.................................................. 41
6Pack Recordings .......................................................................................... 45
Add / Archive / Delete Note ........................................................................ 48
Add Bearing to Point ..................................................................................... 49
Apply Different Rotational Speeds across Machine.......................... 52
Copy Item ................................................................................................................ 54
Delete Item ............................................................................................................. 54
Edit Measurement............................................................................................... 54
Generate New Measurement .................................................................... 55
Create New Measurement Base on Previous Recording .................. 55
Autosave .................................................................................................................. 56
Save and Undo Changes ............................................................................. 56
Use Navigator ....................................................................................................... 56
Navigator List .................................................................................................. 57

Contents
Sort Navigator Tree ....................................................................................... 58

Navigator Search Filter ................................................................................ 59
Hide Recording in Navigator ...................................................................... 62
Select Multiple Items ..................................................................................... 62
Creation Palette ................................................................................................... 64
Customize Work Area ....................................................................................... 64
Create Route .......................................................................................................... 65
Add Instrument to Ascent ........................................................................... 68
Automatically Set Instrument IP Address .............................................. 69
Transfer Folders to Instrument .................................................................... 70
Transfer Recordings to Ascent Database .............................................. 72
Navigator Tree ...................................................................................................... 74
Maintain Data Integrity .................................................................................... 75
Use Example Data .............................................................................................. 76
Section 3 — Reports ...................................................................................... 77
Generate Report .................................................................................................. 77
Alarm Report.......................................................................................................... 79
Balancing Report ................................................................................................. 80
Detailed Exception Report .............................................................................. 81
Last 8 Measurements ....................................................................................... 82
Last Measurement Report .............................................................................. 82
Machine Assessment Reports ...................................................................... 82
Machine Assessment Summary reports ................................................ 83
Configure Machine Assessment Report Database ............................. 84
Run Machine Assessment Report............................................................. 85
Access Machine Assessment Report....................................................... 88
Open Advanced Reporting Editor ............................................................. 89
Differentiate between Machine Assessment Reports........................ 90
Publish Machine Summary Report........................................................... 92
Publish Machine Assessment Report ...................................................... 94
Add Company Logo to Published Report ............................................... 95
Open Existing Machine Assessment Report Database ..................... 97
Add Machine to Report ................................................................................ 99
Configure Database Association ............................................................ 100
Reassociate Report ..................................................................................... 101
Machine Summary Report........................................................................... 105
Notes Report ....................................................................................................... 106
Routes Due Report........................................................................................... 106
Structure and Route Reports ..................................................................... 107
Automated Reports ......................................................................................... 109
Section 4 — Plot Data ................................................................................. 111
Use Charts............................................................................................................ 111
Zoom and Pan............................................................................................... 112

Contents
Use Cursors.................................................................................................... 114

Plot Multiple Recordings on One Chart................................................. 120
Choose which Recordings to Display .................................................... 121
Chart Modes .................................................................................................. 122
Create On-chart Remarks ......................................................................... 125
Define RPM of Recording ........................................................................... 127
View Data in Orders or Revolutions ....................................................... 128
Display Fault Frequencies ......................................................................... 129
Set and Display Baselines ......................................................................... 135
Waveform Analysis ..................................................................................... 136
Convert Waveforms to Spectra............................................................... 140
Long Time Waveforms ............................................................................... 140
Set Measurement Unit Preferences ....................................................... 141
Customize Scale of Charts ........................................................................ 144
Hide Peaks...................................................................................................... 150
Views ....................................................................................................................... 153
How Views Work .......................................................................................... 159
Convert View to Image............................................................................... 160
Trend Data ........................................................................................................... 161
Trend Data ..................................................................................................... 162
Choose Data Types for Trend Chart ...................................................... 163
Use Cursors with Trend Charts................................................................ 166
Single Frequency Trending ....................................................................... 167
Orbit Plots ............................................................................................................. 170
Workflow......................................................................................................... 172
Set up Schedule Entries ............................................................................. 173
Create Route.................................................................................................. 177
Review Orbit+Waveform Recordings .................................................... 177
Bode Plots............................................................................................................. 178
Set up Measurements ................................................................................ 179
Create Bode Plot .......................................................................................... 179
Change Size of Plot...................................................................................... 179
Analyze Bode Plot ........................................................................................ 180
Modal Analysis and Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) Data ......... 182
Modal Impact Charts .................................................................................. 182
Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) Chart ................................................... 185
Print Charts and Reports .............................................................................. 186
Schemes................................................................................................................ 188
Change Colors for Printer and Screen .................................................. 190
Change Chart Plot Line Styles.................................................................. 191
Keyboard Shortcut Keys ............................................................................... 193
General............................................................................................................ 193
Navigator........................................................................................................ 193
Chart ................................................................................................................ 194
Cursors ............................................................................................................ 195

Contents
Section 5 — Alarms ..................................................................................... 196

Check Alarm Status......................................................................................... 197
Check Alarms Automatically when New Recordings Received from
Instrument...................................................................................................... 198
Channel Inoperative Alarms..................................................................... 199
Band, Crest Factor, and True Peak-to-Peak Alarms ...................... 200
Peak Band Alarms ....................................................................................... 201
Power Band Alarms..................................................................................... 202
Waveform Crest Factor Alarms............................................................... 203
Waveform True Peak-to-Peak Alarms .................................................. 203
Draw Individual Band Alarms on Chart ................................................ 204
Edit Individual Band Alarm........................................................................ 207
Exceed Band, Crest Factor, or Peak-to-Peak Alarm ......................... 211
Trend Band Alarms...................................................................................... 215
Envelope Alarms ............................................................................................... 218
Add Envelope Alarms to Chart................................................................. 219
Edit Individual Envelope Alarm ................................................................ 220
Exceed Envelope Alarm ............................................................................. 222
Trend Envelope Alarms .............................................................................. 224
Overall RMS Alarms ......................................................................................... 225
Use More Detailed Alarm Threshold....................................................... 226
Create Alarm Template ................................................................................. 227
Create Peak and Power Band Template .............................................. 228
Create Envelope Template........................................................................ 230
Apply Alarm Template to Additional Schedule Entries .................... 232
Use Template to Edit Existing Alarm Thresholds ............................... 233
Edit Alarms Globally .................................................................................... 234
Edit Individual Alarms ................................................................................. 235
Delete Alarm Templates and Alarms..................................................... 236
Section 6 — Bearing Database ................................................................. 238
Use Quick Search to Find Bearing ........................................................... 238
Advanced Search ............................................................................................. 240
Section 7 — Additional Functions and Features.................................... 242
Keypad Schedule Entries.............................................................................. 242
Create Keypad Schedule Entry................................................................ 243
Create your Own Units ............................................................................... 244
Edit Value after Collection ......................................................................... 245
Attached File Schedule Entry ..................................................................... 245
Create Attached File Schedule Entry ..................................................... 246
Create Attached File Measurement ....................................................... 247
Manage Attached Files .............................................................................. 248
Average Value Schedule Entry .................................................................. 249
Create Average Value Schedule Entry .................................................. 250

Contents
Tachometer Schedule Entry ....................................................................... 252

Create Tachometer Schedule Entry....................................................... 253
Associate Process Variables with Vibration Recordings ............. 254
Demodulation .................................................................................................... 256
Demodulation Setup ................................................................................... 257
Set / Update RPMs for Multiple Recordings........................................ 259
Define RPM Value......................................................................................... 260
Apply RPM Value .......................................................................................... 262
Linear Speed Support..................................................................................... 263
Collect RPM Value while Measuring ....................................................... 265
Baseline Recordings ....................................................................................... 266
Display baseline value on portable SCOUT/vbSeries instrument 266
Use Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries .................................................. 267
Edit existing schedule entry...................................................................... 267
Create new schedule entry....................................................................... 268
Reminders ...................................................................................................... 268
Tabs .................................................................................................................. 269
Fmin.................................................................................................................. 271
Orders-based Parameter Set................................................................... 271
Edit Parameter Set....................................................................................... 273
Work with Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries on a Single Folder,
Machine, Point, or Location ...................................................................... 274
Clean up Parameter Sets and Schedule Entries ................................ 277
Triaxial Measurements .................................................................................. 278
Sensor Settings.................................................................................................. 279
Bias Voltage Enter............................................................................................ 280
Manually Enter Vibration Data .................................................................. 282
Customize Axis Name .................................................................................... 284
Edit, Add, or Delete Location Names ..................................................... 284
Tagging.................................................................................................................. 285
Tag items ........................................................................................................ 285
Store Reusable Components in Library ................................................ 286
Add Item to Library...................................................................................... 286
Retrieve Item from Library ........................................................................ 287
Section 8 — Transfer Data ......................................................................... 289
Import and Export Data ................................................................................ 289
Export Data .................................................................................................... 290
Import Data ................................................................................................... 291
Import or Export to File via Command Line ........................................ 291
Create Batch File.......................................................................................... 292
Log File ............................................................................................................ 293
Additional Commands................................................................................ 294
Export or Import Schedule Data ............................................................. 297
Import or Export as XML ............................................................................... 298

Contents
Export as XML................................................................................................ 298

Import as XML ............................................................................................... 299
OPC Import .......................................................................................................... 300
Configure Engineering Units and Scaling ............................................ 301
Configure OPC Schedule Entry ................................................................ 303
Template Machines......................................................................................... 305
Create Template Machine......................................................................... 306
Export or Import Template File................................................................ 307
Change Template Name ........................................................................... 311
Release Child or Template Machine ...................................................... 311
Audit Template Database ......................................................................... 312
GMT Handling and Time Zones................................................................. 313
Edit Local Time Offset for Recording ..................................................... 313
Edit GMT Time Offset for vbOnline or Ranger ..................................... 313
Edit Windows System Time Zone............................................................ 314
Configure vbX000 Instrument Communication ............................... 314
Connect Instrument via Serial COMs..................................................... 315
Reduce Settling Time .................................................................................. 315
CPU Intensive Comms ................................................................................ 316
Rush Data ....................................................................................................... 316
Synchronize Instrument and PC Date and Time................................ 316
Troubleshoot vbX Network Communications ................................... 317
Check Firewall Settings .............................................................................. 317
Change Ethernet Network Address ....................................................... 318
Section 9 — Manage Data Storage Effectively ...................................... 319
Data Optimization (Thinning)...................................................................... 320
Database Optimization Event Logs ....................................................... 325
Back up Database ........................................................................................... 327
Automatic Periodic Backups .................................................................... 328
Change Backup Directory ......................................................................... 329
Back up Files to Shared Network Folder .............................................. 329
Archive Large Database ............................................................................ 330
Restore Ascent or Machine Assessment Report Database ....... 337
Restore Ascent Database.......................................................................... 337
Restore Machine Assessment Report Database ............................... 338
Database Optimization ................................................................................. 338
Where to Store Database Files................................................................ 339
Relocate Database ...................................................................................... 339
Reduce Database Size................................................................................ 340
Rebuild Database ........................................................................................ 340
Section 10 — Handle Large Amounts of Data with Views ................... 341
Walkthrough — Create your own Views .............................................. 341
EG: Set up combined Waterfall and Trend View................................ 342
Define AutoView Components .................................................................. 347

Contents
Building Blocks.............................................................................................. 348

Vibration Views ............................................................................................. 349
Reports ............................................................................................................ 350
Analysis ........................................................................................................... 350
Further Customize your View..................................................................... 351
Assign Keyboard Shortcuts......................................................................... 352
Reuse Part of Existing View......................................................................... 353
Save Changes to View ................................................................................... 354
Restore System Default Views ................................................................. 354
Change View File Name............................................................................. 355
Use Selector ........................................................................................................ 355
Example of Using Selector ........................................................................ 356
Add Selector .................................................................................................. 357
Add Selector to Existing Chart or Report.............................................. 359
Assign Priority and Target............................................................................ 360
Design View Layout......................................................................................... 362
How Parts of a View Fit Together ........................................................... 364
Change Layout ............................................................................................. 366
Delete View.......................................................................................................... 367
Section 11 — Use Machine Builder Wizard ............................................. 368
Introduction......................................................................................................... 368
Walkthrough — The Proven Method ...................................................... 369
Overall Condition Rating............................................................................... 371
Select Overall Condition Rating............................................................... 372
Select Cases ........................................................................................................ 373
Case G Type 1 ............................................................................................... 374
Cases E and F ................................................................................................ 378
Case A .............................................................................................................. 381
Section 12 — Statistical Alarms................................................................ 383
Statistical Alarm Overview .......................................................................... 383
Generation Parameters ................................................................................ 387
Apply Predefined Alarms .............................................................................. 388
Create and Apply Alarms .......................................................................... 389
Redefine Thresholds for Existing Alarms ............................................. 393
Redefine Thresholds for Single Alarm ................................................... 395
Update Alarm Thresholds ............................................................................ 396
Update Thresholds for Single Alarm ...................................................... 397
Apply Statistics to Alarms ............................................................................ 398
Statistical Outliers ........................................................................................ 399
Outlier Detection and Suspicious Recordings................................... 399
Suspicious Recordings (envelopes only)............................................... 400
Statistical Alarm Setup .................................................................................. 403
Alarm Wizard................................................................................................. 404

Contents
General Settings ........................................................................................... 405

History Options ............................................................................................. 406
Family Options .............................................................................................. 407
Thresholds ...................................................................................................... 409
Envelope Options ......................................................................................... 413
Statistics Options ......................................................................................... 415
Create Statistical Alarm Templates ........................................................ 417
Edit Statistical Alarm Templates............................................................... 418
Machine Families.............................................................................................. 419
Create Machine Families ........................................................................... 421
Edit Machine Family .................................................................................... 421
Delete Machine Family............................................................................... 422
Add / Remove Machine from Family ..................................................... 422
Section 13 — Network ................................................................................ 423
Connect to Network Database ................................................................. 423
Manage Multi-user Access .......................................................................... 425
Deadlock / Conflict / Overwrite Protection .......................................... 425
Section 14 — Administrative Tasks.......................................................... 426
Set up Ascent for Access by Non-Administrators ........................... 426
Unlock vbOnline Device Features............................................................ 427
Unlock Additional vbOnline Channels ................................................... 428
Create and Manage User Accounts ....................................................... 429
Create User Account................................................................................... 430
Enable Login .................................................................................................. 431
Configure Ascent Directories ..................................................................... 432
Database Directory ..................................................................................... 432
Database List File Directory...................................................................... 432
Backup Directory ......................................................................................... 433
Scheme File Storage Directory ................................................................ 433
HTML Temporary Directory ...................................................................... 433
.vbz Files .......................................................................................................... 433
.fdb Files .......................................................................................................... 434
Site Database................................................................................................ 434
.scheme Files ................................................................................................. 434
.av Files ............................................................................................................ 434
.hex Files ......................................................................................................... 435
.mpf Files......................................................................................................... 435
Upgrade Instrument using Proflash ....................................................... 436
Proflash SCOUT / vbSeries Portable Instrument................................ 437
Apply License for Flex Feature .................................................................. 438
Bulk Tasks............................................................................................................. 440
Machine Speed Settings Utility.................................................................. 441
DUNS Numbers ................................................................................................. 443

Contents
Section 15 — Troubleshooting .................................................................. 444

Troubleshoot USB Communications ...................................................... 444
Upgrade Database Generates ISC Error .............................................. 445
Contact Technical Support.......................................................................... 445
Index .............................................................................................................. 446

Section 1 — Overview
Ascent is a software application that complements the:
• SCOUT* family of portable vibration analyzing instruments and
devices.
• vbSeries® family of portable vibration analyzing instruments
and devices.
• vbOnline and Ranger family of permanently-mounted
instruments and module.
Ascent provides all the functionality needed to store and analyze the
vibration data you take with a vbSeries portable or online instrument.
Ascent communicates with your instrument through your computer's

serial, Ethernet, or USB ports. You can use the software to create
machine lists and measurement setups, and then send these to your
instrument.
Once your data has been collected, you can use Ascent to:
• View spectra, waveforms, and trends.
• Create envelope and band alarms.
• Generate reports to summarize information in your database
(e.g. a detailed exception report).
The Bearing archive is included with vbOnline, vb5, vb6, vb7, and vb8
packages, providing a large library of bearings and their associated fault
frequencies. These fault frequencies can be overlaid on the spectra
created in Ascent to help identify bearing problems.
Install Ascent
This section explains how to install Ascent.
1
System Requirements
The minimum system requirements for installing Ascent are:
• Microsoft® Windows® XP® SP2, Server 2003®, Server 2008®,
Vista® (32 or 64-bit) or 7® (32 or 64-bit) operating system
• 1 GHz 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor or faster
• 1 GB system RAM
• 1 GB available hard disk space
• A CD-ROM compatible optical drive
• Windows-compatible mouse, touchpad, or another pointing
device
• An unused COM, USB, or Ethernet port for instrument
communications
• Microsoft .NET Framework® Version 3.5 SP1 or higher
• An unused Parallel or USB port for Dongle communications (not
required if using license keys)
NOTE: You must have Administrator rights to install Ascent. If you
are within a corporate or managed network you may need to
contact your network administrator to request a group user policy
that enables Windows registry changes and/or firewall access (to
permit communication between Ascent and the external Licensing
Server).
Upgrade from Previous Version

The Ascent installer will search all directories under C:\Program Files\
for previous installations. It will automatically overwrite (upgrade)
previous software instances if any are detected.
If there is more than one previous version of Ascent installed on your

computer, the installer will use the first version located as the upgrade
path. Uninstall all other versions to prevent conflicts with the new Ascent
installation.
If you are currently using a hardware dongle, please see the Upgrading
a Legacy Dongle License section for instructions on upgrading to a
software license.
2
Software Licensing
Ascent and its associated applications (AscentWatcher, AscentOPC and
OnlineManager) must be licensed. The license file may reside:
• On an external hardware device (USB or Parallel dongle)
attached to the host computer.
• In a software file stored on the host computer.
Without an appropriate license, imported data will be unusable. Key

software features will be disabled.
A CLK (Commtest License Key) is used to activate and update your

license file. A printed label bearing this 11-digit CLK is provided with CD-
ROM installations. If you are installing software you have downloaded
from the Commtest website, a CLK will be generated by Commtest
Licensing via email when requested.
License storage on a single PC (rather than on a removable hardware

dongle) is the default, preferred means of licensing. Hardware dongles
that enable a single license to be transported between several
computers must be requested by customers and will incur a supply fee.
If you are currently using a hardware dongle and a license acquired

prior to the release of Ascent 2008 software, you may upgrade your
license then transfer the new license to your current dongle and
continue using it exactly as you have previously. During the upgrade
process, the legacy license on your current dongle will be erased. It can
then be replaced with the new upgraded license, if required.
NOTE: Dongle devices can only be used for licensing purposes. If

erased during a license transfer to a PC, USB dongles cannot be
reused as generic USB memory devices.
3
Terminal Server Support

If you wish to execute more than one instance of Ascent via multiple
Terminal Server (Remote Desktop Server) sessions, you will need a
multiple running instances license. Contact [email protected] for
more information.
Install Ascent using Software License

To install Ascent and activate your software license (i.e. install Ascent
without a hardware dongle):
1. Close all programs you have open on your PC.
2. Insert the Ascent CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Wait for the Ascent installation page to open in your default web
browser OR run the Ascent(version...).exe program located in the
root directory of the installation CD-ROM.
4. Select an installation language from the Installation Language
window.
5. Click OK.
NOTE: If you intend to use only the OnlineManager, AscentOPC, or

AscentWatcher applications, and you wish to use a non-English
interface, you must also select Ascent during the installation
process. Interface languages for these applications must be set
globally in Ascent (see Setting the Software's Interface Language ).
There are no options for independently selecting interface
languages in AscentWatcher, AscentOPC, or OnlineManager. Once
you have selected the language in Ascent, you can uninstall it if
required.
6. Follow the instructions on your screen to complete the installation.

7. Start Ascent when the installation is complete — The License window
opens.
8. Click the Get License button — The Licence Management window
opens.
9. Click the Get/Update License button. If you are a legacy user, and
you have a hardware dongle connected (that has been upgraded
previously using the Upgrading a Legacy Dongle License procedure),
you may now select whether you wish to install a software
(machine) license or a hardware (dongle) license. If you do NOT have
a dongle (a more common user scenario) only one option, Activate
license on machine, will be available to you.
4
10. Click the Next button — The Request License window opens.
11. Enter your license key in the Commtest License Key field.
12. Tick the checkboxes beside the applications you wish to activate.
NOTE: Only select the applications you are licensed for. Adding
unlicensed features will cause the activation to fail.
13. Click Next.

NOTE: The license key is printed on a sticker attached to the inside
cover of the CD-ROM installation disk case.
NOTE: The Next button will only become active after an 11-
character key has been entered in the Commtest License Key field.
14. Choose your preferred license acquisition method by ticking the

appropriate checkbox.
15. Click Next:
• If you selected Get license automatically over Internet, the
license will be obtained immediately over the Internet and
installed. Click Finish > OK to close the License Management
window. You can now move to the next topic, Adding
Instruments to Your License.
• If you selected the Get license manually from the Commtest
website option, you will be presented with further instructions:
a. Click the Generate License Request File button.
b. Save the text (.txt) file to your computer.
c. Transfer the file to a computer that is connected to the Internet.
d. Navigate to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz
https://licensing.commtest.co.nz on the computer that is
connected to the Internet.
e. Follow the instructions provided on the website to generate a
license key file.
f. Save the key file on your computer and transfer this file to the
Ascent host computer.
g. Close the Request License window.
h. Click the Browse button in the License Manager under the
Management tab.
i. Locate and select the new key file.
j. Click Import to import the key file.
5
Installing Ascent using a software license
6
Upgrade Legacy Dongle License

This procedure is for users currently using a legacy (Parallel or USB)
hardware dongle who want to upgrade their license. Upgrading enables
access to newer Ascent features that cannot be accessed using an older
license. The steps described below need to be performed only once.
Once completed, the existing dongle license will be erased and an
upgraded license installed on the host computer. If you wish to continue
using a hardware dongle, the new license can be transferred to the
dongle using the procedure described in Program Your Hardware
Dongle.
NOTE: Ensure your hardware dongle is connected to your

computer's Parallel or USB port before proceeding. Your current
license must be valid or the upgrade process will fail. Contact
Commtest customer support if your current license has expired.
1. Start Ascent with your current hardware dongle attached to the

computer.
2. Click Continue to operate Ascent using your current dongle license
without upgrading. If you wish to upgrade your license (highly
recommended) click Request License. An email will be generated
containing your dongle details. You may also optionally provide your
instrument serial number. Send the email and you will receive an
email response containing a CLK (license key) from Commtest. This
may take several business hours. Once you have sent the email
license request, close Ascent and wait for your license key, or click
Continue to continue using the hardware dongle.
3. Once you have received an email reply containing your CLK:
a. Ensure you have an active Internet connection and connect
your dongle.
b. Restart Ascent.
c. Click the Transfer License button.
d. Enter your CLK and follow the onscreen instructions to upgrade
your license.
NOTE: All data on your dongle will be erased during the upgrade
process. The new software license can, however, be transferred
back to the dongle once the upgrade process is complete.
7
Upgrading a legacy dongle license
8
License Manager
The License Manager is used to control all aspects of your software
license. You can use the Manager to add, update, or remove your
license, and to view the status and features permitted by your current
license level.
The License Management window has the following tabs:

• License — Use this section of the License Manager to view your
license details including your license key, license expiration
date, and Ascent software level. Click the Customer Details
button to update your contact details (Internet connection
required). Click Activation Summary to view your current
license features and the number of used/available license seats.
• Management — Use this section of the Manager to:
• Add a new license.
• Remove your license from a dongle or computer.
• Update your software license when manually using the
Commtest License Server — This is for license updates
without a direct Internet connection.
• Instruments — You can use this section of the Manager to:
• View the instruments you are able to access with your
license.
• Add new instruments to your license.
9
Using the license manager
10
Add Instrument to License

Once your license has been activated, you can add an instrument, or
instruments, to it. To do this:
1. Select Help > License Management — The License Management
window opens.
2. Select the Instruments tab.
3. Click the Add Instrument button — If you are using a hardware
dongle and you have NOT upgraded your license, you can upgrade
your dongle license. If you do NOT have a hardware dongle
attached and instead use a software license stored on the PC, only
one option—Update license on machine—will be available to you.
4. Click Next — The Add new vb Instrument window displays.
5. Enter your instrument serial number in the vb Serial Number field —
The serial number is located on a label attached to the rear panel of
your instrument and on the QA card supplied with it.
6. Enter the instrument QA date in the QA Date field — This date is
provided on the QA card supplied with the instrument. The date
must be entered in YYYY-MM-DD format.
7. Click Next.
8. Tick the required checkbox to select your preferred license
acquisition method:
• Tick the first checkbox if you computer is connected to the
Internet.
• Tick the second checkbox if your computer is NOT connected to
the Internet, or if your network is behind a firewall, use the
second option.
9. Click Next:
• If you selected Add instrument automatically over Internet, the
license will be updated immediately over the Internet and
installed. Click OK then Finish, then OK to close the License
Management window. You can now send and receive data
between Ascent and your instrument.
• If you selected Add instrument manually from the Commtest
website, you will see a new window with further instructions:
a. Click Generate License Request File.
b. Save the text file to your computer. Transfer the file to an
Internet-connected computer.
c. Browse to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz
https://licensing.commtest.co.nz on the Internet-connected
computer.
11
d. Follow the instructions provided on the website to generate a

license key file (Get/Update License).
e. Save the CLK (key) file on your computer.
f. Transfer this file to the Ascent host computer.
g. Click Browse in the License Manager under the Management
tab.
h. Locate and select the new key file.
i. Click Import to import the key file.
j. Click OK then Finish once the license has been updated.
k. Click OK to close the License Management window — You can
now send and receive data between Ascent and your
instrument.
Add new vb Instrument window
12
Upgrade or Edit License

If you have purchased a license upgrade to access more software
features or capabilities. you must update your existing license. Doing so
will activate any new software or hardware capabilities. Any new
features will not be activated or available to you until Ascent has
communicated with the License Server and your license's new
capabilities have been programmed.
Follow the license installation procedure described in Install the Software

Using a Software License. Repeating this process will also update your
license. If you are using a hardware dongle, see the Upgrading a Legacy
Dongle License and Program Your Hardware Dongle procedures for the
required dongle update steps.
NOTE: You must perform an update when your license expires and
you have requested and received your free license extension.
Doing so enables Ascent to communicate with the Commtest
License Server, activate the extension, and set a new license
expiration date.
13
Uninstall Software License

You may wish to uninstall your software license in order to:
• Transfer Ascent to another computer
• Decommission or upgrade your PC hardware
• Indefinitely uninstall Ascent for storage
• Switch between a PC- and dongle-based license
To uninstall your software license:
1. Select Help > License Management.
2. Select the Management tab.
3. Click Remove License — If you have a hardware dongle connected,
you may select whether you wish to remove a software (PC) license
or a hardware (dongle) license. If you do not have a dongle
connected only one option, Remove license from machine, will be
available to you.
4. Select the license components (applications) you wish to remove.
5. Click Next.
6. Choose your preferred license removal method by ticking one of the
two checkboxes:
• Tick the first checkbox if your computer is connected to the
Internet.
the Internet.
7. Click Next:
• If you selected Remove license automatically over Internet the
license will be removed immediately over the Internet.
• If you selected Remove license manually from the Commtest
website option you will see a new window containing further
instructions:
8. Click Generate Remove License Request File.
9. Save the text file on your computer.
10. Transfer the file to a computer that is connected to the Internet.
11. Navigate to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz
https://licensing.commtest.co.nz on the computer that is connected
to the Internet.
12. Select the Remove License option on the website.
13. Follow the instructions provided on the website to deregister your
license.
14
Program Hardware Dongle

This topic applies to users who have upgraded their license but wish to
use a hardware dongle rather than a PC-based license file (i.e. you wish
to transfer your license from your computer to a detachable hardware
dongle for use with multiple computers).
NOTE: If you have a single license, you can use either a PC-based
license OR a dongle license, not both. If you have previously
installed your license on your PC, you must uninstall it by selecting
Remove License from the Management tab in the License
Manager window before transferring the license to a dongle
device.
To access many of the newer features in Ascent, you will need to

upgrade to the new license. In order to upgrade and continue using your
dongle you will need to:
1. Install a software license using a CLK or Upgrade your Legacy
Dongle License — This will upgrade your license, transfer the new
license to your computer, and remove your old license from the
dongle.
2. Uninstall the software license from your computer.
3. Transfer the license to your hardware dongle (as described below).
NOTE: You cannot upgrade older licenses contained on dongles
directly to the new license type. You will first need to upgrade to a
new software (machine) license, then uninstall the new license and
transfer it to the hardware dongle.
15
Transfer license to Dongle
You can transfer your upgraded license from your computer to the
dongle (and vice-versa) as many times as you wish using the same
Uninstall License, Add License sequence and your CLK. Once you have
uninstalled your software license from your computer:
1. Connect you dongle.
2. Select Help > License Management.
3. Select the Management tab.
4. Click Get/Update License — The License Method window displays.
5. Select the Activate license on dongle option.
6. Click Next button — The Request License window opens.
7. Enter your license key in the Commtest License Key field.
TIP: You can find your license key on your CD-ROM installation disk.
NOTE: If you do not have a license key, click the No license key
button — A license request email will be generated. The email
contains your dongle serial number and any associated
instrument serial numbers. Send the email and you will receive a
return email from Commtest License Support containing your
license key. This may take several business hours.
8. Tick the appropriate checkboxes to select the software applications

you wish to activate.
NOTE: Ensure you only select the applications you are licensed for.
Adding unlicensed features will cause the activation to fail.
9. Click Next.
10. Tick the appropriate checkbox:
• Tick the first checkbox if your computer is connected to the
Internet.
the Internet.
16
11. Click Next:

• If you selected Get license automatically over Internet, the
license will be obtained immediately over the Internet and
installed.
• If you selected Get license manually from the Commtest website
you will see further instructions:
a. Click Generate License Request File.
b. Save the text (.txt) file to your computer.
c. Transfer the file to a computer that is connected to the Internet.
d. Navigate to https://licensing.commtest.co.nz
https://licensing.commtest.co.nz.
e. Follow the instructions provided on the website to generate a
license update file (Get/Update License).
f. Save the CLK file generated through the license website on your
computer.
g. Transfer the file to the Ascent host computer.
h. Click Import License in the License Manager under the
Management tab.
i. Navigate to the new key file.
j. Click Import to import the key file — Your dongle license is now
installed.
Install Ascent using USB Security Dongle
You will need administrator rights on your PC to install Ascent.

To install Ascent using a USB security dongle:
1. Close all programs you have open on your PC.
2. Insert the Ascent CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
3. Proceed using EITHER of these options:
• Wait for the Ascent installation menu to open in your default
web browser > Select the appropriate installation option.
• Run the AscentSetup[VERSION].exe installation program
located in the root directory of the CD-ROM.
17
Follow these steps once you have installed Ascent:

1. Connect the dongle to a USB port in your computer — The Found
New Hardware wizard will open and use the 'Aladdin Key' drivers
from the Ascent installer.
2. Start Ascent once the USB driver is installed.
3. Click Continue on the License window to start Ascent using your
existing dongle license — This completes the installation process.
NOTE: This is the process for Windows XP, Vista, 7, and Server
2003.
Set Ascent Interface Language

Ascent can be viewed in several languages. Languages are license-
controlled according to the software's region of purchase or destination.
The following regional language packs are currently supported:
• English
• Simplified Chinese
• Russian
• French
• Japanese
The interface language you choose in Ascent will be used for all Ascent
suite software. This includes the OnlineManager, AscentOPC, and
AscentWatcher applications. These applications do not include the
ability to change languages independently. All languages must be
selected globally using Ascent.
If your language of choice is not available in your Ascent software

installation, contact [email protected] to purchase language
licenses. In some cases, language use may be restricted to specific
regions.
18
Change language in Ascent

To change the language used in Ascent:
1. Select Options > Select Language > From compatible languages
only.
NOTE: Selecting 'From compatible languages only' will display only

those languages supported by your current Windows operating
system configuration. If your preferred interface language is NOT
displayed in the 'From compatible languages only' list of
languages, but is displayed when selecting 'From any available
languages', you will need to change your Windows locale setting.
2. Select the language you require from the list of available languages.
NOTE: Although all available interface languages available will
display, you will only be able to activate the languages included in
your current CLK license.
3. Click OK — Ascent will update and you will be notified that the
language has changed.
Change Windows Locale Setting

If you wish to view Ascent in a non-Roman character set language such
as Russian or Chinese, you must also change your Windows locale
setting. See your Windows operating system documentation for more
details or use the relevant set of instructions below.
NOTE: If you have already changed Ascent's display language, you

will need to reapply this change once you have completed the
steps below.
19
Windows XP
To change your Windows locale setting using Windows XP:

1. Select Start > Control Panel.
2. Double-click the Regional and Language Options icon.
3. Select your location from the Locations dropdown field at the
bottom of the Regional Options tab.
4. Select the Advanced tab > Select your required language from the
Language for non-Unicode programs dropdown field.
5. Click OK — You will be asked to restart the computer.
Windows Vista
To change your Windows locale setting using Windows Vista:

2. Double-click the Regional and Language Options icon.
3. Select the Location tab > Select your location from the dropdown
field.
4. Select the Keyboards and Languages tab > Select your required
language from the Choose a Display Language dropdown field.
5. Select the Administrative tab.
6. Click Change System Locale.
7. Select the required locale language > Apply the change.
8. Click Restart now.
Windows 7
To change your Windows locale setting using Windows 7:

2. Click the Clock, Language and Region link.
3. Click the Region and Language link.
4. Select the Administrative tab.
5. Click Change System Locale.
6. Select your required language from the Current system locale
dropdown field.
7. Click OK.
8. Restart your computer (if required).
20
Data Structure and Storage Capacity

The data structure used in Ascent and portable instruments is
hierarchical. At the highest level is the database. Every item of data in a
database belongs to a particular site.
Each site in a database contains folders. Each folder can hold up to 200
machines on a vbX000 instrument. On a vb instrument, the number is
unlimited.
Each machine contains a number of points. At each point, recordings

can be made at any fixed number of axes.
Folders are used to contain your machine information. They are

transferred between Ascent and your instrument using the Send and
Receive functions.
Simplified data hierarchy
21
Storage Capacity
We recommend that you archive and delete recordings from your
Ascent database when it reaches 2 GB in size.
You can create much larger data structures in the Ascent database than
you can store on your instrument. You can create unlimited folders in
Ascent, but some instruments will hold only a maximum of 30 folders at
a time.
NOTE: This does not include vbX instruments, which can hold an
almost unlimited number of folders.
To make the best use of the database storage capacity, you should set
up as many machines in as many folders as you like. Once you have
done this, you should only transfer the data you need during your next
recording route or collection.
EG: You can transfer up to 30 folders to your instrument, collect the

measurements, then send them back to Ascent. You can then
erase the machines and recordings on your instrument and
transfer another 30 folders across, repeating this as often as
required.
MORE: See you Instrument Reference Guide for more information

on your instrument's storage capacity.
22
Data Storage Location

Ascent stores information (machines, points, etc) in a database. For
computers using Windows XP or Server 2003, the database's default
location is:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Shared Documents or
C:\Program Files\Commtest\Ascent.
For computers running a Windows Vista, Server 2008, and 7 operating

systems. the database will be stored in C:\Users\Public\Documents by
default.
To access files in Ascent, select Options > Explore Settings Folder. This
will open Windows Explorer and display a list of all the files and folders in
your installation of Ascent.
23
Key Terms and Concepts

The table outlines the key terms and concepts you need to understand
in order to use Ascent effectively.
Term Image Description
The Database is the top level of the Ascent

hierarchy. A database holds the sites and
machine structure you have set up (every item
of data in Ascent is stored in a database). You
can have multiple databases, but all sites must
Database
belong to the same database in order to share
information between sites. Database files on
your computer end with the extension .FDB (or
.GDB in the case of older legacy Interbase
databases).
A Site contains folders that are used to store

machine information. Every item of data in the
database is contained in a folder. Each folder
belongs to a particular site.
Edit a site
To edit a site:
Site
1. Select Edit > Edit Site.
2. Enter data in the following required fields:
• Company name
• Site name
• DUNS code
NOTE: Entering data in the remaining

fields is optional.
A Folder is used to hold a collection of

machines. It represents the entire collection of
Folder
information sent to, or received from, your
instrument.
24
A Machine represents an actual machine on the

Machine factory floor or within a facility. Machines hold a
collection of points and are stored in folders.
A Point represents a position/region on a

particular machine where vibration
measurements will be taken. Bearings and
Point
gears can be defined at each point so that fault
frequency information is available for all
measurement locations on the point.
A Measurement Location represents an actual

place on the machine where you will place a
sensor and take vibration measurements. The
difference between different measurement
locations at a point is the orientation of the
sensor (the axes around the shaft on which the
sensor is placed). There may be several
Measurement
measurement locations at a point, each using a
Location
different orientation/axis.
A machine with three measurement locations
A Recording represents a single, or series of,

recorded vibration measurements (in the case
Recording of spectrum+waveform or 6Pack recordings, for
example) and is labeled with the time, date, and
a description of the type of measurement(s)
taken.
25
A Schedule Entry represents a vibration

recording that is scheduled to be taken.
A schedule entry ties a Parameter Set to a
Measurement Location. The parameter set
defines a general set of measurement
parameters and the schedule entry specifies
Schedule how the measurement should be taken at a
Entry particular location (which sensor to use, what
the default RPM is etc).
You may have more than one schedule entry at
a measurement location. For example, you may
take a velocity recording and then (without
moving the accelerometer) an acceleration
recording.
An Envelope Alarm defines an alarm region on

Envelope the spectra. The alarm is triggered when any
Alarm point in the spectrum exceeds the alarm
threshold.
A Band Alarm defines a limited range of

Peak frequencies to monitor on a spectrum. A band
Band alarm can be either Peak or Power based.
Alarm
s Peak Band Alarms detect when a spectral
Band Alarm peak within the defined band goes above a
certain value.
Power
Band Power Band Alarms measure the overall
Alarm RMS within the defined band and compare that
s against a threshold value.
Bearing definitions can be added to points on

your machines. Once the software knows the
fault frequencies for a bearing, it can display
fault frequency markers on spectra, enabling
Bearing you to identify peaks related to that bearing.
Bearings can have notes attached and
interchange information may also be available
for them. Ascent comes with its own bearing
database containing over 30 000 bearings.
26
Where possible, the Commtest Bearing Archive

will offer a list of bearings that are compatible
with the bearing that is selected. This enables
you to replace a bearing with a suitable
alternative, should your chosen bearing be
Interchange unavailable.
Bearing DISCLAIMER: While every effort has
been made to ensure that bearing and
bearing interchange information is valid
and correct, no responsibility can be
accepted for any damages caused as a
result of the use of this information.
Gear definitions can be added to points on your

machines. Once the software knows the fault
Gear frequencies for a gear, it can display fault
frequency markers on spectra, enabling you to
identify peaks related to that gear.
A Sensor defines the name, type and sensitivity

of a sensor used for data collection. You can
Sensor store the calibration values and settling times of
your sensors in both the software and your
instrument.
27
Section 2 — Basic Operation

This section explains how to complete basic operations in Ascent.
Start Ascent
When you install Ascent, you can have a program shortcut created on
your Desktop and in the Windows Start menu.
To open Ascent from the Windows Start menu, select All Programs >
Commtest > Ascent > Ascent.
28
Create Database
If this is the first time you have created a database, we recommend you
accept the default name and storage location so you can easily find the
database if you need to. The default name and storage location is listed
in Where is my Data Stored.
The default factory database contains all the information you need to
start setting up your machines.
1. Select EITHER of these options to start creating your database:
• Select File > Database > Create Database > Create New.
• Select Database > Create Database > Create New.
2. Select EITHER of these options according to your requirements:
• Local Machine — To create a local database (i.e. a database on
the computer on which Ascent is installed). Click Browse to
choose an alternative location or change the default database
name (if required). If this is your first database, accept the
default location.
• Network — To create a new database on a server or another
networked machine. Enter the server name or IP address (e.g.
MyServer or 192.168.1.1).
NOTE: The server address must have all leading and trailing back
slashes removed. The path must be an 'absolute' and include
correct drive mapping from the server's perspective rather than be
a virtual server address. For example,
'C:\MyDatabase\Database.fdb' but not
'\\Server\MyDatabase\Database.fdb'.
3. Click Next.
4. Tick the Add example data to the database checkbox if you are
creating an example database to experiment with Ascent's
functionality. If not, leave this checkbox empty and continue to the
next step.
5. Ensure the database location and name listed are correct.
6. Click Finish — You will be prompted to open the new database.
7. Select a Site or Folder.
8. Click OK to open it.
29
Creating a database
Create Folder
The rest of this section is presented as a tutorial to help familiarize you
with the software. The instructions will guide you through some of the
routine tasks you will perform when using Ascent and your portable
instrument. You will learn how to set up machines, create routes, and
transfer data between your computer and instrument.
Your first task is to create a folder. This will be used to hold a machine
with four measurement locations. You will create these shortly.
1. Use EITHER of these methods to start creating a folder:
2. Select File > Open.
3. Click the Open button.
4. Click New > Select Folder.
NOTE: You may also create a new folder by right-clicking the
navigator panel and selecting New > VB Datafolder.
5. Enter a folder name in the field (type over the default folder name).
6. Click OK to create the folder.
NOTE: Data folders are used to store machines.
30
Creating a new folder
Delete Folder
To delete a folder:
1. Select the folder.
2. Delete it using EITHER of these methods:
• Press Delete.
• Right-click it > Select Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm you wish to permanently delete the folder.
31
Open Folder
To open a folder:
1. Open a folder using EITHER of these methods:
• Select File > Open.
• Click the Open button.
2. Double-click a folder to open it.
TIP: If you don't see any folders, click the expand icon beside one
of the site icons.
Opening a folder
32
Navigator
By default the navigator panel is located on the left of the Ascent screen.
It enables you to visually navigate through the data in a database.
The navigator can be placed on the top of the Ascent window by going
to the main menu and choosing Screen > Navigator on top.
Navigator tree
33
Select Different Database

Ascent keeps track of the databases you use and enables you to quickly
switch between these. A list of previously accessed databases is
available from the dropdown field on the Open window.
To select a different database:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to open a folder:
• Select File > Open.
• Click the Open button.
2. Click the arrow beside the Database field > Select the required
database.
3. Click OK.
NOTE: If the database has not been opened previously, click

Change > Click Browse. Locate and select the database (.FDB
format) > Click Open. Select a Datafolder or site > Click OK to open
it.
Opening a different database
34
Button Toolbar Captions

If you are using a small monitor or running a non-English version of
Ascent, some toolbar buttons might not display correctly on your screen.
You can switch off the toolbar captions to reduce the width of buttons so
they fit your screen better.
To switch off button captions, select Screen > Deselect Show Toolbar
Captions.
Buttons with labels
Buttons without labels
35
Create Machine using Build Mode

You can use Build mode to build the structure of your machines. When
you are in Build mode, placeholders will display in the navigator tree. You
can use these to create new machines, points, measurement locations,
and schedule entries. You can click the placeholder to create the item.
You can click the Build button to toggle Build mode on or off.
Activating Build mode
Your first task will be to create a machine with two points and two
measurement locations at each point. Soon you will learn how to:
• Copy parts of your machine structure to save time.
• Add a photographic image for identification purposes.
• Create a parameter set and schedule entries to specify the
types of measurements that will be carried out at each machine
location.
36
Create Machine
To create a machine:
1. Click Build to activate Build mode — If you are licensed to use The
Proven Method, the Machine Builder wizard will display. You can use
this to create machines with preset alarms. Instructions for using
the wizard are provided later in the manual. For now, we are going
to manually create our machines manually.
2. If the Machine Builder wizard is open, click the Manual Build Mode
link to close it — The currently open folder, Drying Machines, is at the
top of the navigator tree. The placeholders beneath it are what you
will use to create your machine structure.
3. Select [Add Machine] — The placeholder turns blue to indicate it can
now be edited.
4. Enter Blower #8 to create a machine with this name > Press Enter
— The machine structure opened out to reveal placeholders for
creating the points and measurement locations on this machine. We
will add these next. A new [Add Machine] placeholder now displays
at the bottom of your structure ready for you to create more
machines in this folder if they are needed.
Example navigator
Using build mode to create a machine
37
Add Point
To add a point:
1. Click the [Add Point] placeholder that belongs to Blower #8.
2. Enter Drive End > Press Enter to create the point — Several new
placeholders now display.
NOTE: Next you will add measurement locations to the Drive End
point.
Adding a point
38
Add Measurement Location

To add a measurement location:
1. Select the first [Add Measurement Location] > Select Horizontal.
2. Click OK to create a horizontal location at the Drive End point.
3. Select [Add Measurement Location] below the one you have just
created > Select Vertical.
4. Click OK.
NOTE: You can define a new location name by selecting <other>

from the dropdown field, clicking OK, then entering a name. See
Customizing Axis Names to learn more about editing existing
location names and creating new ones.
NOTE: If you are taking a triaxial measurement at the location,

right-click the new location > Select Edit. In the 'Measurement
Location' window, select an axis from the 'Triax Axis' dropdown
field. The measurement axis will display beside the location in the
navigator tree. For example, a measurement on the X axis on the
location 'Vertical' will display as 'Vertical[X]'.
Adding a measurement location
39
Copy Point
You can duplicate the Drive End point (along with its two locations) to
make the Other End point. Doing this creates a machine with four
measurement locations. Once you have copied a point, you can specify
which vibration measurements should be taken at these locations.
To copy a point:
1. Right-click the Drive End point > Select Copy Branch to Clipboard.
2. Right-click the Drive End point again > Select Paste — The new point
displays in the navigator tree below the previously selected point.
3. Right-click the second Drive End point > Select Edit — The Point
Editor window displays.
4. Enter Other End in the Point name field,
5. Click OK.
Navigator tree with copied point
40
Create Parameter Set / Schedule Entry

A Parameter Set defines a 'set of parameters' that will be used to take a
measurement. If you intend to take the same type of measurement at
many machine locations, creating a single parameter set for that type of
measurement will save you a lot of set up time. You specify the
measurement parameters once, then reuse the parameter set in as
many Schedule Entries as you like.
A Schedule Entry represents one measurement (or one multi-

measurement type, such as a 6Pack measurement on SCOUT/vbSeries
portable instruments) that is scheduled to be taken. A single parameter
set can be used to assign parameters to many schedule entries
(individual measurements) and provides a quick way to set up those
measurements.
We will create a single parameter set and then use this to create four
schedule entries, one at each of the four locations on our machine.
1. Select Blower #8.
2. Click the P/Sets button — This opens the Select Parameter Sets
window that summarizes the parameter sets currently defined on
this machine. This window is empty because we have not yet
defined any parameter sets.
3. Click Add to All to create a new parameter set/schedule entry
combination — This opens the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry
window which gives you complete control over the measurement
parameters your instrument will use.
TIP: Before creating or editing Parameter Sets, we recommend you
assign the instrument(s) being used to collect the recordings.
NOTE: Before you assign an instrument, it must be added to the

Ascent database. See Add Instrument to Ascent.
41
4. Select the Applicable vb Instrument tab to assign your instrument

to the Parameter Set. Some values (e.g. an Fmax below 100Hz) are
not supported on all instruments. Assigning your instrument(s)
enables Ascent to warn you if values are unavailable.
TIP: You can also right-click a schedule entry in the navigator list
and select Applicable vb Instruments to open the 'Applicable vb
Instruments' panel.
5. Click Edit.
6. Tick the Applicable column checkbox beside the instrument(s) you
will be using to collect the recordings — Only instruments that have
been added to the database will be listed.
MORE: See Adding an Instrument to Ascent.
7. Click OK — The instrument(s) you selected will display the

Instruments used to take recordings in this folder field. Once you
have selected an instrument(s), any unsupported values will be
indicated by a superscript star. 25*, for example, would indicate that
this value (25) is not available for one or more of the instruments you
are using to collect your recordings.
8. If you select an unavailable value:
• The background color of the active data field will change from
white to orange.
• An alert icon will display on the Applicable vb Instrument tab.
• A warning will display in orange text.
9. Click the Applicable vb Instrument tab to view information about
the conflict in the Settings that are not supported field.
NOTE: Any Parameter Sets created using previous versions of

Ascent will be assigned to all available instruments — Recording
parameters that are not supported by all available instruments will
be highlighted. The relevant instruments apply at folder level, not
parameter set level. Any time you open a parameter set in a folder
that does not have any applicable instruments assigned, all
available instruments in the database will automatically be used
as the applicable instrument for that folder.
42
10. We will start by measuring the vibration according to the ISO 2372
standard. This specifies overall limits of vibration in the 10 Hz to
1000 Hz range of frequencies (600 to 60 000 CPM). Select an Fmax
of 1000 Hz (60 000 CPM) from the dropdown field and leave the rest
of the settings at their defaults. The estimated recording time is
displayed near the bottom left of the window.
11. Click OK twice — The new schedule entries display beneath the four
measurement locations on Blower #8.
12. Click Build to switch off Build mode — All the placeholders will
disappear, leaving you with your completed structure. The schedule
entry labels describe the type of measurements to be taken (Vel
Freq 1000 Hz). Any text you enter in the Description field of the Edit
Paramset / Schedule Entry editor will be appended to the label. Later
on you can change schedule entries individually by selecting and
editing them, or changing them as a group by editing the associated
parameter set. For more information on this subject, including
instructions for creating orders-based parameter sets, see
Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries.
13. Click the [Add Schedule Entry] placeholder beneath a location to add
a schedule entry to it — This will open the Edit Paramset / Schedule
Entry editor:
a. Enter the parameters to be used for taking this recording.
b. Click OK.
NOTE: Alternatively if you already have parameter sets defined,

you can select one of these from the 'Select Parameter Set'
dropdown field at the top of the editor.
New schedule entries
43
Creating a parameter set or schedule entry
44
6Pack Recordings
6Pack recordings enable up to six measurements to be taken
simultaneously from a single data stream/channel. All standard
condition monitoring data can be acquired in one step and in the time
normally required to take a single conventional recording. This function
is currently limited to the SCOUT/vbX range of instruments (vb5, vb6, vb7,
vb8, SCOUT100/140).
A 6Pack recording may include some or all of the following

measurement types for each recorded channel:
• High Frequency Spectrum
• High Frequency Waveform
• Low Frequency Spectrum
• Low Frequency Waveform
• Demodulation Spectrum
• Demodulation Waveform
Notes on 6Pack Recordings

6Pack recordings allow up to six measurements to be taken
simultaneously from a single data stream/channel. All standard
condition monitoring data can be acquired in one step and in the time
normally required to take a single conventional recording. This function
is currently limited to the SCOUT/vbX range of instruments (vb5, vb6, vb7,
vb8, SCOUT100/140).
A 6Pack recording may include some or all the following measurement

types for each recorded channel:
• High Frequency Spectrum
• High Frequency Waveform
• Low Frequency Spectrum
• Low Frequency Waveform
• Demodulation Spectrum
• Demodulation Waveform
45
Configure 6Pack Recording

When configuring a 6Pack recording:
1. Tick the 6Pack checkbox in the Domain area.
2. Select the required measurement types using the checkboxes
immediately below the Domain area.
3. Configure the measurement parameters using the Parameters tab
— Keep in mind the following limitations imposed on this recording
type:
• The same sensor(s) must be used for all 6Pack measurement
types.
• High Frequency and Demodulation measurements can be
measured in Acceleration only.
• All spectra and waveforms must have the same resolution.
• Averaging type, number and overlap must be the same for all
spectra.
Estimate Measurement Recording Time

When you set up your measurements, the schedule entry editor displays
an estimate of the time the measurement will take to record. The
recording time is based on the values you enter in the Fmax, Lines, and
Number of averages fields. It is also affected by which domain is selected
(frequency, time, or demodulation).
You can experiment with changing the settings on this window to

estimate how long various measurement setups may take. To reopen a
schedule entry for editing:
1. Right-click the schedule entry icon in the navigator tree.

2. Select Edit.
Estimating measurement recording time
46
Add Photo Image to Machine

Once you have created your machine, you can add a picture and
descriptive information to the machine definition. To do this:
1. Right-click Blower #8 > Select Edit.
2. Paste or load an image of your machine.
Adding a photo image to a machine
47
Add / Archive / Delete Note

You can add notes to machines, points, locations, and individual
recordings. When you plot data from an item containing a note, the note
text will display on the chart.
Add Note to Machine

To add a note to a machine:
1. Right-click the machine > Select Edit.
2. Select the Notes tab to open this window — This tab is used to add
information which will then display on all charts that show a
recording from this machine.
3. Click Add.
4. Enter your note.
5. Click OK twice.
6. Click the buttons provided to add, edit, or delete notes.
Add Note to Point, Location, or Recording

To add a note to a point, location, or recording:
1. Right-click the item in the navigator tree > Select New > Note.
2. Select the type of note required.
Archive Note
If you want to keep a machine or measurement note but you don't want
it to display on charts or in the navigator list, you can archive it. To do
this:
1. Right-click the note in the navigator list > Select Edit.
2. Tick the Archived checkbox.
48
Delete Note
To delete a note:
1. Select the item containing the note in the navigator tree — The
navigator list will display all items associated with your selection,
including any notes.
2. Select the note you wish to delete.
3. Press Delete.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Add Bearing to Point

Bearing and gear definitions are added to points on your machines.
Once Ascent knows the fault frequencies for a bearing, it can
automatically display fault frequency markers on spectra (provided you
have set the RPM).
To add a bearing to a point:

1. Right-click a point in the navigator tree > Select New > Bearing
Definition — You will see the list of bearings currently known to
Ascent.
NOTE: More bearings are available in the Commtest Bearing
Archive. You can access this by clicking Search the Commtest
Bearing Archive. See Using the Bearing Database for more
information.
2. Select a bearing from the list.

3. Click OK — You will see the Bearing on Point editor that with tabs for
Bearing Data, Notes, and Interchange. The Interchange tab is open
by default. This contains a list of alternative bearings (if any) that
could be used to replace your chosen bearing when it wears out.
4. Click Select a different bearing to return to the previous window so
you can choose a different bearing.
5. Click the Bearing Data and Notes tabs to see what information they
contain.
6. Click OK to assign your chosen bearing to the point.
49
Searching for bearings
Adding a bearing to a point
50
Define your own Bearings

To create your own bearings you need to know either the fault
frequencies of the bearing, or the internal dimensions. To define your
own bearings:
1. Right-click a point on the navigator tree > Select New > Bearing
Definition.
2. Right-click the list of bearings > Select Add.
3. Enter the required information in the blank fields (place the mouse
cursor in a blank field to see a picture and description of the
required information on the right of the screen).
4. Enter the internal dimensions (if required) > Click Calculate to
calculate the bearing fault frequencies.
5. Click OK to save the new bearing.
Defining your own bearings
Add Gear to Point

To add a gear to a point:
1. Right-click a point in the navigator tree.
2. Select New > Gear Definition.
3. Enter a description and the number of teeth on your gear.
4. Click OK to assign your gear to the point.
51
Apply Different Rotational Speeds across

Machine
Various shafts in a machine may be rotating at different speeds due to
gearboxes or pulley drives, etc. In Ascent you can adjust the RPM value
of recordings taken at different points by applying a point-level RPM
multiplier. Ascent will multiply the actual machine speed by your RPM
Multiplier value to calculate the shaft speed at each point. For Linear
speed Machines, the software can also calculate the point speed using
the RPM Multiplier value and the roller diameter.
To apply different rotational speeds across a machine:

2. Edit the machine speed type.
3. Select EITHER of these machine speed types:
• RPM-based
• Linear speed
4. Enter the default machine speed > Click OK.
NOTE: Linear Speed will use the default unit currently specified
under Options > Unit Preferences.
5. Right-click a point > Select Edit to edit the point definition.

6. Enter an RPM Multiplier value — This value defines how much
faster/slower the shaft is turning at this point compared to the
machine speed. For Linear speed machines you will also need to
enter the diameter of the roller/pulley. The Point RPM value will be
calculated automatically.
7. Click OK.
8. Repeat the above steps to change the rotational speed at additional
points. Once you have defined the RPM Multiplier (and Roller
diameter for Linear speed machines if required) at each point you
can update the RPM values on all recent recordings on an entire
machine.
9. Right-click a machine > Select Set Speed.
10. Enter the running speed or Linear speed of the machine.
11. Select Apply RPM to Multiplier at each Point.
12. Select the required options in the Set RPM/Set Linear Speed editor to
apply the speed value > Click OK.
MORE: See Applying the RPM Value.
52
Editing the machine speed type
Editing a point definition
Applying different rotational speeds across a machine
53
Copy Item
To speed up the process of building your machines, you can copy and
reuse individual items. For example, the point we copied earlier, or non-
structural items such as alarms and routes.
It is also possible to copy entire machines and file them away in storage
so they can be retrieved, renamed, and reused as many times as
required. See Storing Reusable Components in the Library.
To copy an item to one place only:

1. Right-click the item > Select Copy Branch to Clipboard.
2. Right-click the location where you want to place the item > Select
Paste.
NOTE: The pasted item will display below the selected item in
relation to the machine hierarchy. For example, if you paste a
point, it will display below the locations and schedule entries of the
point above.
Delete Item
To delete an item:
1. Select the required item in the navigator.
2. Delete it using EITHER of these methods:
• Right-click it > Select Delete.
• Select the item > Press Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Edit Measurement
You can use the Measurement editor to copy previously recorded
measurements or create new measurements manually. To access the
Measurement editor, select Edit > Edit Measurements.
54
Generate New Measurement

To generate a new measurement:
1. Enter a timestamp date and time.
2. Enter the units to be used on the X and Y scales.
3. Enter the X scale's start and end values.
4. Enter the values for each sample required.
5. Enter any other values you wish to use for the new measurement.
Create New Measurement Base on Previous

Recording
To create a new measurement based on a previous recording:
1. Click the existing recording in the navigator list.
2. Click Load from Measurement — The recording's values display in
the Measurement editor.
3. Change the measurement values as required.
4. Click Create at this location — A new measurement will be created
and displayed in the navigator list.
NOTE: The Measurement editor cannot be used to change the

recorded values of an existing recording. The sampling rate of new
measurements is calculated automatically based on the number of
samples entered into the Samples field.
55
Autosave
Autosave mode automatically saves each change you make. This
enables you to carry out your work without having to remember to click
Save after each change.
Autosave is activated by default. To toggle this feature on or off, select

Options > Auto Save Changes.
NOTE: Autosave is recommended for use in multi-user networked

environments where more than one user is making changes to a
database.
NOTE: Activating Autosave will disable the Undo \ Revert function

in Ascent. I.e. if you mistakenly delete an item you will need to
recreate it manually. For this reason we recommend switch
Autosave off if you are deleting large numbers of items.
Save and Undo Changes
Whenever you make a change (e.g. add or delete an item), the Save
button will become available. Click this to save your changes.
To undo your previous save, select File > Undo \ Revert — This will undo
every change back to the last save.
NOTE: There is only one level of Undo. You cannot return to a state
that was several saves ago.
Use Navigator
Now that you have created your first machine you can use it to learn
how the navigator is used.
56
Navigator List
You can select any item in the navigator tree. When you select an item,
the navigator list (which displays below the navigator tree), will show any
items that belong to your selection. For example, if you select a machine
in the navigator tree, the navigator list will display the points defined at
that machine, as well as any machine notes or reports. You can click a
schedule entry in the navigator tree to display all recordings
associated with that schedule entry in the navigator list.
TIP: You can right-click the navigator list to access to commonly

used commands.
Navigator list
57
Sort Navigator Tree

You can sort the navigator tree in default order, alphabetically, by alarm,
or by machine name. Select Screen > Sort to access these options:
• Sort Navigator by Alarms — Machines and points with the
worst alarm condition display at the top of the navigator.
• Sort Tree Alphabetically — Order tree items alphabetically.
• Sort Machine Name Alphabetically — Order machines
alphabetically by name.
You can also sort items manually by dragging and dropping them into
new areas. You can use drag and drop to resort machines in any order
and change the order of points and measurement locations within a
machine.
1. Select Edit > Enable Drag and Drop to enable this feature.
2. Drag and drop the item to a new position — The blue highlight
indicates where the dragged item will be dropped.
NOTE: Activating drag and drop will disable the alarm-based and
alphabetical sorting options. To re-enable these, untick Enable
Drag and Drop in the Edit menu.
Dragging an item to the required location
By default, the most recent measurements display first. However, you

can sort the navigator list to show the oldest measurements first (if
required). To do this:
1. Select Screen > Measurements in Navigator.
2. Select either Oldest first or Most Recent first.
58
Navigator Search Filter

The navigator filter displays above the navigator. You can select Screen
> Show Search Bar to toggle it on or off.
Navigator search filter
You can use the navigator search filter to narrow the machines, points,
locations, and recordings displayed in the navigator tree.
You can filter a navigator list item by:

• Folder name
• Machine name
• Point name
Axis
59
Create / Edit / Delete filter

To create a new filter or edit an existing one:
1. Click the right-facing >> arrow beside the search filter to expand it
— The filter window will open in the main graph window.
NOTE: You can select a previously defined filter from the dropdown
field.
NOTE: To disable the filter, select No Filter from the list — This is
the filter's default state following installation.
2. Enter a suitable name in the Filter Name field (e.g. PM2 DE).
NOTE: As you define the filtering criteria used, the navigator list
will update in real time.
3. Select a folder to search within from the Folder(s) dropdown field —

This option will only be available if there is more than one folder in
the navigator tree.
4. Enter the name of the machine you wish to search within (e.g. Dryer)
in the Machine(s) field.
5. Enter the machine name.
6. Enter the points you wish to filter within in the Point(s) field.
7. Select an axis from the Axis/Axes dropdown field.
8. Click Save to save your new filter or Clear to reset the filter and start
again.
Expanding the search filter
60
Creating a filter
Delete Existing Filter

To delete an existing filter:
1. Select it from the filter dropdown field.
2. Expand the filter window.
3. Press Delete.
Filter Recordings
You can filter recordings by RPM or date range. To do this:
1. Tick the By RPM or By Date checkbox.
2. Enter or select a date range using the text and date fields —
Recordings outside the range(s) specified will be removed from the
navigator list.
61
Hide Detailed Recording Information

You can show or hide the RPM and measurement type of recordings in
the navigator. Hiding this information can improve performance slightly
on very large databases.
To toggle this feature on or off, select Screen > Measurements in

Navigator > Show RPM and Measurement Enter.
Recordings with RPM and measurement type displayed
The same recordings showing only their timestamp
Hide Recording in Navigator

As you add more recordings to your database, the speed at which the
navigator list displays them may slow down, particularly when you have
many hundreds of recordings. To speed up the response time you can
limit the number of recordings displayed in the navigator list.
To hide a recording in the Navigator:

1. Right-click the navigator list.
2. Select Recordings Displayed.
3. Select a number from the available options.
Select Multiple Items

You can select more than one item at a time in the navigator list.
62
Select Sequential Items

1. To do this hold down the left mouse button and drag up or down to
the last item you want to select.
2. Another method is to click the top-most item you want to select,
hold down the SHIFT key and use the down arrow key to highlight
and select sequential items.
3. A third method is to click the first item, hold down the SHIFT key and
click the last item you want to select.
Selecting sequential items
Select Non-sequential Items

To select multiple items that are not sequential, hold down the CTRL key
while you click items in the navigator list.
Selecting non-sequential items
Archive Notes and Recordings

You can archive recordings, machine notes, and measurement notes.
This means they will be hidden from view (but not deleted). Archived
items will not display in the navigator list or on charts. To archive a note
or recording:
1. Right-click it in the navigator list > Select Edit.
2. Tick the Archived checkbox on the editor.
3. Right-click an item in the navigator list area to redisplay it > Select
Show Archived items.
63
Creation Palette
The creation palette contains shortcut buttons for routine tasks such as
creating a bearing or adding a note.
If the creation palette is not visible, select Screen > Show Creation
Palette to display it.
Hover on each button to view an explanation of what it does.
Creation palette
Customize Work Area

You can hide or reposition screen elements such as the navigator and
creation palette to suit your preferences. To access these options, click
Screen.
The full list of options is available from the dropdown menu. You can
hide, show, or reposition screen elements by ticking or unticking options
in the list.
64
Create Route
You create routes in Ascent, then send them to your portable instrument.
You cannot create or edit routes on your instrument.
NOTE: Routes are not applicable to online (vbOnline and Ranger)

instruments.
You can now send the Drying Machines folder to your instrument and
collect data by selecting the machine, points, and locations from the
Record menu on your instrument. However, we will first define a route
that is an ordered list of measurement locations that you follow from
start to finish when collecting data. You can then transfer this route to
your instrument, which will prompt you to collect the measurements in
the order listed.
65
To create a route:
1. Click the Build button if you are not already in Build mode.
NOTE: You will need to click the Manual Build Mode link if you are
using the licensed Machine Builder wizard.
2. Create a new route using EITHER of these methods:

• Click the Create a new Route button on the Creation
Palette.
• Right-click a blank area in the navigator > Select New > Route
— You will be asked if you want to add all the measurement
locations to the route.
3. Click Yes to open the Route editor — All the measurement locations
are listed in the window. These are the route entries that will make
up your route.
NOTE: A measurement location must have at least one schedule
entry defined for it to display in a route. Your instrument needs to
know what type of measurement to take. This information is
contained in the schedule entry.
4. Change the default name from Unnamed Route to Weekly Route or

enter a name of your choice.
NOTE: The name cannot be more than 50 characters long.
5. Use EITHER of these methods to change the order of the

measurement locations (if required):
• Click and hold the mouse button while you drag the selected
location to a new position.
• Select a location > Move it using the red up/down arrows.
TIP: Press and hold CTRL or SHIFT while you select items in the list
if you wish to select more than one at a time.
6. Use EITHER of these methods to access a list of common operations:

• Click Operations.
• Right-click an item.
7. Click OK to save your route when you are happy with the order of it.
8. Click Build to switch off Build mode — Your completed folder
displays, ready to be sent to your instrument.
66
Completed folder displays
Route editor
67
Add Instrument to Ascent

You will need to add your SCOUT/vbX series, Ranger, or vbOnline
instrument to Ascent's instrument database before you can transfer
data.
If you intend to transfer portable instrument data via an external USB

flash drive (rather than directly to Ascent), you will first need to add at
least one portable instrument to Ascent. To do this:
1. Connect your instrument and PC using the supplied
communications cable (USB or Ethernet for SCOUT/vbX instruments
/ Ethernet or Serial for vbOnline devices).
2. Start Ascent.
3. Select Edit > Manage > vb Instruments.
4. Click Add if your instrument is not listed > Select the instrument type
you wish to add.
5. Use EITHER of these methods to add your instrument:
• Double-click you instrument name if it is listed in the right of the
window.
• Click the Add button if your instrument is not listed > Ensure the
IP address used by your instrument and Ascent is the same.
NOTE: You only need to add your instrument to Ascent when you
first connect to the software. In future it will be detected
automatically.
Adding your instrument to Ascent
68
Automatically Set Instrument IP Address

Your instrument can be configured to accept an automatically assigned
IP address from your network DHCP server. This applies when you are
communicating with your SCOUT/vbX instrument using an Ethernet
connection (via a switch for example), not using USB plug and play.
To configure your instrument to accept an automatically assigned IP

address from your network DHCP server:
2. Select your instrument.
3. Press Configure — The vbX Properties window opens.
4. Select the Setup tab.
5. Tick the Obtain an IP address automatically via DHCP checkbox.
6. Click OK.
In addition to Proflashing and network connection options, the vbX

Properties window includes a Tasks tab which contains the following
options:
• Instrument Details — Display your instrument's hardware,
firmware, and network details.
• Copy Database — Save a copy of your instrument's database
(.pbd) to an external source, if you wish to back up the database.
• Overwrite Database — Select a database backup file to copy to
the instrument.
• Synchronize Time — Synchronize your instrument's time and
data stamps with your PC.
• Screen Capture — Display and control the screen of a
connected instrument using a popup window. This is useful for
capturing images of screens, measurements, and reports.
69
Transfer Folders to Instrument

The steps below assume you have already added your SCOUT/vbSeries
portable instrument to Ascent's instrument database.
NOTE: The Send and Receive buttons are only used when
communicating with a SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument. They
are not used for communications with vbOnline or Ranger devices.
1. Plug your instrument into your PC using the supplied

communications cable.
2. Open Ascent.
3. Switch your instrument on.
4. Click Send in Ascent.
5. Select Instrument in the Comms Method field.
NOTE: If you wish to import or export an XML recordings file from

or to an external source, you can use the Import from File or
Export to File in the Comms Method field.
6. Use these steps to transfer folders to your SCOUT/vbX instrument:

a. Select your instrument in the Instrument field.
b. Select the folders you wish to transfer by selecting the
checkboxes beside their names. Click Send. When the send
process is complete your instrument will return to the main
menu.
7. Use these steps to transfer folders to your vX000 instrument:
a. Select vbX000 instrument in the Instrument field —
Communication with your instrument will commence. The
Prepare for Send window opens.
b. Use EITHER of these methods to select the required folder:
• Select an existing folder you wish to replace.
• Click one of the new labels to select an empty folder.
8. Click OK — Your instrument will display in the main menu when the
communication is complete.
70
Transferring folders to your instrument
Transferring folders to your vbX000 folder
71
Transfer Recordings to Ascent Database

The steps below assume you have already added your SCOUT/vbSeries
portable instrument to Ascent's instrument database.
NOTE: The Send and Receive buttons are only used when
communicating with a SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument. They
are not used for communications with vbOnline or Ranger devices.
To transfer recordings to your Ascent database:

1. Plug your instrument into your PC using the communications cable
supplied.
2. Open Ascent.
4. Click Receive in Ascent to establish communication between
the software and your instrument.
5. Select Instrument in the Comms Method field.
NOTE: If you wish to import or export an XML recordings file from
or to an external source, you can use the Import from File or
Export to File in the Comms Method field.
6. Use these steps to transfer folders to your SCOUT/vbX instrument:

a. Select your instrument in the Instrument field — All folders
located on your instrument will display.
b. Select the folders you wish to import by selecting the
checkboxes beside their names. Your instrument transfers
recordings by sending entire storage folders to the PC.
c. Click Receive near the bottom-right of the window to begin
transferring recordings. When the transfer is complete click OK
then Close. The Open panel will be displayed.
d. Select an imported folder and click OK.
72
7. Use these steps to transfer folders to your vbX000 instrument:

a. Select vbX000 instrument in the Instrument field.
NOTE: If you only have a single folder defined on your instrument,
the receive process will proceed automatically. If there are multiple
folders on your instrument, a window will display, enabling you to
select the folders to transfer.
b. Tick the Receive multiple folders checkbox to transfer

more than one folder at a time.
c. Tick the checkboxes beside the folders you wish to receive.
d. Click OK.
Transferring recordings from your instrument to your Ascent database
73
Navigator Tree
The top half of the navigator (the navigator tree) shows the structure of
the machines in this folder:
• The Drying Machines folder you have been working on is

shown at the top of the navigator tree.
• Machines contained in a folder are listed beneath the folder
icon.
• Points represent an area on a machine and are listed
beneath the machine they belong to.
• Measurement locations (horizontal, vertical, etc.) represent
the actual place on the machine where you will place a sensor
to take measurements.
• Schedule entries represent a recording scheduled to be
taken. They are listed directly beneath the measurement
locations they apply to.
A small expand symbol beside an item indicates you can select the
item to expand it.
You can right-click an item in the navigator tree to display relevant menu
options.
74
Navigator tree
Maintain Data Integrity

CAUTION! Ascent identifies machines, points, axes and sensors by their
names. If you rename these items on your instrument and then transfer
data from your instrument to Ascent, the software will regard the items
as new.
CAUTION! You should avoid duplicating names on your instrument.

These will be differentiated solely on the order in which they display on
your instrument and in Ascent.
75
Use Example Data

Data display and analysis features in Ascent include generating reports
and plotting data on charts. If you have not yet collected any data, you
can experiment with the example machines and recordings included in
the factory default database.
To use the example data:

1. Ensure you have already created an example database as described
in Creating a Database.
2. Click Open.
3. Select a folder from the list (not the Drying Machines folder that you
created earlier).
TIP: If you can't see any folders, select the expand icon beside
one of the blue site icons.
4. Click OK to open your chosen folder — The navigator will display the
machines within this folder.
5. Select the expand icons to view the machine structures.
TIP: Alternatively, right-click the navigator tree > Select Expand all
to open all machines at once.
76
Section 3 — Reports
This section describes the reports available and how to access these.
Generate Report
The reporting system provides a valuable tool for analyzing your data. A
variety of reports are available to help you summarize information and
highlight areas of concern.
To generate a report:
1. Select a machine or another item in the navigator.
2. Click the Report button > Select the required report.
NOTE: The reports available vary according to your version of

Ascent and license status.
3. Right-click any displayed report to access commands for changing

the format of the report.
EG: You might wish to include or exclude certain data.
NOTE: You can generate a report on a single machine by selecting

it in the navigator. You can also generate a report for all machines
in the folder by selecting the folder icon at the top of the navigator.
MORE: See Printing Charts and Reports.
TIP: The date on which recordings were taken is displayed in many

reports by default. To also display the time of the recordings, right-
click the report > Select Show Time.
NOTE: If you make any changes to the default settings, you will be
prompted to save these when you close the report. If you want the
changes to be permanent (until you change them again) click OK.
Click No to discard the changes.
77
Running reports
78
Alarm Report
By default, the Alarm report details the current and previous two states
of each alarm at the selected location on a machine.
Alarm report
To change the number of previous recordings displayed:

1. Right-click the report > Select Set History Count.
2. Enter a value.
3. Click OK.
NOTE: The latest recording is included in this value. If you set the
value to 1, only the latest recording will display on the report.
NOTE: You can also select a date range or data type filter by right-
clicking the report and selecting the Date Range (All Dates) and
Data Enters filter parameters.
79
Balancing Report
Once you have completed a balance job using your instrument, you can
view a summary of the process and results in the Balancing report.
You can also double-click the balance job icon in the navigator list to run
this report.
Right-click the report to access commands for changing the format of

the report. These options are also available when you select Options >
Balancing Reports.
Balance job icon
80
Detailed Exception Report

The Exception report provides an overall summary of the condition of
your machines. Each machine is listed with a colored horizontal bar
showing its status (red = danger, green = OK etc.). The most critical
machines are shown at the top of the report.
The machine names and locations are shown as underlined blue links.
You can click these to select the required machine or location in the
navigator tree.
Machines in the worst condition are listed at the top. If a machine does
not have any alarms, its status will be listed as Unknown. By default the
Exception report displays information for all the machines in a folder.
Running an Exception report
81
Last 8 Measurements
This is similar to the Last Measurement report but includes the previous
7 measurements for comparison. By default, this report shows the
percentage change between the latest measurement and the one
before it. You can use the right-click shortcut menu to change this
setting.
Last Measurement Report

The Last Measurement report displays the spectrum overall values of the
latest measurements taken for each schedule entry at a selected
machine. It also includes the overall value of the previous recording for
comparison and gives the percentage change between the previous and
latest recordings.
You can right-click the report to access commands for hiding or showing
different columns of data and setting the number of previous recordings
to include in the report.
Machine Assessment Reports

The Machine Assessment report (MAR) system simplifies generation of
PdM condition and status reports for third-party clients. Once route or
machinery analysis has been completed by an analyst or service
provider, this tool enables a report to be generated detailing specific
recommendations and existing/upcoming fault conditions. Reports can
be printed or exported in standard HTML or XML format.
NOTE: Before you create a Machine Assessment report, you will

need to configure the Machine Assessment report database. Until
this is done, all reporting menu items will be greyed out and
unavailable.
82
Machine Assessment Summary reports

Each Machine Assessment report is automatically associated with a
Machine Assessment Summary (MAS) report when it is created. The
Machine Assessment Summary report is generated and populated
automatically using information entered in the Machine Assessment
reports. When you have finished creating individual Machine
Assessment reports, you can publish these reports individually, or
together with the companion Machine Assessment Summary report.
The Machine Assessment Summary report briefly summarizes the

machine reports, providing clients with a simple one sheet overview of
the state of their plant equipment.
NOTE: The Machine Assessment report system is only included in

Ascent Level 2 and 3 (not Level 1).
83
Configure Machine Assessment Report Database

Before using the Machine Assessment Report tool for the first time, you
will need to create a report database. To do this:
1. Open Ascent,
2. Select Database > Configure Advanced Reporting.
CAUTION! Do NOT change the username and password, or the
default database name — ascent_database_report.fdb.
3. Tick the Local Machine checkbox to create a database on your local

PC:
a. Click Create.
b. Locate and select the required location for the database.
4. Tick the Network checkbox to create a database on a networked
drive:
a. Click Create.
b. Enter a server IP or name, and an absolute path to the database
in the Network Settings window that opens.
c. Click OK.
NOTE: If you are creating a network database, the network path

must be an 'absolute'. It must include correct drive mapping from
the server's perspective rather than a virtual server address. For
example, 'P:\MyDatabase\Database.fdb' would be acceptable, but
'\\Server\MyDatabase\Database.fdb' would not.
5. Click OK — The database will be created. You can now run a

Machine Assessment report.
Configuring advanced reporting
84
Run Machine Assessment Report

Once you have configured the machine assessment report you can run
it. To do this:
1. Right-click a machine, point, or location on the navigator tree.
2. Select New > Report > Machine Assessment Report.
3. Enter a folder name in the Create in New Advanced Reporting Folder
field.
4. Click OK.
NOTE: New and existing Machine Assessment reports are listed
beneath the machine they were created for at the bottom of the
navigator list. You can access them at any time by right-clicking
them and selecting Edit.
5. Right click the new report > Select Edit — The Advanced Reporting
editor consists of three main panels:
• Summary Navigator Panel (top left) — All Machine Assessment
Summary reports available for the data folder currently open.
• Machine Report List (bottom left) — All Machine Assessment
reports in the selected Machine Assessment Summary report.
• Report Editor Panel (right) — Report View existing reports and
enter report details.
6. Select a machine name In the lower left Machine Report List panel —
The Report Editor Panel on the right displays a form if it is not
already visible. You can use this form to enter report details.
7. Select a fault type in the Fault field or enter a fault in this field if it
does not contain a suitable fault description — When you save the
report, the new description will be added to the list for future use.
8. Click the browse button to edit fault type descriptions you have
previously created.
9. Enter the location of the fault in the field provided.
10. Select a priority rating in the field provided — The priority selected
will display beside the machine in the Machine Report List panel.
11. Enter the condition of the machine and the nature of the repairs
required in the Recommendations field.
12. Right-click an image box > Select Capture View from Ascent to load
the current chart view into the image field, or Load Image from File
to attach an image to the report (e.g. a photograph of a damaged
component).
85
13. Enter a note explaining what the attached images illustrate in the
Image Notes text area (if you attached an image to the report).
14. Select the vibration analyst's name field provided, or enter a new
name in the field.
15. Click the browse button to edit previously created analyst
names (if required).
16. Toggle the Font Size button to adjust the font size for viewing
the report (if required).
17. Click the Save button.
NOTE: Click the Preview tab at any time to preview the report in
the 'Report Editor Panel'. You will be prompted to save the report
before it will display.
18. Click Reports from the main Advanced Reporting Editor menu >
Select the appropriate report status options:
• Lock — If the report is complete. The report will become read-
only.
• Unlock — If the report was previously locked but you wish to
change it.
• Mark as Complete — If the machine report is finished.
• Mark as Surveyed — If the machine recordings have been
gathered.
• Mark as Operational — If the machine is still functioning.
86
Accessing Machine Assessment reports
87
The options you select will be reflected in the machine panel under the
respective value columns:
• L Locked
• C Completed
• S Surveyed
• O Operational
Available options
You can use these parameters to filter items displayed in the report.
Filter options are located on the main menu bar.
Filter options
Access Machine Assessment Report

You can view existing Machine Assessment reports using the:
• Ascent graph panel
• Advanced Reporting editor
Access Report in Ascent

To view a machine assessment report in Ascent, open a machine
assessment report using EITHER of these methods:
• Click Report > Select the required machine assessment

report.
NOTE: If the machine assessment reports are not available, and
you are licensed for this feature, see Configure the Machine
Assessment Report Database. An assessment report database
must be created before these menu items will be enabled.
• Double-click a machine assessment report in the navigator list

— The report details display on the right.
88
Access Machine Assessment Report using Advanced

Reporting editor
To access a machine assessment reporting using the Advanced
Reporting editor:
1. Right-click the report in the navigator list > Select Edit or View >
Advanced Reporting Editor.
2. Select a Machine Summary report from the Summary Navigator
panel on the left, or a Machine Assessment report from the Machine
Report list.
TIP: You can press and hold CTRL or Shift to select multiple
reports.
3. Select the Preview tab in the Report Editor panel on the right — The
report displays.
Open Advanced Reporting Editor

You can select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to access the
Advanced Reporting editor.
89
Differentiate between Machine Assessment Reports

You can use timestamps and brackets around the report name to
distinguish between Machine Assessment and Machine Assessment
Summary reports in the navigator list. A Machine Assessment Summary
report is not listed with a timestamp or brackets in the navigator list.
NOTE: Machine Assessment Summary reports are stored at the

data folder level within the navigator list, not under machines.
You can double-click the Machine Assessment Summary

report, then click it once to display the report in the graphs panel on the
right.
Machine Assessment Summary report
A Machine Assessment report

has a timestamp and the report name is listed in brackets.
You can double-click the item to

display the machine associated with the graphs panel on the right.
90
Machine Assessment report
91
Publish Machine Summary Report

You can export machine reports in HTML or XML format and provide
these to interested parties for review using a standard web browser. You
can also print hard copies by selecting File > Print.
To publish a Machine Summary report:

1. Select the data folder to access Machine Summary reports in the
navigator list.
2. Right-click the target Machine Assessment Summary report from
the navigator list > Select Reports > Publish Machine Assessment
Summary Report.
3. Select the reports you wish to publish from Published Reports area:
• Selection — Include the Machine Reports currently selected and
highlighted.
All Machines — Include all machines in the selected Summary report.
NOTE: As you selected the publish option from the Datafolder level,
the first and second options will both select all available Machine
Assessment reports.
• Top 20 by Priority — Include the twenty highest priority reports

in ascending rank. Highest priority is Safety, lowest is Non-
Operational.
• Priority More Than — Only include reports with a priority higher
than that specified in the dropdown field.
4. Select the parameters of the published report from the Settings
area:
• Include summary — Include the overall Machines Assessment
Summary report in addition to the individual Machine
Assessment Reports (leave unchecked).
• Include incomplete — Include all reports that have a
completion status of Not Completed in addition to Completed
machine reports.
• Use individual styles — Use individual styles for each Machine
report. If deselected, all reports will use a single common style
sheets (.xslt files).
• Lock All Reports — Locks all reports once publication is
complete.
5. Click Browse to select the location on your computer you will
publish the report to.
92
6. Select the required publication format in the Output Format field:

• HTML
• XML
7. Click Publish — The report is published and exported in HTML or XML
together with any related style sheets, images, and other related
files.
NOTE: The published files consist of two HTML or XML files and a
'data' folder. One HTML/XML file will start with 'MSR'. This file
contains the Machine Assessment Summary of all reports
generated. The second file will begin with 'MAS'. This file contains
the individual Machine Assessment Reports for each machine.
Publishing the Machine Summary report
93
Publish Machine Assessment Report

To publish a machine assessment report:
1. Right-click the target Machine Assessment report under a machine
in the navigator tree > Select Edit.
2. Select a machine from the Machine Report List at the bottom.
TIP: Press CTRL + click to select individual Machine Assessment
reports.
3. Select File > Publish from the Advanced Reporting Editor main
menu.
4. Untick the Include Summary checkbox.
5. Select the parameters for the published report in the Settings area:
• Include summary — Include the overall Summary report in
addition to the individual Machine reports (leave unticked if
publishing individual Machine reports).
• Include incomplete — Include all reports with a completion
status of Not Completed, in addition to Completed machine
reports.
• Use individual styles — Use individual styles for each Machine
report. If unticked, all reports will use a single common style
sheets (.xslt files).
• Lock All Reports — Locks all reports once publication is
complete.
6. Click Browse > Locate and select a location for the published files.
7. Select a publication format in the Output Format field:
• HTML
• XML
8. Click Publish — The report is published and exported in HTML or
XML, together with any related style sheets, images, or other related
files.
NOTE: The published files will consist of one HTML or XML file and
a 'data' folder. The individual HTML/XML file contains reports for
the machine(s) selected for publication.
94
Publish machine assessment report
Add Company Logo to Published Report

In its default state, a published report will include an Ascent logo in the
top left corner. If required, you can remove this image or replace it with
your company logo:
• You can replace the default image (logo.jpg) stored in the Ascent
Styles folder (usually C:\Program
Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles). The replacement file must be
in JPEG format with the extension .jpg and the title logo.
• You can edit the MachineProvider.xslt XML style files stored in
the Summary and Individual folders (usually C:\Program
Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles). These two files include links to
the image displayed in published reports. You can be edit these
links to select a locally stored image rather than the default
image.
The exact location of these files will vary according to your operating
system and its variant (32-bit or 64-bit). The example locations above
apply to typical Ascent software installations using Windows XP 32-bit.
They are not be suitable for 64-bit operating systems (which may use
folder names such as Program Files (x64)).
95
Edit XML File

To edit the XML file:
1. Prepare a new image to be used in your published reports.
NOTE: The logo image will be scaled automatically to match the

available dimensions of the report, so will not typically need to be
resized before it is used. However, for this reason, an image
larger than 80 pixels wide by 30 pixels high is recommended.
Increasing the size of a smaller image may result in poor image
quality. Reducing the size of a larger image should not result in
significant image degradation.
2. Copy the image to a known location (e.g. your desktop or the root of
a hard drive).
3. Press CTRL + E to open Windows Explorer or right-click the Windows
Start icon > Select Explore.
4. Navigate to the Individual folder within Ascent\Styles on your
computer (typically at C:\Program
Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles\Individual).
5. Right-click the MachineProvider.xslt file within the folder > Select
Open With > Notepad.
6. Select Edit > Go To from the Notepad menu or ALT+G from your
keyboard.
7. Enter 122 in the field.
8. Click OK — Your cursor will jump to line 122.
9. Edit the text file on the selected line: //localhost/C:\Program
Files\Commtest\Ascent\Styles\logo.jpg.
10. Change the text to redirect instead to the location of the image you
prepared earlier (e.g. file://localhost/C:\Documents and
Settings\JohnDoe\Desktop\MyLogo.jpg').
11. Select File > Save in Notepad.
12. Repeat steps 2 to 9 for the MachineProvider.xslt file stored in the
Summary folder — Once you have finished editing the two XML files
you are ready to create your report.
13. Republish the report — Your new logo will display in the top left.
96
Open Existing Machine Assessment Report

Database
When opening an existing Ascent database for which reports have
previously been generated you may wish to also open its associated
Machine Assessment Report database. To do this:
1. Open Ascent.
2. Select Database > Configure Advanced Reporting.
3. Click Open.
4. Select an existing Machine Assessment report database.
5. Click Open.
6. Click OK on the Advanced Reporting Setup panel.
If the selected database contains more than one session (set of reports),
the Please select a Reporting Framework Database session window will
open. Select a database session containing the Machine Assessment
Summaries you wish to view > Click OK.
The previous Machine Assessment Reports contained in this database

will now be accessible from the navigator tree or Machine Assessment
report editor — Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor.
Restore Machine Assessment Report Database

You can restore a machine assessment report database using backup
options or the text menu.
97
Restore using Backup Options

To restore a previous Machine Assessment report database backup:
1. Select File > Database > Backup Options or Database > Backup
Options.
2. Select the Reporting Files tab.
3. Click Browse > Locate and select an alternative backup directory (if
required).
4. Select a .gbak format backup file from those listed in the selected
backup directory.
5. Click Restore — The backup will be restored, overwriting your
current database.
Restoring the machine assessment report database using the backup options
98
Restore using Text Menu

To restore a Machine Assessment report database from Ascent without
opening the Backup Options panel:
1. Select Database > Restore > Restore Report Database or File >
Database > Restore > Restore Report — An message will warn that
restoring a Machine Assessment Report database will erase all data
in the currently open database and advise that the Ascent database
must be no older than the Machine Assessment Report database.
2. Click Yes to proceed.
3. Navigate to a specific backup file (.gbak format).
4. Click Open — The Restoring Reporting Database panel will open and
the restore process will begin.
5. Review the process text once the process is complete to confirm it
was successful and no error messages have been shown.
6. Click Close.
7. Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to reopen the Machine
Assessment Report editor.
NOTE: The backup will overwrite your active Machine Assessment
report database. Any reports that have been created since the last
backup will not be in this file and will therefore be lost.
Add Machine to Report

To add one or more machines to your current Report:
1. Right click a machine.
2. Select New > Report > Machine Assessment Report.
3. Select the report you wish to add the machine to in the Add to
Existing Advanced Reporting Folder field.
4. Click OK — The machine will be added to the existing report and
listed in the Machine Report List when you reopen the report.
99
Configure Database Association

Ascent and Machine Assessment report backup files are managed in the
Backup Options window. You can use this panel to link the backup of
your Machine Assessment report database with an Ascent database
backup. Once this association has been created, the Machine
Assessment Report database will be backed up automatically whenever
the Ascent database is backed up (e.g. when triggering Database >
Backup Now!, File > Database > Backup Now! or when automatic
periodic backups have been configured).
To configure database associations:

1. Select File > Database > Backup Options or Database > Backup
Options.
2. Select the Reporting Options tab.
3. Tick the Include Advanced Reports backup when Ascent Database
backed up checkbox.
NOTE: The field on this page points to the Firebird gbak creation
application. Typically you will not need to change this link.
However, if you move the Firebird backup utility, you will need to
enter the file's new location here. Usually you will leave this
location in its default state (or click Default to return to this
location after a fresh Ascent installation).
4. Select the Reporting Files tab.

5. Click Backup Report DB — The Backing Up Reporting Database
panel will open and the backup process will start.
6. Review the process text to confirm the process was successful and
no error messages have been shown.
7. Click Close.
8. Click OK.
9. Back up the Ascent database and the Machine Assessment report
database manually in a single step:
a. Select Database > Backup Now! or File > Database > Backup
Now.
b. Select the Ascent Files tab on the Backup Options panel.
NOTE: Clicking Backup Now! will not cause both backups to be

created. Only the Ascent database backup will be created. When
this database is backed up in future, the Machine Assessment
Report database associated with it will also be backed up.
100
Configuring a database association
Reassociate Report
When you create a Machine Assessment report or folder, it is
automatically associated with the folder you have open in Ascent, and
the Machine under which it was created. However, it is possible for these
associations to be lost. This can happen if an Ascent Folder or Machine is
deleted or under specific .vbz file import conditions (e.g. exporting a
Folder structure, deleting Machines, then reimporting the Folder).
Losing your Folder and Machine associations will leave Reports as

unattached orphans. These unassociated Reports remain in the Machine
Assessment Report database. They are not displayed in, or accessible
from, the Ascent navigator list. Consequently you cannot access them
from the Report menu. However, you can select View > Advanced
Reporting Editor to access them.
101
To correct this situation, you can identify and reassociate unassociated

reports with an Ascent Folder and Machine using the Report
Reassociation Tool. To do this:
1. Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor.
2. Select Edit > Reassociate Reports — The right panel in the Report
Reassociation Tool displays all folders present in the currently open
Ascent database. The left panel displays all reports and report
folders (Report Folders are at the root level, Machine reports display
beneath these). Any Report Folders or reports listed in the left panel
that are not currently associated with an Ascent Folder on the right
panel will display with a question mark ( for Folders and for
Reports). In the example below, the MDF Integrale SA Report Folder
and Plate 4 report do not have current associations with any of the
Ascent Folders shown in the right panel.
3. Select any unassociated report or Report Folder from the left panel
— These are indicated with a question mark.
4. Select the Ascent folder you wish to associate this Report item with
from the right panel.
NOTE: If you wish to change an existing association to another
Ascent Folder, you can also select any Report or Report Folder that
currently has an association. These are not listed with a question
mark.
5. Click Associate — A confirmation message will display, asking if you

wish to associate the report or Report Folder with the selected
Ascent folder.
6. Click Yes to confirm the new association or No to cancel — The
orphaned report folder is now associated with the selected Ascent
folder. However, it is likely that the Machines the Reports were
previously associated with do not exist in the new Ascent Folder. A
message will display advising whether this is the case, and that the
orphan reports must now be associated with existing Machines in
the newly paired Ascent folder.
102
7. Click Yes — If you click No, you can return to the Orphaned Report
editor later by reopening the Report Reassociation tool and clicking
Reassociate Machine. This button will only display when orphan
report items are detected. The Orphaned Report editor is split into
three panels:
• The left panel lists all orphaned reports which may be
reassociated with existing Machines.
• The central panel lists the Ascent Folders contained in the
open Ascent database (these Folders contain the Machines
with which you may reassociate the orphan reports).
• The right panel lists the Machines contained in the Ascent
Folder selected from the central panel.
NOTE: The right panel will initially be blank when you open the
Orphaned Report editor. It will only populate once an Ascent folder
has been selected from the central panel.
8. Select an orphan report from the left panel.

9. Select the Ascent folder containing the machine you wish to
associate the report with from the central panel — This should be
the same Ascent folder selected when you reassociated the report
folder earlier. All machines contained in the Ascent folder will be
listed in the Ascent Machines panel on the right.
10. Select an Ascent machine from the right panel.
11. Click Associate — A confirmation message will display, asking
whether you wish to associate the report with the machine.
12. Click Yes to confirm the new association or No to cancel.
13. Repeat this sequence for all orphan reports shown in the Reports
panel on the left — As they are reassociated, they will be removed
from the panel.
14. Click Close to close the Orphaned Report editor when no further
reports are listed.
15. Click Close to close the Report Reassociation Tool — The previously
orphaned report folders and reports now display in the bottom left
navigator list of the Ascent folder and machine(s) with which they
have been associated.
103
Orphaned Report editor
Report Reassociation tool
Previously orphaned report folders
104
Machine Summary Report

The Machine Summary report lists the recordings status of Machine
Points stored within a folder within a specified time range. Machines are
placed below one of three possible tables according to their recordings
status:
• Not Recorded — No expected recordings taken.
• Partially Recorded — Some expected recordings taken.
• Recorded — All expected recordings taken.
Machine names are listed below the Machine column. Actual recordings
taken relative to the expected numbers are listed below the Fully
Recorded, Partially Recorded, or Not Recorded column.
The times and dates of the last recordings measured for each machine
are listed under the Last Recording Date column.
To select a report date range:

1. Right-click within the Report window.
2. Select Date Range (Range) — The Select Date Range window opens.
3. Enter the required date range.
4. Click OK — The report will refresh using the date range specified.
NOTE: The date range you select will be used as the default when
next you open the Machine Summary report.
105
Notes Report
The Notes report lists all notes stored within a Folder, ordered by
Machine. Notes for individual Points and any associated measurements
are displayed below each Machine listed.
To select a report date range:

1. Right-click within the Report window.
2. Select Date Range (Range).
3. Enter the required date range.
4. Click OK.
NOTE: The date range you select will be used as the default when
next you open the Notes report.
Routes Due Report

The Routes Due report lists all routes in the current folder that are due to
be recorded today. If required you can change the date (e.g. you might
wish to see which routes are due next week). To do this:
1. Right-click the background > Select Setup Report.
2. Enter a new date.
3. Click Continue.
106
Structure and Route Reports

The Structure and Route reports generate text descriptions of the
contents of your database. The Structure Report lists all machines,
points, measurement locations, and schedule entries in the current
selection. To run structure and route reports:
1. Select a machine.
2. Select Reports > Structure Report.
3. Right-click the background > Select Setup Report to include bearing
part numbers in the report.
4. Tick the Include Bearing Part Numbers checkbox.
5. Select Click here to continue to generate the report — The Route
report creates a list of all route entries (the measurement locations
on a route).
6. Select a route to produce a list of route entries or click a machine to
generate a report for all routes that include this machine.
7. Select Report > Route Report.
8. Right-click the background > Select Setup Report to include
schedule entries or remove them from the report.
9. Tick or untick the Include Schedule Entries checkbox.
10. Select Click here to continue to generate the report.
107
Structure report
Route report
108
Automated Reports
If you need to print a large number of charts or reports, this process can
be carried out very quickly using the automated report system in Ascent.
An automated report creates a printable multi-page output of the latest
recordings using the chart or report you choose. For example, you can
create an alarm report of the latest recordings at every schedule entry
on a machine and compile these into one printable report (one alarm
report per page).
To generate an automated report:

1. Open the chart or report you wish to print.
2. Select an item in the navigator (e.g. a machine).
3. Select View > Automated Report.
4. Select the items you would like the automated report to be
generated for.
5. Click OK — Nothing will be printed yet.
6. Select the color scheme for the report, whether to show page
numbers, adjust the paper layout, and more (if required).
7. Click Preview.
8. Click Close to close the preview window.
9. Click Print to send this report to a printer.
10. Click Export to Word if you wish to annotate the chart before
printing — This will open the report as a Microsoft Word document
so you can add comments and highlight areas of interest, etc.
NOTE: If you want to selectively choose items to generate an

automated report on, such as specific locations on several
different machines, you can tag individual items and create a
report of just those items. Tagging is a method of grouping
selected items so that operations can be carried out on them
collectively. See Tagging for more information on tagging and how
to create an automated report on tagged items.
109
Automated report
Printing an automated report
110
Section 4 — Plotting Data
Section 4 — Plot Data

This section explains how to plot data.
Use Charts
This section provides an overview on plotting your data and the features
you can use to analyze your data (e.g. fault frequencies and baseline
measurements).
To use a chart:
1. Select a schedule entry on the navigator tree — The navigator

list will display the recordings that belong to this schedule entry.
TIP: You might need to expand a Machine, Point and/or Location to

see a schedule entry.
2. Double-click a recording to plot it — This is indicated by the triangle

and date/time stamp (e.g. ).
NOTE: Double-clicking a schedule entry will plot a spectrum if this
is a frequency domain measurement, or a time waveform if this is
a time domain measurement. The newest recording under the
schedule entry will display by default.
NOTE: Linear speed values display on charts only when the

Machine has been configured as a Linear Speed machine (right-
click the Machine in the navigator, select Edit > Set Speed Enter to
Linear speed).
3. Right-click the chart > Select Chart Display > Horizontal Grid (or
Vertical Grid) to show or hide gridlines.
4. Right-click the chart > A submenu will open.
5. Select Chart Legend — This opens another submenu that lets you
choose which data you want displayed on the bottom of the chart.
EG: Select Show all info to make the <set RPM> and <add note>
labels visible at the bottom of the chart panel. Note that if these
labels have already been set, they will not be displayed.
111
Zoom and Pan

Zooming and panning enable you to take a closer look at a specific area
of interest on a chart. Listed below are the zooming and panning
methods available.
Pan
The chart can be dragged in any direction to display sections that are
hidden from view.
To pan the chart, right-click and hold the mouse button, then drag the
chart to either side or up/down.
To return the chart to its original location, follow the instructions for
zooming out.
Zoom in on Rectangular Area

To zoom in on a rectangle area:
1. Select an area on the left of the chart section that you wish to zoom
in to.
2. Hold down the mouse button while you drag a rectangle across and
down to the right — This will create a dashed rectangle around the
region of interest.
3. Release the mouse button to perform the zoom.
Zoom in on a rectangle area
112
Zoom Out
To zoom out of the chart, left-click and hold the mouse button > drag a
rectangle up and to the left on the chart — The zoom rectangle will
display with a large X in it. When you release the mouse button, the
chart will return to its original size and location.
Zoom in Horizontally
To zoom horizontally, left-click the side of the range you wish to zoom in
to > Drag your selection right or left > Release the mouse button to
zoom.
If you start a horizontal zoom left of the chart area, the zoom will start
exactly on the left axis (i.e. from zero frequency). Click left of the left axis
to zoom by 200% (you can do this repeatedly to zoom the chart in 200%
increments).
A waveform chart shown after horizontal zooming
Zoom in Vertically
To zoom vertically, click the left mouse button above or below the range
you wish to zoom in on > Drag the selection up or down the other side of
the range.
113
Zoom using Mouse Wheel

If your mouse has a wheel, you can zoom vertically by moving the
mouse cursor over the left axis of the chart and spin the wheel.
To zoom horizontally, hold the mouse cursor over the bottom axis of the
chart and spin the wheel.
Use Cursors
Cursors are a valuable tool for analyzing your data. They can be used to
show the amplitude and frequency of a peak, identify harmonics, and
show the frequency difference between two peaks.
Ascent uses 'sync interpolation' to estimate the true value of the peak.
This only applies to spectra that are not interpolated already, and not
displayed in a dB scale.
There are two cursors available — One for each mouse button. Cursor A
is assigned to the left mouse button. Cursor B is assigned to the right
mouse button.
Place Cursor on Chart

To place a cursor on a chart:
1. Move the mouse cursor over a plot line — The mouse pointer will
change to a cross hair.
2. Left-click to place Cursor A on the chart.
Positioning a cursor on a chart
114
Toggle between Cursors

To toggle between cursors, press the . (period/full stop) key to toggle
between the two cursors. If the other cursor has not yet been activated,
it will be placed at the same location as the current active cursor.
Move Cursors using Arrow Keys

To move cursors using the arrow keys:
1. Press the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor along the
data points of the selected recording — Red downward-facing
arrows will display on the chart, indicating multiples of the current
cursor position's x value (orders).
2. Press SHIFT as you move left and right to move in 1 pixel increments
only.
3. Press CTRL as you move left and right to jump to the next peak and
execute a peak search.
NOTE: You can access other cursor commands by right-clicking the
chart background and selecting Cursor A or Cursor B.
Control Sideband / Orders Display

To control the sideband/orders display, right-click the chart > Select
Harmonic Display — The submenu contains options enabling Orders
and Sidebands.
If Orders Only is selected, markers will display at multiples of the current

cursor position's x value.
With Sidebands/Orders selected, if both cursors are active, the markers

will be cantered on the primary cursor (Cursor A) and located at intervals
either side of this point at distances equal to the difference between the
two cursors.
These options can also be activated by pressing the keyboard shortcut

keys O and S when you have cursors active on a chart.
O = Orders Only
S = Sidebands/Orders
115
Move Between Plots on Chart

To move between plots on a chart:
1. Select a measurement from the navigator list.
2. Press the up and down arrow keys to move between plots on the
chart:
• Select Chart Display > Stacked — The cursor will move up and
down between the plots on the stack.
• Select Chart Display > Waterfall) — The cursor will move
backwards and forwards between the plots.
• Select Chart Display > Normal) — The cursor will search up or
down at the current position for another recording to jump to.
Switch off Cursor

Press ESC to switch off cursors.
Snap to Peak
To make the cursor snap to the (interpolated) top of the nearest peak:
1. Press CTRL + P — The amplitude and frequency of this peak displays.
2. Right-click anywhere on the plot line to activate Cursor B — The
amplitude and frequency display, along with the difference in
frequency between the two peaks.
NOTE: You can also position a cursor by double-clicking your

mouse — The cursor will automatically snap to the top of the
nearest peak.
116
Linked Cursors
You can display one or more linked cursor on a related spectrum or
waveform graphs (e.g. from Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) recordings
you have taken). Once you have done this you can zoom, pan, trace,
stretch, or compress the X axis of the selected area of interest on both
graphs simultaneously. Using these features makes it easier to
understand the combined data.
NOTE: It is not possible to use linked cursors on graphs with

differing axis units.
To navigate related data using linked cursors:

1. Open the required spectrum or waveform chart.
2. Select an area of interest on one of the related charts to display one
or more cursors.
3. Examine the selected area on both graphs using the following
methods — The linked graphs adjust accordingly:
• Zoom — Drag your mouse around the area you wish to zoom in
to.
• Trace — Press the left or right navigation arrows on your
keyboard to move the cursors to either side of your selection.
• Stretch/Compress — Scroll your mouse wheel forwards and
back to stretch or compress the graph.
• Pan — Right-click the graph to move it up, down, or around.
TIP: Drag your mouse left and up to undo the zoom.
View of linked charts before zooming
117
View of linked charts after zooming
Undoing a zoom action
Disable Linked Zooming and Cursors

Linked cursors and zooming are enabled by default. If required you can
disable these features. To do this:
1. Open the required spectrum.
2. Select Spectrum (Parent) > Untick the options to suit your
requirements:
• Linked Zooming
• Linked Cursor A
• Linked Cursor B
118
Disabling linked zooming and cursors
119
Plot Multiple Recordings on One Chart

To plot several recordings on one chart:
1. Display a chart.
2. Click the Hold button — You will prevent a chart from being
cleared when new recordings are added. You can use this with the
Add button to plot several recordings together on one chart for
easier comparison.
3. Select another recording.
4. Click the Add button to plot the selected recording on the same
chart.
5. Add more recordings if required.
TIP: If you are plotting several recordings from a single schedule
entry, use the CTRL or SHIFT key to select more than one recording
at a time.
Recordings do not need to be taken from the same measurement

location or even the same machine. For example, you can select
recordings from the same location on two identical machines and view
the vibrations levels of both on one chart. You can also plot recordings
from different points on the same machine to see how they compare.
The following waveform was created by selecting three recordings taken

at one measurement location using velocity, acceleration, and
displacement measures.
120
Plotting multiple recordings on one chart
Choose which Recordings to Display

You can choose which recordings display on a chart by selecting items
from the axis, units, and domain submenus. For example, you can right-
click the chart > Select Restrict to axis > Horizontal — The chart will only
display recordings taken on the horizontal axis.
121
Chart Modes
You can use Ascent to display multiple recordings in Normal, Waterfall,
and Stacked chart mode.
To switch between different chart modes:

1. Right-click a chart > Select Chart Display.
2. Choose the required mode.
TIP: The shortcut keys on the right of this menu provide the same
functionality. Press these key combinations while viewing a chart
to display a different chart mode.
Selecting the required chart mode
The example charts that follow show four recordings plotted on one
chart. You can plot multiple recordings by selecting multiple recordings
using the Hold function or your mouse.
MORE: See Plotting Multiple Recordings on One Chart.
122
Normal Chart Mode

This mode displays all the plots on the same 2D axis. Use the right-click
menu or CTRL + N to toggle this mode.
Normal chart mode
123
Waterfall Chart Mode

Waterfall chart mode presents the plots in 3D view. You can use the
right-click menu or CTRL + W to toggle this mode.
To use waterfall chart mode:

1. Adjust the depth and orientation of the chart by pressing CTRL and
dragging the chart in any direction using the left mouse button.
2. Adjust only the depth of the waterfall chart by selecting Options >
Waterfall Depth.
3. Display a filled waterfall chart by right-clicking the chart and
selecting Chart Display > Allow Filled Waterfall.
NOTE: Select Chart Display > Fill Waterfall in 3D to create a 3D
waterfall chart.
4. Reverse the plot order of the waterfall so that the most recent
recording is moved to the front by right-clicking the chart and
selecting Reverse Plot Order.
Waterfall chart mode
124
Stacked Chart Mode

Stacked chart mode presents the plots one above each other in 2D view.
You can use the right-click menu or CTRL + S to toggle this mode.
You can right-click Chart Display and select Use Multi-Colored Legend
to apply different colors to each recording on the chart. If you do not
select this option, the default colors are used (blue for the selected
recording, black for all others). You can choose the required colors to
plot data using the Schemes system.
MORE: See Changing Colors for Printer and Screen for details on
how to change the colors.
Stacked chart mode
Create On-chart Remarks

You can use On-Chart Remarks to annotate your charts. To do this:
1. Right-click the chart where you wish to add an on-chart remark >
Select On-Chart Remarks > Add.
2. Enter the text for the remark.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click the chart and select Cursor A (or B) > Add Remark or
press CTRL + R.
125
Maintain Library of Frequently Used On-chart Remarks

You can maintain a library of the on-chart remarks you use often. To do
this:
1. Click the Library button — The new remarks library window displays.
2. Select Edit Library > New Remark to add a new remark.
3. Enter the remark.
4. Click Done.
5. Click Edit Library to edit any existing remarks.
6. Edit the remarks.
7. Click Done — You can reuse these remarks from the library list by
double-clicking or selecting them and clicking Add.
Create on-chart remarks
Move On-chart Remarks

To move an on-chart remark:
1. Move the mouse cursor over the required remark until a rectangle
displays beneath it.
2. Left-click and hold the mouse while dragging to move the on-chart
remark:
• Click and drag the text to 'stretch' the line that anchors the
remark.
• Click and drag the line enables you to move both the line and
the text to a new position.
126
Moving an on-chart remark
Spread Out Overlapping Remarks

If your on-chart remarks are set too close together, you can space them
more evenly. To do this, right-click a remark > Select Spread out.
Edit or Delete On-chart Remark

To edit or delete an on-chart remark, right-click the remark > Select Edit
text or Delete.
Define RPM of Recording

If you know the running speed of your machine you can enter this value
directly. To do this:
1. Click the <set RPM> label on the bottom chart legend — If this is not
visible, you can right-click the chart and select Chart Legend >
Show all info to display it.
2. Enter the RPM value.
3. Click OK.
127
Use Ascent to Calculate RPM

To calculate the RPM of a recording, you need to identify the 1X peak. To
do this:
1. Move the mouse cursor until it is over the first big peak on the
spectrum.
2. Double-click to place the cursor at the top of this peak — The cursor
may appear to jump off the spectrum. This is because the true peak
may lie between two FFT values.
3. Press CTRL + 1 to open the Set 1X RPM window — The frequency of
the current peak will display.
4. Click OK to accept this value as the machine running speed.
MORE: See Setting RPMs for Multiple Recordings to learn how to

set the RPM values of all the recordings and/or schedule entries at
a machine.
Using Ascent to calculate the RPM
View Data in Orders or Revolutions

Once the 1X RPM is defined you can view the chart in Orders (for spectra)
or Revs (for waveforms). The recording must have its 1X RPM set to
ensure Ascent knows how long one revolution takes. Only relevant
options will be available from the menu.
128
View Chart in Orders

To view a chart in orders, right-click the chart > Select Bottom Axis >
Orders.
To view a chart in revolutions:

1. Display a waveform.
2. Right-click the recording in the navigator list that was used to plot
the waveform > Select Set 1x RPM to set the 1X RPM.
3. Enter the RPM value.
4. Click OK.
5. Right-click the chart > Select Bottom Axis > Revolutions.
Display Fault Frequencies

Displaying fault frequencies only applies to spectrum charts. To display
fault frequencies on a spectrum chart you need to define:
• The 1X RPM value for the recording so that orders can be
displayed — See Defining the RPM of a Recording.
• A bearing or gear at the point containing these measurements.
NOTE: If you want to display user-defined fault frequencies, you

will not have to add a bearing or gear to this point. Defining your
own fault frequencies is explained shortly.
129
To display a fault frequency:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to display a fault frequency:
• Click anywhere on the chart > Press CTRL + F5 to open a
window that lists the fault frequencies available at this location.
• Right-click a chart > Select Fault Frequency Markers > List.
2. Select the fault frequencies you wish to display on the chart:
• BPFO — Ball pass frequency outer. This indicates how many
times a defect in the outer race of the bearing will be passed
over by a ball or roller during one shaft revolution.
• BPFI — Ball pass frequency inner. This indicates how many
times a defect in the inner race of the bearing will be passed
over by a ball or roller during one shaft revolution.
• FTFO — Fundamental train frequency outer. This is the speed at
which the rollers or balls will move around the bearing, relative
to the outer race speed.
• FTFI — Fundamental train frequency inner. This is the speed at
which the rollers or balls will move around the bearing, relative
to the inner race speed.
• BSF — Ball spin frequency. This indicates how many times an
individual ball or roller will rotate within the races during one
shaft revolution.
3. Click the Options button if you want to set the number of orders and
sidebands to display.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the Close button to close the list.
6. Use EITHER of these methods to cycle through the fault frequencies
on the chart:
• Select Fault Frequency Markers > Next (or Previous).
• Press F5 to access the previous frequency or F6 to access the
next frequency.
130
Displaying fault frequencies
Remove Fault Frequency from Chart

To remove a fault frequency and all its sidebands:
1. Press CTRL + F5.
2. Select the fault frequency in the list.
3. Click Delete.
Copy Fault Frequency to Additional Point

To copy a fault frequency to an additional point:
1. Select a point to display its associated fault frequencies in the
navigator list.
2. Right-click the fault frequency > Select Copy item to Clipboard.
3. Right-click the point where you want the fault frequency to be
placed > Select Paste.
TIP: You can also use CTRL + C and CTRL + V to copy and paste
navigator list items to other levels in the navigator.
131
Nudge Fault Frequencies

Bearing fault frequencies can vary slightly depending on wear, axial
load, and speed variations. Ascent lets you ‘nudge’ fault frequencies on
the chart so you can see if the frequencies would line up with some
adjustment.
When fault frequencies are displayed on the chart, you can nudge them
up to 25%. To do this:
1. Click the fault frequency label (i.e. bearing part number).
2. Drag the label left or right as required.
TIP: You can also press SHIFT + F5 and SHIFT + F6 to nudge the
currently displayed fault frequencies by a small amount.
Define your Own Fault Frequencies

You can create user-defined fault frequencies which can then be
displayed on a chart to highlight the frequencies of known problem
sources e.g. electrical line frequency. These do not require you to add
bearings or gears to a point as you will supply the frequency information
yourself. User-defined fault frequencies are associated with points on a
machine in the same way as regular fault frequencies.
NOTE: Clicking the point will display any existing user-defined fault
frequencies in the navigator list.
132
To define your own fault frequencies:

1. Create a new fault frequency using EITHER of these methods:
• Right-click a point in the navigator tree > Select New > Fault
Frequency.
• Double-click a particular peak to snap the cursor to the peak's
apex > Press CTRL + M — The frequency of your selected peak
will display in the Fundamental Frequency field.
2. Enter a description for this fault frequency — A text label with this
description will display above your fault frequency markers when
they are plotted on the chart.
3. Tick the Sidebands checkbox > Enter the fundamental frequency
and optional sideband frequency if required — These can be
represented either in absolute frequency (Hz/CPM) or orders.
4. If you want this fault frequency to automatically display when one of
the selected point's recordings is plotted, select Always Visible.
NOTE: If this option is not selected, the fault frequency will be
hidden until you press F5 or F6 to display it.
5. Select the required marker > Click OK — The marker and text
description label display above the fundamental fault frequency and
any orders/harmonics:
• Sidebands are displayed as arrows, the same color as your fault
frequency marker. We recommend you use different colors for
each fault frequency so sidebands can be easily identified.
• You can display the fault frequencies you create on a chart, in a
list, or nudged like system-defined fault frequencies.
133
Define your own fault frequencies
Add / Edit / Delete Fault Frequencies

To add, edit, and delete fault frequencies:
1. Display a chart.
2. Use EITHER of these methods to open a list of all fault frequencies
(user and system-defined) on your chart:
3. Right-click your chart > Select Fault Frequency Markers > List.
4. Press CTRL + F5.
5. Click Edit to change an existing fault frequency.
TIP: To edit a fault frequency directly on the chart, double-click the
text label for the fault frequency.
6. Click Delete to remove a fault frequency.
NOTE: Only user-defined fault frequencies can be edited or deleted.

System-defined bearing and gear fault frequencies cannot be
changed.
7. Click Add to create an additional fault frequency.
134
Set and Display Baselines

A baseline recording is a vibration measurement taken on a machine
which is considered to be in good condition. The baseline is used as a
comparison recording with which to observe changes in the vibration
patterns.
To set and display baselines:

1. Right-click a recording in the navigator list > Select Set Baseline —
This will make the recording a ‘baseline recording’.
2. Close the chart — You will be prompted to save your changes.
3. Click Yes if you want to include baselines on this type of chart
automatically in future — If you select this option the chart will
always attempt to load the latest baseline recording, even if the plot
limit (the number of recordings that may be displayed) has already
been satisfied. If you have set a plot limit of 6, there may be seven
recordings on the chart if the baseline was not one of the six most
recent recordings. When you open a trend chart and plot the
spectrum overalls, a red circular marker displays around the
baseline recording's data point so the baseline can be easily
identified.
Set and display baselines
Display Baseline RMS Values on vb Instrument

When taking recordings on your instrument, you can display the RMS
value of the baseline recording so it can be compared with the
measurement you have just taken. See Baseline Recordings for more
information.
135
Waveform Analysis
The licensed feature will only be available to you if it is included as part
of your license agreement. If you wish to enable this feature please
contact [email protected] or your distributor for more information.
Ascent has several special tools for viewing and analyzing time domain
data To access these:
1. Select a time domain (waveform) recording in the navigator list.
2. Select Analyze > Partial Waveform Analysis — The new chart that
opens displays the waveform and an empty chart below it. Partial
Waveform Analysis is a tool you can use to select a portion of the
waveform and convert it to a spectrum.
3. Press and hold CTRL > Select and hold the mouse button as you
drag it to either side — A green line follows the mouse, showing you
how much of the waveform you have selected.
4. Release the mouse — The spectrum will display in the bottom chart.
Repeat the process to zoom in on different areas of the waveform:
• The spectral peaks appear rounded if you have only selected a
small amount of data. This is because the resolution of the
spectrum is proportional to the number of samples selected in
the time domain. You can zoom and pan both charts and right-
click to display a menu with various chart display options.
• You can select Analyze > Freq Based Waveform Analysis to
plot a spectrum of the time domain data. Use the mouse to
select a range of frequencies in the spectrum. The software will
take these frequencies and display them as a waveform in the
bottom chart.
136
Conducting waveform analysis
137
Waveform Audio Playback

This feature is only if included in your license agreement. If you wish to
enable this feature, please contact [email protected] or your
distributor for more information.
You will need a computer with a sound card and an appropriate

playback device (headphones or speakers) to use this feature.
To use the waveform audio playback feature:
1. Select a schedule entry containing a recording in the navigator

tree — The navigator list will display the recordings that belong to
this schedule entry.
2. Double-click a time domain recording (indicated by the triangle and
date/time stamp).
3. Right-click the waveform chart > Select Audio > Play Waveform to
listen to the waveform recording.
4. Select Export Waveform to save the audio file (.WAV format) to your
PC.
Waveform Peak-to-Peak and Averaged Crest Factors
Waveform charts include 'True' Peak-to-Peak and Crest Factor values by

default, together with the recording's overall power level.
True Peak-to-Peak
'True' Peak-to-Peak is a useful indicator of the amplitude of a waveform
measurement. It is calculated by measuring the difference between the
absolute highest and lowest peaks in a vibration waveform. High peak-
to-peak values typically indicate the presence of high-level impact
signals against low-level background noise that results from mechanical
damage.
138
Averaged Crest Factor

The Averaged Crest Factor value of a waveform measurement is useful
for quickly identifying overall levels of impacting within a bearing.
This mathematical value is calculated in Ascent by dividing the true

peak-to-peak amplitude of a waveform measurement (encompassing
the entire Y axis) in half, then dividing this figure by the waveform's
overall RMS amplitude. A 'perfect' sinusoidal waveform -- with a true
peak-to-peak value of '2' divided in half then divided by its overall RMS of
.707 -- results in a Crest Factor of 1.41.
As a Crest Factor rises above the 'best case' value of 1.41, it grows
increasingly indicative of surface damage resulting from bearing, cage,
or race contact with bearing fragments or pitted surfaces.
NOTE: The overall RMS values of recordings are calculated at the

time of their measurement.
True Peak-to-Peak and Crest Factor Values
139
Convert Waveforms to Spectra

You can use Ascent to automatically convert a waveform to a spectrum
by changing the chart axis from time to frequency. To do this:
1. Display a waveform.
2. Right-click the chart > Select Bottom Axis > Frequency — You can
control the parameters used to calculate the FFT (e.g. number of
averages, overlap percentage, and type of window to use.
3. Select Options > Automatic FFT Options to see the full list of
commands.
4. Make the required changes.
5. If you have already plotted the spectrum, double-click the recording
again in the navigator list to replot the spectrum using your new
settings.
NOTE: You can set alarm bands and envelopes on waveform data.
When you do this, Ascent will automatically conduct the FFT to
check the alarm. However, this is not recommended as an FFT
generated from a single waveform inherently has either less
averaging or less resolution than a complete, averaged FFT.
Processing times may also be long when dealing with significant
quantities of data, or if using an older or slower computer.
Long Time Waveforms

This feature is only available for select vbX000 and vbX portable
instruments — Please refer to the specifications in your Instrument
Reference Guide.
vbX instruments with this capability can take continuous recordings over
a period of up to 229376 seconds or 63.7 hours (for a single channel
recording using an Fmax of 1500 CPM/25 Hz). Once these recordings are
transferred, Ascent will store them in a single schedule entry.
140
Set Measurement Unit Preferences

You can choose your preferred measurement display units for spectrum
and waveform charts so that all recordings, regardless of what
measurement units were used to record them, will be displayed in your
chosen units. For example, you can display all velocity recordings in
mm/s by setting this preference in the Velocity Spectrum Amplitude
menu. Once this setting has been selected, all future velocity
measurements will display in mm/s until other units are selected.
You can set unit preferences for acceleration, velocity, displacement,

current, and temperature. Overall values for waveforms and spectra
specify bearing dimensions in imperial or metric units.
NOTE: Changing the units does not change recordings stored in

the database, only how they are displayed.
1. Select Options > Unit Preferences.

2. Move the mouse cursor down the list of options to open submenus
containing the available units:
• Acceleration, velocity, displacement, and current Spectrum
Amplitude — Left axis scale on spectra charts.
• Waveform Amplitude — Left axis scale used by waveforms.
• Power Level — Spectrum and waveform overall values and
power band alarms.
NOTE: The overall vibration level displayed on the chart does not
need to use the same units as the left axis. For example, you can
scale the left axis in 0-peak and the overall in rms.
141
Setting your measurement unit preferences
Switch Between Hz and CPM

To switch between Hz and CPM:
1. Select Options > Unit Preferences > Frequency.
2. Select your preference.
Switch Between Velocity, Acceleration, and Displacement

To switch between velocity, acceleration, and displacement:
1. Right-click the chart > Select Left Axis.
2. Select your preference.
View Electrical Current Spectra in dB

You can view the Y axis for an electrical current spectra in decibels. Units
in these charts are shown as uA dB and calculated in idB, 1uA rms.
To view an electrical current spectra in decibel (dB) units:

1. Open the required current spectra.
2. Right-click the chart > Select Chart Display > Left Axis Toggle dB (if
available).
142
Changing the electrical current spectra view from mm/s
143
Viewing the spectra in decibels
Customize Scale of Charts

This page describes the options available for customizing a scale of
charts.
144
Left and Bottom Axis Scaling

The left axis of a chart will scale automatically to accommodate the
highest peak. The truncated images below show how auto-scaling
affects your chart display.
The image below shows how the vibration level at this location
increased each time recordings were taken. The top value of the left axis
scale has gone from 0.22 mm/s to 0.3 mm/s to 3.5 mm/s to fit the data.
You can customize the default scaling of charts in several ways. To

access these options, select Options > Auto-Scaling.
145
Left axis auto-scaling
146
Ignore Hz Below
To ignore Hz below, enter a value in Hz below which data on spectra will
be ignored for auto-scaling purposes. This will force the chart to enlarge
lower amplitude peaks. This is particularly useful for recordings with
large 'ski-slopes' (e.g. displacement recordings or recordings that have
been converted from acceleration to velocity or displacement). The
default and recommended value is 4 Hz.
Original chart
Same chart with Ignore Hz Below (350) applied
147
Y-Margin Percentage
Enter a percentage value to set the extra space that will be left above
and below plots.
NOTE: These settings are saved and apply globally to all charts.
You can force your charts to temporarily use a fixed axis scale. To do
this, you set the minimum and maximum values for the left and bottom
axes. The fixed axis setting will be applied to all recording plots that use
this chart type until you close the chart or Ascent.
To set the left axis scaling:
1. Right-click the chart > Select Chart Display > Left Axis Minimum (or
Maximum).
2. Enter a value.
3. Click OK — The units used will be the same as those specified for the
chart. I.e. if your chart uses mm/s, entering a minimum value of 0
and a maximum of 5 will set the chart scale to start at 0 mm/s and
finish at 5 mm/s.
NOTE: Bottom axis scaling options are available from the same
menu and are set in the same way. The left and bottom axis
settings will override the 'Ignore Hz Below' and 'Y-Margin
Percentage' settings.
Chart with 5% Y-margin
148
The same chart with no margin
Set Fixed Axis Scale Permanently

Left and bottom axis scaling can be permanently set for any type of
chart (including all those available from the Chart button dropdown
field). This change will be applied globally to all charts of this type.
To permanently set a fixed axis scale:

1. Set the values.
2. Select View > Save.
Remove Fixed Axis Scaling / Reset Auto-scaling

To remove fixed axis scaling and reset auto-scaling:
1. Right-click the chart area > Select Chart Display > Left Axis
Minimum (or Maximum).
2. Delete the value from this field to switch auto-scaling back on —
This procedure will temporarily restore auto-scaling if you have
permanently fixed the axis scale.
3. To remove a fixed axis scale permanently, follow the steps above
then select View > Save.
149
Hide Peaks
When analyzing a spectrum you can place a cursor on a particular
frequency and dim the color of unwanted harmonics and sidebands.
Hiding peaks that are not of interest makes it easier to focus on other
smaller ones that would otherwise be difficult to see in complicated
spectrums.
Hide Frequency in Harmonic Series

To hide one or more frequencies in a harmonic spectrum:
2. Select Cursor Harmonic Display > Harmonics Only.
3. Place your cursor on the peak or series of peaks you wish to hide.
4. Use EITHER of these methods to hide one or more peaks to the right
of the selected peak:
• Right-click a blank space in the graph > Select Cursor A or
Cursor B > Select Hide Peak.
• Press Delete.
5. Enter of select the number of peaks you wish to hide in the
harmonic series.
6. Click OK.
TIP: Press CTRL + Delete to redisplay hidden peaks.
TIP: Once you have hidden a peak, you can scroll your mouse
wheel to zoom in to the remaining peaks of interest.
150
Selecting the number of peaks you wish to hide in a harmonic series
Hidden peaks in the harmonic series
151
Hide Sidebands
You can dim the color of one or more sidebands of a fundamental
frequency. To do this:
2. Select Cursor Harmonic Display > Harmonics or Sidebands.
3. Place your cursor on the fundamental frequency of the sidebands
you wish to hide.
4. Use EITHER of these methods to hide one or more of the sidebands
on either side of the selected peak:
• Right-click a blank space in the graph > Select Cursor A or
Cursor B > Select Hide Peak.
• Press Delete.
5. Enter or select the number of sidebands you wish to hide.
6. Click OK.
View of spectrum before sidebands are hidden
152
View of spectrum after sidebands are hidden on either side of the selected fundamental
frequency
Views
A view is a customized report or chart that lets you define your own
ways of browsing the data in the database, i.e. what data is plotted and
how it displays.
Click Report to see the full list of predefined report views.
Click Chart to see the full list of predefined chart views.
NOTE: The views shown here may differ from those on your PC.
Ascent only displays the features you are licensed to use.
NOTE: You can also choose a view by using the shortcut keys, such
as F2, as shown on the right-side of the menu.
153
The following chart view options are available:

• 6Pack — Any 6Pack measurements (simultaneous Spectrum,
Waveform, High Frequency Spectrum, High Frequency
Waveform, Demod Spectrum and Demod Waveform
measurements) imported from compatible SCOUT/vbX
instruments.
• Acceleration Spectrum in dB and Linear — AdB (or vdB for
velocity recordings) and linear spectrum charts of the selected
recording(s).
• Bode Plot — Two charts, one showing how amplitude varies
with frequency, the other showing how phase varies with
frequency.
MORE: See Bode Plots.
• HVA Spec — Three separate spectrum charts showing the last

recorded horizontal, vertical, and axial measurements of the
currently selected point .
• Multi-Spectrum — A stacked spectrum chart of the latest
recordings at the selected item (e.g. the latest recordings for
each location on a selected point or all the latest recordings on
a selected machine). If a location has more than one schedule
entry, the newest recording from the most recently recorded
schedule entry will be shown.
• Orbit — The physical path travelled by a shaft within a bearing.
MORE: See Orbit Plots for information on collecting data to
produce orbit plots.
• SpecStack — A stacked chart of the four most recent recordings

at the selected schedule entry .
• SpecTrend — A spectrum of the currently selected recording
and a trend of overall values for all recordings taken at that
schedule entry. To display a spectrum, you must have a
recording or schedule entry selected.
• Spectrum — A spectrum of the selected recording.
• SpecWfm — Simultaneous spectrum and waveform recordings
taken with compatible SCOUT/vbSeries portable instruments.
• Top 10 peaks — Amplitude values of the 10 highest peaks in a
spectrum and lists the frequencies they occurred at.
154
• Trend — Trend chart of overall vibration levels for a series of

recordings associated with the currently selected
machine/point/location/schedule entry.
• Vel+Demod — Four separate charts showing all recordings at
the selected location . The charts displayed are: waterfall,
spectrum, trend and demodulation (if a demodulation
measurement has been taken - otherwise this section of the
chart will be empty).
• Waterfall — Waterfall chart of all recordings at a selected
schedule entry.
• Waveform — Waveform of the selected time domain recording.
• WaveformFFT — Waveform of the selected time domain
recording and a converted FFT spectrum.
155
Chart view options
156
Multiple recordings can be displayed simultaneously for easy

comparison. For example, the HVA Spec view plots the most recent
horizontal, vertical, and axial measurements of the currently selected
point and displays them simultaneously in three separate charts.
Selecting another point in the navigator tree will apply the view to that
point and update the chart display.
HVA Spec view
Highlighting and color coding are used to make each view as

informative as possible. For example, when a chart is displaying multiple
recordings, the currently selected recording is highlighted in the
navigator list and also shown on the chart in a different color from other
recordings to make identification easier.
Views such as SpecTrend or Vel+Demod display several types of charts

together on one screen. This enables you to view an individual recording
in different ways. It also lets you see how it compares with other
recordings in a trend or waterfall chart.
157
Vel+Demod view
With any view displayed, when you select a different recording in the
navigator list, the view will update to display that recording. In the
previous Vel+Demod example, the spectrum and demodulation charts
on the right will update to display new spectra. The waterfall and trend
charts will highlight the individual recording using coloring and cursors.
You can create your own customized charts and reports to display data
however you wish. Once you have created a new view it will be added to
the list under the Chart button. Here you can select it like any other view.
MORE: See Walkthrough: Creating your own Views.
158
How Views Work

Views are sensitive to the selection in the navigator. They will plot data
from the currently selected machine, point, or location. For example, if
you select a Trend view, selecting a machine in the navigator tree will
trend overall vibration levels of recordings for all locations on that
machine. Selecting a point will trend the recordings for all locations on
that point.
A view will only display data if the view's data type matches the selected
recording(s). For example, to display a waveform you must select a time
domain recording. To display a trend chart, you must select multiple
recordings (or an item that contains several recordings such as a point).
To stop the chart from automatically showing what is selected in the

navigator tree, click the Hold button.
To display more than one recording on a chart:

1. Click Hold.
2. Use the Add button or double-click recordings to add them to the
display.
TIP: You can select multiple recordings simultaneously using drag
and drop. See Selecting Multiple Items for more information.
You can have multiple views open at the same time. If you select a
different view without closing the previous one, the new view will open
on top of the old view. Tabs will display at the edge of the chart to
indicate which views are open. You can select the tabs to toggle
between views.
Tabs indicating which views are open
159
Convert View to Image

You can print a view to create a paper copy of it. You can also save a
view as a Word document and annotate it before printing. Alternatively,
you can save a view as an image file and open it in a graphics program
for further manipulation. Once you have saved your data in an electronic
format, you can email it.
To convert a view to an image:
1. Click Word to create a Word document containing a picture of the
view you currently have open.
2. Resize the picture and add captions or other explanatory text.
3. Add additional views to the document using EITHER of these
methods:
• Create more Word files to cut and paste from.
• Copy more views directly from the clipboard by selecting View >
Copy to Clipboard > Paste this picture in a suitable text editor
or another program.
TIP: If a view is made up of several charts (e.g. the four-chart
Vel+Demod view) you can copy an individual chart to the clipboard
by right-clicking it and selecting Copy to Clipboard.
4. To save a chart as an image file:

a. Right-click the chart > Select Save Chart to File.
b. Select the required file format (.jpeg, .gif, .bmp, .emf, or .wmf).
160
Trend Data
It may be possible to get a good indication of the presence of certain
defects from a single measurement. However, it is more common
practice to watch for changes in the measurements over time. To do this,
you trend a series of recordings and measure the changes in overall
levels.
The following trend chart was created by selecting a point with two
measurement locations. Each plot line shows a trend of the overall
vibration level at one of the locations.
Trend chart
161
You can use Ascent to plot a trend chart of overall levels for all
recordings:
• On a machine
• On a point
• At a location
• Taken for a schedule entry
Trend Data
To trend data:
1. Select any item in the navigator tree.
2. Select Chart > Trend — The trend lines shown on the chart
depend on the:
• Trend Enters selected (spectrum overalls, alarm band levels, etc)
— Right-click the chart > Select Data Enters to see the full list.
• Amplitude units selected for the left axis — Only trend data that
is compatible with the amplitude units on the left axis can be
shown. For example, you cannot trend velocity data with the left
axis set to acceleration.
When left axis units are set to Default, Ascent will try to pick the best
units for the left axis. Any trend data that cannot be shown because the
left axis units are incompatible with the data will have Not shown - click
here to view displayed in the legend.
MORE: See Trending Band Alarms and Trending Envelope Alarms.
162
Choose Data Types for Trend Chart

To choose the data types the trend chart can display:
1. Right-click the chart > Select Data Enters.
2. Tick or untick the options as required in the Data Enters panel.
3. Right-click the chart > Select Set History Count or Date Range if
you wish to filter by date or count.
NOTE: Selecting a history count of 1000 or more measurements
may result in the trend chart displaying very slowly. Select a lower
value if possible.
4. Right-click the chart > Select Left Axis to select a different amplitude
scale for the left axis > Select the required option — These options
change according to the amplitude type of the recordings (velocity,
acceleration, displacement). Demodulation will display as
acceleration.
The bottom axis of a chart can be displayed in time/date format or Index

(data points are plotted against a numbered, evenly-spaced axis). For
most charts, time/date provides the most meaningful information as we
are normally concerned with how the vibration looks/changes over time.
However, in certain situations, the Index axis is more appropriate as it
enables you to compare trends of recordings taken at different times.
The example charts that follow show data trends from two schedule
entries.
Two schedule entries
163
The first schedule entry contains recordings taken on a machine with a

fault condition. The second schedule entry contains recordings of the
same machine after the fault was repaired. These two schedule entries
were then plotted on a trend chart to compare the before and after
vibration levels. The first chart, using the time/date axis, puts a large gap
between the two trends because the recordings are taken at different
times.
Bottom axis set to date/time
164
The second chart uses the Index axis and ignores the time/date-stamps.
It plots the recordings as a numbered series, making it easier to
compare the levels of the two trends.
Bottom axis set to index
165
Use Cursors with Trend Charts

When you position your cursor over a recording plot line on a trend
chart, the amplitude of the cursor position is described at the top right of
the chart. Any notes assigned to that recording are listed below the
cursor readout.
The recordings in the navigator list are linked to the chart cursor. You
can select a recording in the navigator list to place a cursor
corresponding to that recording on the trend chart. Conversely, you can
select a data point on the trend chart to highlight that recording in the
navigator list. (You will need to double-click the data point if no recording
is currently highlighted).
Once you have placed a cursor on a chart, when you double-click a data
point, the default view (waveform or spectrum) of the recording will open
under the cursor.
If a recording has been set as baseline, a red circular marker will display
around its data point when you plot a spectrum overall trend.
Trend chart of alarm levels showing cursor readout at top right
166
Single Frequency Trending

A single frequency trend plot is used to trend changes in vibration
amplitude or phase at a particular frequency. For this type of chart it can
help to use recordings taken with a tachometer and display the bottom
axis in orders. This is so that speed variations will be compensated for if
you are looking at a frequency that is relative to running speed.
The following image shows a single frequency trend chart created from
a waterfall chart with four velocity recordings plotted.
NOTE: The double headed arrow has been added to the image to
indicate the frequency being trended (Hz value shown at top) and
the actual line drawn across the frequency of interest.
To plot a single frequency trend chart:

1. Select the schedule entry that contains the recordings you wish to
trend.
2. Click the Chart button > Select Waterfall.
3. Right-click the chart > Select Cursor Trend > Visible.
4. Move the cursor over the frequency of interest > Left-click to place it
on the chart — The chart of trended amplitude values display to the
right of the original chart.
5. Press the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to different
frequencies along the spectrum — The frequency and amplitude
value display at the top of the chart. The trend chart will update
accordingly.
6. To remove the trend chart, right-click it > Select Visible.
167
The following additional options on the submenu provide different

options for displaying information contained in the trend chart:
• Display Size — Open a message where you can enter the
display size for the trend chart. To make the trend chart fill half
the chart area, enter 50 for the percentage value.
• Amplitude — Create a trend chart of amplitude values at a
specified frequency (see previous chart image). This is the
default action.
• Phase — Create a bode plot style chart of trended phase values
at a specified frequency. Recordings must be taken with a
tachometer to gather phase information.
• Estimate True Peaks — When using the Hanning window with
FFT data, the phase values of frequency bins around a peak can
vary by up to 180 degrees. Estimate True Peaks counteracts this
effect by calculating the true peak amplitude and phase.
• Phase Zero Centered — The vertical axis will use 0° phase as its
mid-point. Otherwise the center will be 180° phase.
NOTE: The following three options relate to the horizontal axis
display — You may need to increase the trend chart display size to
show all frequency values.
• Versus RPM — The horizontal axis will use RPM.

• Versus Time — The timestamp of each recording is used to
determine its position along the horizontal axis.
• Versus Index — Recordings are evenly spaced along the
horizontal axis.
• Cursor Width — Frequencies will vary slightly with each
recording session. To counteract this variance, enter a value
that determines how far Ascent will look for a peak on either
side of the actual cursor position. The default cursor width of 5
Hz is usually appropriate.
• Other — Access the main chart display options i.e. this is the
same menu you will see if you right-click the waterfall chart.
168
Single frequency trending
169
Orbit Plots
An orbit plot shows the motion of the center of mass of a shaft. You can
plot a shaft's vibration in two directions simultaneously (e.g. vertical and
horizontal) to get a trace of the motion of that shaft.
A perfectly balanced shaft with no movement in any direction produces

a dot in the middle of the plot. Unbalanced or misaligned machinery
may exhibit as circular orbits, figure eights, leaning orbits, or flat orbits.
Rub or looseness may display as indents around the circumference of
the orbit plot, or small loops around the larger plot orbit. You can use
orbit plots to detect abnormal movements of the shaft in the bearing
(e.g. unbalance, misalignment, or rubbing against a drive casing. The
shaft movement will give you an indication of its cause. For example, if
there is a lot of up/down movement, the machine feet might not be
bolted down tightly enough.
Two probes are used when taking and analyzing enhanced orbit plot
recordings. These are nominally referred to as X and Y. By convention,
when viewing the machine from the driver to the driven end, the Y probe
is positioned 90 degrees counter-clockwise from the X probe.
The direction of shaft rotation is not important for the X and Y position.
You just need to ensure you view the machine from the driver to the
driven end. For example, the Y probe will be positioned 90 degrees
counter-clockwise from the X probe regardless of the actual angles and
positions used.
170
The sensors used to take the measurements should be displacement

probes. This is because we are measuring the physical movement of the
shaft, not its speed. (You can take the readings with an accelerometer if
no displacement probes are available but there will be a small loss of
accuracy in the displayed plot when the signals are integrated.) The
number of samples and measurement duration you choose determines
the resolution and length of the orbit recording. We suggest 1024
samples and a duration that covers 4-6 revolutions of the machine
being tested. For example, an 890 RPM system (14.8 Hz) has 1 revolution
every 67 milliseconds (6 x 67ms = 402 ms). If you choose 400 ms for the
duration, you will just capture 6 revolutions of the machine.
NOTE: Severe rub or looseness can produce random orbit plots.

Once the recordings have been received in Ascent, you can select a
recording from either location > Select Chart > Orbit+Waveform.
The recording at the other location is automatically selected for
plotting when you choose the orbit plot option.
NOTE: If you have modified the legacy Orbit chart, this might also
display on the Chart menu.
171
The availability of orbit plot functionality depends on your licensing

agreement. If you have the enhanced orbit plot functionality you will also
be able to:
• Position your probes at custom angles (e.g. 45 degrees from
vertical) and include the direction of the shaft rotation for
display and analysis.
• Record tach pulses for any tach-triggered waveform recording,
using one average.
• Easily take orbit plot recordings on a route you have set up in
Ascent.
NOTE: When using your instrument to collect data on route, if the
route includes corresponding recordings for two different axes on
the same bearing, these will be collected as an orbit recording.
MORE: Contact your sales representative.
Workflow
Here is the workflow for using the enhanced orbit plot functionality —
You will need to:
1. Set up schedule entries and a route for your orbit and waveform
recording.
NOTE: If you are using Ascent with System 1 Basic Integration, you
can set up your schedule entries automatically. To do this, right-
click the required machine > Select Library > Bently Nevada >
Bently Orbit.vbz3.
2. Send the schedule entries and route to your instrument.

3. Open the route on your instrument and set it as multi-channel, with
the lowest channel as Y (e.g. CH1) and the higher channel as X (e.g.
CH2).
4. Take two simultaneous waveform recordings on route (tach pulses
are recorded).
MORE: See your instrument reference guide.
5. Transfer the recorded data from your instrument to Ascent and use
the Orbit+Waveform chart to review it.
172
Set up Schedule Entries

If you are using the System 1 version of Ascent, you can set up your
schedule entries automatically. To do this:
1. Right-click a machine or point.
2. Select Library > Bently Nevada > Bently Orbit.vbz3.
Alternatively, follow these steps to set up the schedule entries and route
for your orbit plot recording:
1. Create a machine.
2. Create a point.
3. Create two measurement locations.
4. Create an identical schedule entry for each measurement location.
Create Machine
To create a machine for your orbit plot recording:
1. Select the vb data folder in which you wish to create the schedule
entries.
2. Select New > Machine to create a machine.
3. Specify the main shaft rotation as viewed from the driver to the
driven end of the machine:
• Undefined
• Clockwise
• Counter-clockwise
NOTE: Specifying the shaft rotation makes it easier to understand

how the shaft is moving in the bearing housing while it rotates. It
also facilitates interpreting orbit plots in Ascent.
173
Specifying the main shaft rotation
Create Point
To create a point for the machine you created:
1. Right-click the machine > Select New > Point.
2. Enter a name for the point.
3. Tick Rotation is reversed if this is the case (e.g. this might be due to
a gearbox).
Creating a point for your machine
174
Create Measurement Locations

To create two measurement locations for the point you created:
1. Right-click the point.
2. Select New > Measurement Location.
3. Create a measurement location for the X axis.
4. Create a measurement location for the Y axis.
TIP: If required you can create custom axis entries, for example, Y (-
45) and X (+45). To do this, click Add/Edit beside the Axis field in
the Measurement Location window > Click Add on the Manager -
Axis Name window > Specify a name and angle for the axis.
Creating a custom axis entry
175
Create Schedule Entry for Each Measurement Location

To create two identical schedule entries for each measurement location:
1. Right-click the first measurement location you created (for the X
axis) > Select New > Schedule Entry.
2. Ensure only Waveform is selected in the Domain area.
3. Tick the Tach Triggered ... checkbox.
4. Tick the Record this schedule entry ... checkbox.
5. Specify the type of tachometer in the field provided > Click OK.
6. Select the schedule entry you just created > Press CTRL+C to copy it.
7. Select the second measurement location you created (for the Y axis)
> Press CTRL+V to paste the schedule entry under this
measurement location.
Creating a schedule entry for each measurement location
176
Create Route
Once you have set up the schedule entries for your orbit plot recording,
you will need to create a route for it. To do this:
1. Select the vb data folder containing the schedule entry and route
you have set up.
2. Select New > Route.
3. Click Yes to add the measurement locations you have set up to the
route > Click OK.
NOTE: If required you can also set up an existing route.
Once you have created your route you can send it to your instrument.
Once you have specified the X and Y axis on your instrument, you can
take an orbit plot recording on route.
MORE: See your instrument reference guide.
Review Orbit+Waveform Recordings

Once you have taken an orbit plot recording and imported your data into
Ascent, you can review it by selecting Chart > Orbit + Waveform. When
you take an orbit plot recording, your instrument collects the tach pulses
that occur. This means you can see the tach trigger marks on the
Orbit+Waveform chart. The following details also display:
• Probe positions
• Direction of rotation
• Machine speed
TIP: You can use linked cursors on the waveform graphs to move
the cursor mark on the orbit. The cursor will also display on the
orbit graph (provided this is not filtered and the revolutions are not
limited.
177
Tach-triggered marks display when you review your orbit plot recording in Ascent
Bode Plots
The licensed feature is only be available if included in your license
agreement. If you wish to enable this feature, please contact
[email protected] or your distributor for more information.
You can use Bode plots to identify and confirm the presence of
resonance in a machine or structure.
A Bode plot is made up of two charts:

• The top chart shows phase angle versus machine speed.
• The bottom chart shows signal amplitude versus machine
speed. You can analyze the plot to determine the speed(s) at
which a resonance exists.
178
Set up Measurements
You can record a series of tachometer triggered spectra e.g. as you do
for a coast-down or run-up test. The recordings must be taken with a
tachometer so that phase information is available.
The frequency of the tachometer must be below the Fmax of the

recording i.e. 100 Hz Fmax recordings on a 7000 RPM machine will not
plot on the Bode plot because 1X phase and amplitude is not available.
Create Bode Plot

To create a Bode plot:
1. Select the schedule entry containing the series of spectra.
2. Click Chart > Select Bode Plot.
Ascent performs a peak search at the 1X frequency on every spectrum,

extracting the peak frequency, amplitude, and phase. All these
amplitude and phase values are then plotted against the frequency.
Change Size of Plot

To change the size of a plot, position your cursor over the grey area
dividing line between the two charts until it changes to an up/down
arrow then hold down the left mouse. button and drag up or down.
179
Bode plot
Analyze Bode Plot

The bottom chart left axis shows the amplitude of the 1X for all the
speeds of the machine. If you have a peak in the bottom chart, this could
be a resonance that is being excited by the running speed when the
machine is operating at that frequency.
The top chart shows the phase of the corresponding peak. You should
see a 180° change in phase across a resonance.
180
Select Different Harmonics

You can select different harmonics to analyze. For example, you can
choose the 2X harmonic to see an analysis of the 2X vibration across all
the recordings. If you have strong forcing vibrations at 2X (or 3X, etc), this
could also help identify resonance as the 2X vibration goes through the
resonant frequencies.
To select different harmonics:

1. Right-click the chart > Choose Select Harmonic to Extract (1X).
2. Enter the required harmonic you wish to extract.
3. Click OK.
NOTE: When the harmonic is not 1X, the frequency on the bottom
axis is the frequency of the peak being analyzed, matching the Hz
(or CPM) value of the display at the top right (i.e. 2X the running
speed). The RPM value of the cursor readout is always the RPM of
the measurement from which the amplitude/phase/frequency was
extracted.
• Phase Zero Centered — If this option is selected, the vertical

axis will use 0° phase as its mid-point. Otherwise the center will
be 180° phase.
• Cursor Width — Determines the width of the peak searches
performed on the original spectra during creation of the bode
plot.
• Using cursors — Selecting any peak will display its amplitude,
phase, and frequency plus the RPM of the recording it was
extracted from. The readout is displayed at the top right of the
chart.
• Zooming — Zooming is linked so the bottom axis (Hz/CPM)
remains synchronized with the top chart axis.
181
Modal Analysis and Cross Channel

Spectrum (ODS) Data
In addition to reviewing FRF and Coherence data on your instrument,
you can import this into Ascent for detailed viewing, reporting, archiving,
and more. When you open a modal impact test recording, opening any
recording in a group of related recordings, opens the other recordings.
Use the linked cursor feature to review the data conjunctively.
MORE: See your instrument reference guide to learn more about

transferring data from your instrument to Ascent.
NOTE: You can also send data from your instrument to Operation
Deflection Shape (ODS) software such as ME’Scope to conduct a
more detailed analysis.
TIP: Use the Chart menu if the recording displays an empty chart.
Modal Impact Charts

You can change the chart display to show just the modal impact data, or
the modal impact and FRF data. To access these new chart options,
select Chart > Modal Impact Data or Modal Impact FRF.
182
Selecting the Modal Impact Data chart view
183
Selecting the Modal Impact FRF chart view
184
Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) Chart

Once you have taken Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS) recordings on your
instrument, you can transfer these to Ascent for further analysis. To view
the imported data, select Chart > Cross Channel Spectrum (ODS).
Reviewing your cross channel spectrum data in Ascent
185
Print Charts and Reports

To print the chart or report you currently have displayed:
1. Click the Print button.

2. Use the options provided to adjust the way your printouts will
display:
• Scheme — Choose the color scheme to use for the printout. You
can view the charts on your screen in color but print them in
black and white using different line styles to differentiate
between the plots.
• Page numbers — Select the position of page numbers on the
printout.
• Fit charts to page — Make charts fill up the entire page. If this
option is not selected, charts will retain the aspect ratio they
have on the screen.
• Margins — Adjust the amount of space to be left between
charts and the edge of the paper.
• Portrait or landscape — Selects the orientation of the printout.
• Effective Page Width in Pixels — Control the effective resolution
of the printout. Increase the number if the text is too big in the
printout, or decrease it if the text is too small.
• Setup Printer — Select the required printer, paper size, and
more.
• Export to Word — Open a Word document containing the chart
or report you have displayed. The Word image will use the color
scheme you specify in the Print window. You can save this
document and email it as required.
3. Click Save as Default to make any of the settings you have selected
the default.
NOTE: The Black and White scheme is chosen for printouts by
default. If you have a color printer you may want to change this to
Color to use color for the plot lines.
4. Click Preview to see what the printout will look like.

5. Click Print to send the print job to the printer or Cancel to return to
the chart.
186
Selecting your preferred printing options
Previewing a chart or report before printing
187
Schemes
Schemes define the colors, line styles, and fonts used on charts and
reports. There are three factory default schemes to choose from. You
can change these or create your own:
• Color — White background with color text and lines. This is
provided as an alternative to the High Contrast scheme.
• High Contrast — Black background with colored lines and text.
188
• Black and White — This scheme is black and white and

intended for use when printing charts on a black and white
printer.
189
Change Colors for Printer and Screen

You can customize the appearance of charts, cursors, alarm displays,
navigator items, and printed outputs. You can increase or decrease text
labels to make them more visible. You can also change colors to
highlight areas of interest. If you don't like the look of your changes you
can easily reset the factory defaults.
To change or edit a color scheme:

1. Select Options > Edit/Change Scheme.
2. Select a different scheme from the dropdown field at the top of the
Schemes window.
3. Create a new scheme or rename the default one by clicking the >
button at the top right of the window — You will be asked to name a
new scheme when you create one. The new scheme will display in
the dropdown field and can be applied to your charts. You can then
choose the chart background and plot colors for your new scheme.
4. Double-click a plot color in the Schemes window to change it (e.g.
Selected Plot).
TIP: Plots are also identified by an angled line icon.
NOTE: Double-clicking list items with a letter icon will open a

text editor form. Double-clicking items with an angled line icon
will open a pen array form. Items with a icon to open a color
selection box.
5. Click the Color button.

6. Select a color.
7. Click OK.
8. Use the other controls on the Pen editor panel to change the line
styles and widths of the plots.
EG: Click the Style dropdown field to choose a different line style.
9. To increase or decrease the size of the text, double-click a text label

in the Schemes window.
10. Use the settings in the Font window to resize text, make it bold or
italicized, choose a different size and color, or even choose a
different font.
190
Changing colors for printer and screen
Restore Default Schemes

To restore the default schemes, select Options > Reset Scheme/Color
Defaults to restore the factory default settings for the Color, High
Contrast, and Black and White schemes.
Change Chart Plot Line Styles

The pen array editor is used to change plot line colors, styles (e.g. dotted
or solid) and widths. To open the pen array editor, select a measurement
from the navigator then click the square in the bottom left corner of the
chart.
Edit Existing Pen

To edit the size, color, or appearance of an existing plot line pen:
1. Click the pen in the left column.
2. Change the color, style (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) or width values in
the right panel — A preview of your changes displays on the left.
3. Click OK — Your changes will be saved. The appearance of the graph
plot will be updated automatically for any graphs currently
displayed.
Delete Existing Pen

To delete an existing pen:
1. Click the pen in the left column.
2. Click Delete — The pen will be removed from the pens list.
191
Create New Pen

To create a new plot line pen:
1. Select an existing pen in the left column.
2. Change the line color, style (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) or width
values in the right panel — A preview of your changes displays on
the left.
3. Click Add — The new pen will be created at the bottom of the pens
list.
Change Pen Display Order

To change the rank in which pens are ordered in the pens column, and
therefore the order in which they will be used in graphs:
1. Select and hold the number to the left of a pen — A thick line will
display above the pen you have selected.
2. Drag the line up or down the pens column to a new position.
3. Release the mouse button — The pen will be moved to the new
location within the column.
Selecting a measurement
Using the Pen Array editor
192
Keyboard Shortcut Keys

General
F11 Toggle Full Screen
F9 Receive from instrument
ALT+F9 Send to instrument
CTRL+SHIFT+S Set shortcut
CTRL+O Open file
Open the online device setup wizard (online
CTRL+ALT+S
systems only)
Navigator
DEL Delete
CTRL+E Edit
CTRL+X Cut
CTRL+C Copy
CTRL+V Paste
CTRL+ALT+R Record now
CTRL+T Tag
F10 Save data and refresh navigator
F12 Generate Exception report
193
Chart
CTRL+N Return to Normal view
CTRL+S Toggle Stacked mode
CTRL+W Toggle Waterfall mode
CTRL+F Expand to Full Screen
CTRL+D Open same chart in new window
Remove the selected plot line when
CTRL+Z
multiple plots are displayed on a chart
CTRL+F5 List fault frequencies
SPACE Go to next navigator item
Move up/down between plots on charts if in
Arrow Keys [up/down] stacked/waterfall mode. Display next
recording in navigator if in normal mode.
CTRL+SHIFT+C Copy chart to clipboard
CTRL+Y View Orbit
CTRL+B View Bode
CTRL+9 View Waterfall
CTRL+F4 Close
CTRL+F10 View Record details
CTRL+3 View HVA
CTRL+SHIFT+F Save chart to file
F2 View Spectrum
F3 View Waveform
F4 View Trend
F5, F6 Cycle through fault frequencies
F7 View SpecTrend
F8 View Vel. + Demod.
194
Cursors
ESC Switch off cursors
S Sidebands and orders
O Orders only
N No harmonics
Arrow Keys [left/right] Nudge cursors
CTRL+[left/right] Peak search
SHIFT+[left/right] Move 1 pixel at a time
. Switch between cursors
CTRL+M Mark fault frequency
CTRL+P Jump to peak
CTRL+1 Set RPM to cursor position
CTRL+R Add remark at cursor position
195
Section 5 — Alarms
You can create individual alarms for specific schedule entries or alarm
templates which enable you to apply the same alarm to multiple
machines.
Using alarm templates makes it easier to manage your alarms. Any

change you make to a template will update every alarm using that
template. For example, you could modify a template's alarm threshold or
create additional thresholds within a band or envelope. Doing so would
in turn update the thresholds of all alarms associated with that
template.
Ascent enables you to manage alarms individually or as a group. Alarms

that have been created from a template can still be edited individually
without affecting the template.
NOTE: Some of the options shown on menus and forms will only
be available if they are included as part of your license agreement.
These options will be hidden or greyed out for users who are not
licensed to use them. If you wish to license a new feature, please
contact [email protected] or your distributor for more
information.
196
Check Alarm Status

The alarm status of machines, points, etc is shown with colors in the
navigator tree.
You can select Screen > Show Navigator Status Labels to control
whether text labels of the status are shown as well (e.g. see the
<Danger> and <Warning> labels in the image above).
Alarm status coloring is hierarchical. This means an item in the navigator

tree (e.g. a machine) will display the color of the highest alarm level
attained by one of its sub-elements. The image example above shows a
machine with three schedule entries. All these entries have recordings
that have triggered alarms. The dark red <Danger> alarm is a higher
level alarm than the <Warning> alarm, so the machine is colored dark
red.
Alarm color status enables you to identify at a glance, which schedule

entry has set off the <Danger> alarm. Alarm status is always determined
by the most recent recording at the schedule entry. Historical recordings
do not affect alarm status.
197
Check Alarms Automatically when New Recordings

Received from Instrument
To check alarms automatically when new recordings are received from
your instrument:
1. Select Alarms > Check Alarms after Receive — If you switch this
option off (by repeating the above process) you can check the alarm
status of new recordings when required.
2. To check the alarm status of new recordings, select Alarms > Check
all New Measurements for Alarms.
NOTE: Ascent automatically rechecks the alarm status of
recordings when an alarm threshold is edited or when you make
changes to your data that may alter the alarm status (e.g.
changing the RPM values of recordings).
Colors indicating alarm status
198
Channel Inoperative Alarms

Previously the channel inoperative alarm would only show for a node in
the navigator if all subnodes were reporting channel inoperative alarms.
Consequently if only one measurement location on a machine was in a
channel inoperative state, and the other locations were in an OK state,
the machine would show as being OK. This made it hard to see when
channels had problems and were not collecting valid data. To resolve
this, channel inoperative alarms propagate upwards, making it easier to
see when there is a problem.
An inoperative alarm will have a cross through it. The colors used for the
alarms are:
• Green — OK
• Yellow — Warning
• Orange — Alert
• Red — Danger
Channel inoperative alarms propagating up the navigator
199
Band, Crest Factor, and True Peak-to-Peak

Alarms
Band alarms can be peak or power-based and cover a limited range of
frequencies. For waveform measurements, two additional alarm options
are available:
• Crest factor
• True Peak-to-Peak alarms
When you select a schedule entry, the navigator list will display all the
alarms associated with that schedule entry:
• Peak band alarms detect when a peak on a spectrum goes
above a certain value.
• Power band alarms measure the overall RMS on a
spectrum within a band of frequencies and compare that
against a threshold value.
• Crest Factor alarms detect when the crest factor of a
waveform measurement exceeds a specified value.
• True Peak-to-Peak alarms detect when the peak-to-peak
dynamic range of a waveform measurement goes above (or
below) a specified level.
Alarm status is always determined by the most recent recording at the

schedule entry. When a recording triggers an alarm (by exceeding the
alarm threshold), the alarm icon will change color to indicate the alarm
status (e.g. Warning, Alert, Danger).
Band alarms are grouped together by the range of frequencies they

cover. One band can contain different alarm thresholds for different
alarm levels (e.g. Warning at 2 mm/s, Alert at 4 mm/s, Danger at 6
mm/s).
200
Peak Band Alarms

A peak band alarm defines a maximum threshold for any peak on a
spectrum between two specific frequencies. For example, the following
chart has four peak band alarms placed to raise an alarm if any large
amplitude peaks develop between the running speed harmonics on the
machine. The peak band alarms are indicated with arrows in the image.
Peak band alarms
201
Power Band Alarms

A power band alarm defines a maximum threshold for the overall
amount of vibration between two frequencies on a spectrum. Another
way to describe it would be a 'limited frequency range overall alarm'.
Power band alarms are displayed at the top of a spectrum as dotted
rectangles.
The frequency range covered by the alarm is indicated by the horizontal

length and position of the rectangle. The alarm thresholds are indicated
using colored lines across the alarm display region. The current power
level (overall RMS level) within that band of frequencies is indicated using
a bar that rises from the bottom of the alarm display region. When the
power level within that band goes through an alarm threshold, the bar
will change color to match the color chosen for that threshold e.g. red
for Danger.
NOTE: The measurement units for the alarm display area can be
different from those used on the chart. For example, if the chart is
plotted in acceleration and uses m/s/s for the left axis, you can use
any acceleration units for the alarm display area (e.g. g or cm/s/s).
The spectrum overall value displayed to the bottom right of the
band alarm will always use the same measurement units as the
band (because they both measure power levels).
Power band alarms
202
Waveform Crest Factor Alarms

A waveform crest factor alarm defines a maximum averaged crest
factor on a waveform. A 'perfect' sinusoidal waveform results in a crest
factor of 1.41. As the crest factor rises above this value, it grows
increasingly indicative of machinery damage.
MORE: See Waveform Peak-to-Peak and Averaged Crest Factor.
Waveform True Peak-to-Peak Alarms

A waveform true peak-to-peak alarm defines a maximum actual peak-
to-peak dynamic range value (the power difference between the highest
and lowest peaks) on a waveform. High peak-to-peak values typically
indicate the presence of high-level impact signals against low-level
background noise that results from mechanical damage.
203
Draw Individual Band Alarms on Chart

Peak and power band alarms can be 'drawn' directly onto a chart using
the mouse. (This feature is not available for crest factor or true peak-to-
peak alarms.) This method lets you identify frequencies of interest on a
vibration chart and add the bands directly above them.
To add a single band alarm manually:

1. Right-click the chart at the exact frequency where you want the
alarm to begin.
2. Select Alarm Bands > Add — The band alarm will be drawn from left
to right.
3. Move your mouse to the right — A new band will display and follow
the mouse until you left-click again on the chart to place it.
NOTE: A peak alarm icon displays in the navigator list, showing the
frequency range covered by this alarm. You can change this
default name to something more meaningful if required.
NOTE: The band alarm is configured to match the current chart

display. If the chart bottom axis is expressed in orders, the band
alarm will have its start and stop frequencies defined in orders.
You can use your mouse cursor to manually adjust peak band alarms on
the chart.
Moving your mouse on the chart
Peak alarm icon
204
Change Alarm Threshold

To change the alarm threshold:
1. Move the cursor over the top of the band until it changes to an up or
down arrow.
2. Use EITHER of these methods to adjust threshold values:
• Press and hold the left mouse button > Drag the alarm
threshold up or down.
• Use the Band Alarm editor to enter precise threshold values.
MORE: See Editing Individual Band Alarms.
Changing the alarm threshold
Change Start or Stop Frequency

You can use EITHER of these methods to change the start or stop
frequency of an alarm band:
• Move the cursor over the left or right edge of the band until it
changes to a left or right arrow > Press and hold the left mouse
button while you drag the alarm to change the start or stop
frequency.
• Use the Band Alarm editor to enter the new frequency values.
Changing the start or stop frequency
205
Create Power Band Alarms

To create a power band alarm:
1. Create a peak band alarm.
2. Create a peak band alarm on the chart.
3. Right-click the peak band alarm > Select Edit to open the Band
Alarm editor.
4. Select Power from the dropdown field.
5. Edit the thresholds > Make any other changes as required.
6. Click OK — The band alarm displays at the top of the chart.
Create power band alarms
206
Edit Individual Band Alarm

To edit individual band alarms:
1. Use EITHER of these methods to edit band alarms:
• Right-click the band, crest factor, or true peak-to-peak alarm on
a chart (or the alarm's icon in the navigator list) > Select Edit to
open the Band Alarm editor.
• To display the entire list of alarms on a machine, select the
machine in the navigator > Click the Alarms button > Select an
alarm from this list > Click Edit.
NOTE: The lower Alarm Template section of this screen will not be
available if you are not licensed to use this feature.
NOTE: It can be useful to enter a description for the alarm in this

window. When the alarm is broken, this information will be
included in the exception report. For example, when placing a
peak band alarm over the 1X peak on a spectrum, give the alarm
the description 1X so that if the alarm is exceeded, the exception
report includes this information.
2. Use the fields in the Band Alarm editor to adjust the frequency
range.
3. Change the alarm band from peak to power, crest factor, or true
peak-to-peak (or vice versa).
4. Create additional alarms above or below the existing one (use the
Alarm type dropdown fields to choose Alert, Danger, etc).
NOTE: Select an option from the 'Data Enter' dropdown field if
using multi-measurement parameter sets such as 6Pack.
207
Editing an individual band alarm
208
Select Measurement Units of Band Alarms

When you create a band alarm, the alarm's measurement units will
default to the same as those used on the chart.
EG: If the chart left axis uses mm/s 0-peak, the alarm will also use
mm/s 0-peak.
The measurement units for the alarm can be different from those used
for the chart. You can select different units if required.
EG: If the chart is plotted in acceleration and uses m/s/s for the left
axis, you can use any acceleration units for the alarm, such as g or
cm/s/s.
NOTE: Alarms will only be displayed if their amplitude units

(velocity, displacement, or acceleration) match those used by the
chart. For example, if your alarms are using acceleration units and
you change the left axis scale to velocity or displacement, the
alarms will not display.
NOTE: If the band alarm unit does not match the template unit, a
message will display at the bottom of the panel beside the Update
using template button. To change the alarm unit to match that of
the template, click the Update using template button.
You can right-click an alarm band to access relevant menu options.
NOTE: This ability does not apply to crest factor or peak-to-peak

alarms.
Hide or Display Band Alarms

To hide or show band alarms, right-click an alarm band > Select Alarm
Bands > Tick or untick Visible.
209
Hide or Display Text Descriptions on Band Alarms

To hide or display the text descriptions on band alarms:
1. Right-click the alarm band > Select No Text to hide the band alarm
text.
2. Select Band Descriptions or Band Overalls to display the name or
overall power in the alarm band.
Remove Band Alarm

You can use EITHER of these methods to remove an alarm band:
• Right-click the band > Select Delete.
• Select the alarm icon in the navigator list > Press Delete.
Resize Band Alarm Display Area for Power Bands

You can use EITHER of these methods to resize the band alarm display
area:
• Right-click the band > Select Set Size — This enables you to set
a percentage value of the amount of screen area you would like
the alarm band to use.
• Press and hold the right mouse button on the power alarm plot
area > Drag the mouse up and down.
Rescale Band Alarm Display Area (left axis scale)

You can rescale the band alarm display area using EITHER of these
methods:
• Press and hold the right mouse button on the band alarm plot
area > Drag the mouse left or right.
• Right-click the band alarm > Select Set Power Band Display
Range.
210
Exceed Band, Crest Factor, or Peak-to-Peak Alarm

In the navigator, the alarm icon and the machine containing that alarm
will change color to show the alarm status (Danger, Warning, etc).
When you plot a spectrum chart, you will see peak and power band
alarms:
• Peak band alarm — The word Exceeded will display on the

spectrum to indicate where the alarm has been broken.
Exceeded Peak band alarm
211
• Power band alarm — The band alarm will change color to

indicate the alarm level (e.g. red for Danger, yellow for Warning).
Exceeded Power band alarm
212
When you plot a waveform chart, you will see waveform crest factor and
true peak-to-peak alarms:
• Waveform Crest Factor alarm — The crest factor figure (top

right of chart) will change color to indicate the alarm level.
Crest Factor alarm
• True Peak-to-Peak alarm — The peak-to-peak value will

change color to indicate the alarm level.
Crest Factor alarm
213
The detailed Exception report will show the alarm name (or spectrum
frequency range if it was unnamed) and the amount the alarm was
exceeded by. It will also show the total amount of power in the band (for
power band alarms) and the amplitude of the highest peak that broke
the alarm (for peak band alarms).
Exception report
The Alarm report shows additional information, including the values of

previous measurements and the percentage change from the last
measurement.
Alarm report
214
Trend Band Alarms

You can trend alarm levels to help you predict when vibration levels are
approaching, or will exceed, preset alarm limits. To trend band alarms:
1. Use EITHER of these methods to see a trend of the band value
versus threshold for all recordings taken at this schedule entry:
• Right-click a peak or power band alarm in a chart > Select
Trend this band.
• Double-click the alarm band icon (power , peak ) in the
navigator list.
2. You can trend multiple band alarms for quick comparison and
analysis. On a single chart you can use the Hold and Add button to
trend peak and power-based alarms, alarms from different schedule
entries, and even alarms that use different units (mm/s, in/s, etc).
3. Select a schedule entry containing some alarms you wish to trend.
4. Select the Chart button > Select Trend from the dropdown field
— Ascent will plot trends of all the alarms at this schedule entry in
the chart display area. The following image shows a trend plot of a
schedule entry with seven alarms. Ascent automatically adds the
spectrum overalls to the bottom of the list as these can also be
trended (double-click the Spectrum Overalls label to plot the data).
Trend lines are color-coded so you can see which alarm they relate
to. If several trend lines use the same color, you can identify a
specific trend by selecting a trend line on the chart, which will
highlight that alarm in the chart legend.
5. Select the <Set Trend Enters> text in the bottom right corner to
select the trend data types you want displayed — The alarm
thresholds (Warning, Alert, Danger) are indicated by the colored bars
running horizontally across the chart. If a single alarm trend is
displayed, the left axis scale will use vibration units by default (e.g.
mm/s rms). If several alarm trends are displayed, the left axis scale
will use severity rank instead. Severity rank shows how high each
band alarm's vibration levels are relative to its own thresholds. The
left axis is scaled from 0-10 and thresholds are shown using a fixed
scale of severity (2 = Warning, 5 = Alert, 8 = Danger) rather than a
specific measurement unit such as mm/s. This enables you to show
band alarms with different thresholds or measurement units on the
same chart. If you change the left axis amplitude scale to a specific
unit (e.g. velocity), only those that are compatible with that unit will
be shown.
215
6. Right-click the trend > Select Left Axis to select a different left axis
scale.
7. Select the required option from the dropdown field — These options
change according to the amplitude type of the recordings (velocity,
acceleration, displacement). Demodulation will display as
acceleration:
• Power Level — The left axis scale will use vibration units (e.g.
mm/s rms). Only power bands and spectrum overalls will
display.
• Alarm Level — The left axis scale will use severity rank. All alarm
band and envelope trend lines will display.
• Spectrum Amplitude — The left axis scale will use vibration
units (e.g. mm/s rms). Only peak bands will display.
• Default — If one trend is shown, the left axis will use vibration
units. If more than one alarm band or envelope trend is shown,
the left axis will use severity rank. The following image shows
the same trend chart after the left axis scale was set to Velocity
Spectrum Amplitude. You will notice that several of the trend
plot lines have disappeared. The trend lines that can be shown
on a chart depend on the scale used for the left axis. Because
we are now shown Velocity Spectrum Amplitude (i.e. peak band
alarms), the Velocity Power Level alarms (spectrum overall and
power band alarms) cannot be shown.
8. Select the Not shown - click here to view labels to toggle which
trend plots are shown — This changes the chart's left axis scale to
ensure the series you selected can be shown. In our chart example,
selecting a Not shown label would change the axis scale to rms. The
spectrum overall and power band alarms will display, the peak band
alarms will disappear. By default, left axis numbering starts at zero
and scales to fit your data by adding additional space above and
below the bottom and top plot lines. You can deactivate this option
off so that the axis number scale starts immediately below the
bottom plot line (rather than at zero) and finishes just above the top
plot line.
9. Right-click the chart > Select Auto-Scale to fit Alarms to rescale the
left axis numbering — Different kinds of data can be shown or
hidden on a trend plot depending on the trend types you select
(spectrum overalls, alarm band levels, etc). These will toggle the
trend plots that can be shown in a similar manner to the Left Axis
options.
10. Right-click the chart > Select Data Enters to restrict the alarm types
the trend chart can display.
216
11. Tick or untick the required options from the data types panel.
MORE: See Trending Data.
Trending band alarms
217
Envelope Alarms
An envelope alarm is usually based on a reference spectrum that is ideal
or 'normal' for the measurement point. It specifies the maximum
allowable amplitude for each frequency value in a spectrum. An alarm is
raised if any part of the spectrum exceeds the envelope threshold.
Envelope alarms
218
Add Envelope Alarms to Chart

To add envelope alarms to a chart:
1. Right-click the chart > Select Alarm Envelopes > Add — You will be
asked for a severity rating for this alarm.
2. Select an alarm type from the dropdown field — Warning is the
default.
3. Click OK — An alarm envelope is drawn on the chart. The Alarm
Envelope Generator displays at the top right of your screen. The
Vertical and Horizontal percentage margins define the relative
vertical and horizontal distance between the envelope and
spectrum.
NOTE: The 'Warning' envelope line is colored yellow by default. You
can change this later if required. See Changing Colors for Printer
and Screen.
4. Drag the sliders on the Alarm Envelope Generator to change the

envelope margins — The alarm shape changes on the chart as you
make adjustments to the settings.
5. Click the down arrow icon to access advanced options:
• The Minimum Margin adjustments define absolute minimum
amplitude and frequency margins between the envelope and
selected spectrum.
• # points defines the resolution of the envelope.
• Start freq enables you to exclude lower frequencies from the
envelope alarm region (where 'ski slopes' may occur).
6. Click OK.
Adding an envelope alarm to a chart
219
Edit Individual Envelope Alarm

Right-click the envelope plot line to access the relevant functions such
as deleting and hiding/displaying the alarm.
Readjust Envelope Margins

To readjust envelope margins, right-click the envelope plot line > Select
Adjust Margin.
Change Alarm Level

You can change the envelope alarm level (Danger, Warning etc) and
adjust other properties using the Alarm Envelope editor. Use EITHER of
these methods to open the editor:
• Right-click the envelope plot line > Select Edit Properties.
• Right-click the alarm's icon in the navigator list > Select Edit.
You cannot change the Amplitude Units and Frequency Units settings
once the alarm has been created. If you want an envelope that uses
different units, delete the envelope and create a new one.
NOTE: Alarms will only display if their amplitude units (velocity,

displacement, or acceleration) match those used by the chart. For
example. if your alarms are using acceleration units and you
change the left axis scale to velocity or displacement, the alarms
will not display.
Changing the alarm level
220
Manually Edit Envelope on Chart

You can also edit envelope alarms manually using your mouse to push
sections of the envelope up, down, or across. To do this:
1. Click the envelope plot line to select it — The mouse cursor will
change to a hand icon indicating that it can be used to push the
envelope.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button > Drag the mouse cursor into
the envelope plot line to push it.
3. Release the mouse button when finished — If you push the line
down too far you can push it up again by moving the cursor below
the envelope plot line and repeating this process.
4. Press Enter to save the changes or Esc to discard changes (the
mouse cursor will return to normal).
Manually editing the envelope on a chart
Add Another Envelope

To add another envelope:
1. Right-click the envelope plot line > Select Add.
2. Follow the previous instructions for adding an envelope to a chart.
EG: If you have an existing Warning envelope set at 50% above the
reference (ideal) spectrum, you can now add an Alert envelope at
150% above the reference.
221
Exceed Envelope Alarm

When an envelope alarm is exceeded, the word Exceeded displays on
the spectrum to indicate where the alarm has been broken.
Exceeded envelope alarm
The Exception report will show the alarm type and the amount by which
the envelope was exceeded. Note that the envelope may have been
broken in more than one place, but only the highest exceeded value is
shown on the exception report.
Exception report showing details of exceeded envelope alarm
222
The Alarm report shows additional information, including the values of

previous measurements, and the percentage change from the last
measurement.
Alarm report showing additional details of exceed envelope alarm
223
Trend Envelope Alarms

Envelope alarm trends are expressed by their 'percentage of threshold'.
This is the greatest 'percentage of alarm level' for any peak in the
measurement. For example, a percentage of threshold of 110% for a
measurement means the peak that exceeded the alarm envelope the
most, did so by 10%.
The following image shows an envelope plotted against percentage. The

horizontal red line indicates the 100% alarm level of the envelope (i.e.
when a peak touches any part of the envelope).
Envelope plotted against percentage
224
In the following image, data is scaled so that the:

• Minimum level occurs at 0 severity rank
• Maximum occurs at 10 severity rank
• Alarm crosses the appropriate alarm level line at the point at
which the envelope was exceeded
Same envelope plotted against alarm level
Overall RMS Alarms

An overall RMS alarm defines a maximum threshold for the overall RMS
vibration of a measurement. An overall RMS alarm is a special case of a
power band alarm where the start and stop frequencies encompass the
entire measurement.
To create an overall RMS alarm, create a power band alarm with a start
frequency of 0 Hz and a stop frequency of 1 000 000 Hz.
MORE: See Adding Band Alarms to a Chart, for instructions on

creating the band and editing the frequency range.
Overall RMS alarms display automatically on trend charts just like other
alarm bands. You can also right-click the overall RMS alarm band on a
chart and select Trend this Band.
225
Use More Detailed Alarm Threshold

Basic Warning, Alert, and Danger alarm thresholds are suitable for most
applications. However, additional options are available if you need them.
To use more detailed alarm thresholds, select Options > Allow Legacy
Alarm Enters. When you create or edit an alarm, these additional alarm
thresholds will display in the Alarm type dropdown field. The thresholds
can be applied to both envelope and band alarms.
Basic alarm thresholds
Additional threshold options
226
Create Alarm Template

An alarm template such as an ISO standard band alarm is an alarm that
is defined once, then reused several times on different machines. When
you create a template, you can use the alarm on several machines. If
you later decide to change the template (e.g. to update an alarm's
threshold), this change will be applied to all alarms using the template.
You can also modify an individual instance of an alarm without affecting

the template. This is because editing an alarm removes its association
with the template. This gives you the ability to apply general all purpose
alarms to several machines, then customize the individual alarms later
for more fine-tuned monitoring of problem machines.
Alarm templates are most useful when you want to use the same alarm
settings on several machines (e.g. for monitoring specific fault
frequencies such as a 1X running speed, bearing fault frequencies, etc).
227
Create Peak and Power Band Template

To create an alarm template:
1. Select a navigator item you wish to apply the alarm to (e.g. an entire
machine).
2. Click the Alarms button — This opens the Alarm wizard which you
can use to create and manage individual alarms and alarm
templates.
3. Click Add.
4. Select the Alarm Band Frequency Range tab.
5. Enter the start and stop frequency for this band.
6. Click the browse button at the top right to open the Alarm
Templates window.
7. Define the settings for this alarm template.
8. Click Add.
9. Enter a name to describe the purpose of this alarm (e.g. Gear Mesh
Frequencies).
10. Select the Thresholds tab — This is where you define the threshold:
• Unit — Acceleration, velocity, etc
• Type — Warning, danger, alert
• Amplitude
11. Select the threshold units for your alarm from the drop-down box:
• For peak bands, select Spectrum Amplitude.
• For power bands, select Power Level:
TIP: We recommend you select your normal preferred units under

Options > Unit Preferences. This will avoid the need for excessive
unit conversions in Ascent.
NOTE: If the units you require do not display in the drop-down box,
click More > Select a unit from the list > Click OK. If you select a
unit that has no abbreviation, you will be prompted to enter one
now.
12. Define the threshold amplitude and alarm warning level (alert,
danger, etc).
13. Click Add.
14. Select the alarm level from the drop-down box.
15. Enter an amplitude value that will trigger this alarm when exceeded.
16. Click OK.
228
17. Click Add to add additional thresholds to this alarm > Define
additional thresholds as required.
EG: You might want to do this to create separate warning, alert,
and danger levels in a single band or envelope. Click OK to return
to the Alarm Templates window. Your new alarm template will be
highlighted.
18. Click Select to apply the template to your machines. The Alarm
Creator window will open and display each schedule entry at the
currently selected navigator item (you may need to select the
Applicable Schedule Entries tab to see this). Schedule entries whose
measurement units match those of your alarm (e.g. velocity) will
already be selected.
19. Tick or untick the checkboxes to select the schedule entries you wish
to have alarms created for.
20. Click OK twice.
21. Click Close.
229
Create Envelope Template

To create an alarm template:
1. Select a navigator item you wish to apply the alarm to.
2. Click the Alarms button — This opens the Alarm wizard used to
create and manage individual alarms and alarm templates.
3. Click Add.
4. Click the browse button to open the Alarm Templates window.
5. Define the settings for this alarm template.
6. Click Add.
7. Enter a descriptive name to describe the purpose of this alarm (e.g.
Gear Mesh Frequencies).
8. Tick the These generation parameters are for Envelopes checkbox.
9. Select the Thresholds tab — This is where you define the threshold:
• Unit (acceleration, velocity, etc)
• Type (warning, danger, alert)
• Threshold amplitude
10. Select the threshold units for your alarm from the drop-down box —
Spectrum Amplitude and Power Level refer to band alarms. You can
choose either to create your envelope.
TIP: We recommend you select Options > Unit Preferences to
choose your normal preferred units. This will avoid the need for
excessive unit conversions in Ascent. If the units you require do not
display in the drop-down box, click More > Choose a unit from the
list > Click OK. If you select a unit that has no abbreviation, you will
be prompted to enter one.
11. Define the threshold amplitude and alarm warning level (alert,
danger, etc).
12. Click Add.
13. Select the alarm level from the drop-down box.
14. Enter an amplitude value that will trigger this alarm when exceeded.
15. Select the Envelope Options tab.
230
16. Specify the width of the envelope around peaks in the spectrum —
You only need to enter a value in one of the first three fields,
however you can use more than one if required. If you select more
than one of these options, the greatest width determined by these
options will be used at each point (spectral line) in the envelope.
Each width option is explained in detail following the image below.
• Hz — This specifies a frequency at which the envelope will be
placed either side of a peak. For example, a value of 6 Hz will
generate an envelope 3 Hz either side of each peak.
• Lines — This specifies the number of spectral lines between the
envelope and each peak in the spectrum. For example, a value
of 10 will generate an envelope five lines either side of each
peak. We recommend this option for machines that run at or
near the same speed from one recording to the next.
• Percentage of frequency — This specifies the frequency
percentage the envelope will be placed either side of a peak. For
example, a value of 10% around a peak at 2000 CPM will place
the envelope 5% either side of the peak at 1900 CPM and 2100
CPM. At higher frequencies on the same spectrum, the envelope
will become much wider. For example at 60 000 CPM, the
envelope will extend 3000 CPM either side. We recommend this
option for machines that run at variable speeds or whose RPM
varies significantly from one recording to the next.
• Lines (number to ignore) — This specifies the number of spectral
lines that will be ignored at the beginning of the spectrum. I.e.
the envelope will be drawn around all frequencies except the
first few lines. This helps avoid false alarms caused by the ‘ski
slope’ often found at the low frequency end of spectra.
17. Click OK — You can add additional thresholds to this alarm. For
example, you might want to create separate warning, alert, and
danger levels in a single band or envelope. To do this, click Add
again > Define additional thresholds as required.
18. Click OK to return to the Alarm Templates window — Your new alarm
template will be highlighted.
19. Click Select to apply the template to your machines — The Alarm
Creator window opens and display each schedule entry at the
currently selected navigator item. Schedule entries whose
measurement units match those of your alarm e.g. velocity, will
already be selected.
20. Tick or untick the checkboxes as required to select the schedule
entries you wish to have alarms created for then click OK.
21. Click OK again then Close to finish.
231
Apply Alarm Template to Additional Schedule

Entries
After you have initially created and applied your alarm templates at
selected schedule entries, you can apply these alarms to additional
schedule entries at a later time. To apply the alarms:
1. Select a machine, point, or location.
2. Click the Alarms button.
3. Click Add.
4. Click the browse icon to open the Alarm Templates window.
5. Select the alarm template you wish to apply to your machine.
6. Click Select — The Alarm Creator window will list the schedule
entries on your machine.
7. Select the schedule entry checkboxes you wish to apply the alarm
to.
8. Click OK twice to apply the alarms.
9. Click Close to finish.
232
Use Template to Edit Existing Alarm Thresholds

You can change the thresholds of existing alarms (those that were not
created from a template) by applying an alarm template to them.
Updating the thresholds will NOT change the frequency range of band
alarms or the start frequency of envelope alarms.
To change an existing alarm threshold using a template:

1. Select the machine containing the alarms you wish to update.
2. Click Alarms — The Alarm wizard displays all the alarms at your
selected machine.
NOTE: If you have several different types and units of alarms, filter
the alarms displayed using the drop-down box at the top of the
window.
3. Select the alarms whose thresholds you wish to update.

TIP: Use SHIFT or CTRL to select more than one alarm in the list.
4. Click the Template button or select Templates > Edit template for
selected alarm.
5. Select the template you wish to apply to these alarms.
6. Click Select — The Alarm Summary window displays the new alarm
information.
7. Click OK then Close to finish.
233
Edit Alarms Globally

To update an alarm everywhere it is used, you need to modify the alarm
template. Modifying the template automatically changes every alarm
using that template.
NOTE: If you want to change alarm settings for a single instance of

an alarm, you will need to edit it individually (see Editing Individual
Alarms).
To edit alarms globally:

1. Select the folder icon at the top of the navigator.
2. Click Alarms — The Alarm wizard displays all the alarms at your
selected machine.
NOTE: If you have several alarms of different types and units, filter
the alarms displayed using the drop-down box at the top of the
window.
3. Use EITHER of these methods according to your requirements:

• Select Templates > Edit all templates.
• Select an alarm in the list that uses your template > Select
Templates > Edit template for selected alarm.
4. Select a template to modify.
5. Click Edit.
6. Click OK to confirm you wish to edit this template.
7. Make the required changes.
8. Click OK — You will be prompted to update any alarms using this
template.
9. Click OK to confirm.
10. Click OK twice.
11. Click Close to close all windows.
234
Edit Individual Alarms

Any alarm based on a template can still be modified individually. Editing
an individual alarm breaks the relationship between the alarm and its
template. Changes to the individual alarm do not affect the template.
Subsequent changes you make to the original template will no longer be

passed onto your alarm. This enables you to apply 'general all purpose'
alarms to several machines using your templates. Once you have done
this you can customize the individual alarms for more fine-tuned
monitoring of problem machines.
NOTE: Changing the frequency range of a band alarm will not

break the relationship between the alarm and its template.
You can edit alarms by plotting a recording and manipulating the alarm
on the chart (see Editing Individual Band Alarms or Editing Individual
Envelope Alarms).
If you are editing several alarms, it is easier to do this from within the
Alarm wizard which displays the full listing of all alarms on each
machine.
To edit individual alarms:

1. Click Alarms.
2. Locate and select the alarm you wish to edit.
3. Select Alarms > Edit.
4. Edit the alarm as required — This will break the alarm's association
with its template.
5. Click OK.
6. Edit additional alarms by selecting them and repeat the steps
above.
7. Click Close when you are finished.
235
Editing an individual alarm
Delete Alarm Templates and Alarms

You cannot delete an alarm template if it is being used by any alarms.
If you see the following message you will need to delete any alarms that
are using the template before deleting the actual template.
To delete an alarm template:

1. Click Alarms.
2. Select Templates > Edit all templates.
3. Select the template you wish to remove.
4. Click Delete.
NOTE: If you see the error message shown above, follow the
instructions below for deleting a template and its associated
alarms.

6. Click OK.
7. Click Close to close all windows.
236
Delete Template and Associated Alarms

Deleting a template that is still being used by alarms is a two-stage
process. You will first need to delete the alarms so the template is not
being referenced by any other objects, and then delete the template.
To delete a template and any associated alarms:

1. Click OK to close the prompt window if you have not done so
already.
2. Click Usage to see which alarms are associated with your template.
3. Click OK to confirm — The Tagged Items window lists all alarms
currently using your template.
4. Select the Operations menu or button > Select Delete.
5. Click Yes to confirm.
6. Click OK to close the Tagged Items window.
7. Select the template you wish to remove then click Delete. Click OK
to confirm the deletion.
237
Section 6 — Bearing Database

This section provides information about the bearing database.
Use Quick Search to Find Bearing

When you add a bearing to a point, the Bearing Search window provides
a short list of options. If the bearing you require is not listed, you can
locate it in the archive.
To find a bearing using the quick search:

1. Click Search the Commtest Bearing Archive.
2. Select the bearing's manufacturer from the dropdown field.
3. Enter the bearing part number.
NOTE: If you know the manufacturer's name but not the part
number (or vice versa), enter the information you know.
4. Click Search now — The bearing archive is searched and a list of the
closest matches is displayed. If you only entered the manufacturer's
name or the part number, the list will show all known bearings from
that manufacturer or all bearings that match that part number.
Scroll down the list if necessary to locate your bearing.
5. Select a bearing.
6. Click Use selected bearing — This will return you to the Bearing on
Point editor.
7. Enter a name in the description field.
8. Click OK to add the bearing to the selected point — A bearing
icon now displays in the navigator list whenever this point is
selected.
238
Bearing search window
Conducting a quick search for a bearing
239
Advanced Search
You can use the advanced search option to help find the correct bearing
in the archive. This is a useful option even if you don't know the
manufacturer and part number. Advanced search uses the information
you provide to retrieve a list of bearings that match your criteria.
To conduct an advanced search:

1. Click Search the Commtest Bearing Archive.
2. Click Advanced search — A range of search options displays,
enabling you to narrow the archive's list of bearings.
3. Select an attribute you know the value of in the first Attribute
dropdown field.
EG: If you know the outer diameter of the bearing you require,
select Outer diameter.
4. Select the option that will be used to match your information in the
Search type dropdown field.
EG: For the Outer diameter option, you can choose equals or
greater than the diameter you specify.
5. Enter the information you know about the required bearing in the
Search key field.
EG: For the purposes of this example, you would enter the outer
diameter of your required bearing.
6. If you have other information that will aid the search, enter this in
the lower fields.
7. Select Match case if you want the search to match the lower and
upper case letters you entered.
TIP: The more information you provide to narrow the search, the
shorter the final list of bearings will be.
8. Choose whether you want the search to match all criteria or any
criteria you specify.
9. Click Search now — The bearing archive is searched. A list of the
closest matches displays.
10. Select a bearing from this list or add more information.
11. Start a fresh search to narrow the list of possible bearings.
240
12. Click Clear search to clear all information from the screen.
13. Click Quick search to return to the quick search window.
Conducting an advanced search
241
Section 7 — Additional Features and Features
Section 7 — Additional Functions and

Features
This section provides information on the additional functions and
features available in Ascent.
Keypad Schedule Entries

You can create special keypad schedule entries in Ascent that let you
define additional machine information you wish to collect (e.g. machine
temperature or motor current). When following a route, your instrument
will prompt you to enter this information using the keypad.
You can also use these prompts as reminders to perform additional

checks (e.g. to check the oil level). When collecting the data, you can
enter a value of one (1) for done or zero (0) for not done to record
whether the check has been carried out.
NOTE: Keypad schedule entries can only be created in Ascent. They

cannot be created or edited in your portable instrument.
Folders containing keypad schedule entries will send/receive to the

instrument as normal. When the data has been collected and the folder
is received into Ascent, the measurements will display as date/time
stamped records in the navigator list (as with spectra and waveforms).
The keypad schedule entries display in the navigator tree like a normal
schedule entry but are differentiated by their numeric (123) icon.
You can trend the collected data values in the same way as other
recordings using the Trend view.
MORE: See Trending Data.
Keypad schedule entry differentiated by numeric icon
242
Create Keypad Schedule Entry

To create a keypad schedule entry:
1. Activate Build mode by selecting Build and clicking the Manual
Build Mode link.
2. Select the [Add Location] placeholder in the navigator tree where
you want the keypad schedule entry created — The location Keypad
Entry in the [Add Measurement Location] dropdown field is provided
as a suggested location for keypad schedule entries but they can be
placed in any location. In your instrument, the Keypad Entry location
will display in the list of directions/axes when you select the
machine location.
3. Select Edit > New > Keypad Schedule Entry.
NOTE: There is a faster way to create keypad schedule entries that

does not require you to activate Build mode. Instead, you can
right-click a location > Select New > Keypad Schedule Entry. This
will open the window shown in the previous image. If you use this
method you will have to use an existing location (rather than the
designated Keypad Entry location) because the placeholders only
display when Build Mode is activated.
4. Enter a prompt that will display on your instrument (maximum of 16

characters for vbX000 portable instruments and 50 for SCOUT/vbX
portable instruments) — This prompt will be preceded by the word
Enter when it is displayed on your instrument.
5. Select the units for temperature (-deg C and -deg F) from the Units
dropdown field.
NOTE: To select any other type of unit, click More > Select a unit
from the list > Click OK. If you select a unit that has no
abbreviation, you will be prompted to enter one.
NOTE: The abbreviations you enter are stored in a file called

units.ini in the Ascent program folder.
6. Set the number of decimal places you wish to use.

NOTE: This will affect the range of values you can enter. For
example, two decimal places allows you to enter values from -
599.99 to +599.99. Zero decimal places allows you to enter values
from -59999 to +59999. You can enter positive and negative
values when collecting data with your instrument.
243
7. Enter a default value to display on the vb screen (optional) — The

person collecting the data will not have to record this information
unless the value changes.
8. Tick the checkbox provided if you want this data to be recorded as
part of a route — Your instrument will prompt you for this data when
you perform any route that includes the measurement location
containing the keypad schedule entry.
NOTE: See also Associating Process Variables with Vibration
Recordings for more information about the 'Display this value on
all charts for this Machine' checkbox.
Selecting the [Add Location] placeholder
Create your Own Units

The list of engineering unit types in the unit selection window are based
on the MIMOSA CRIS-v1 standard. To create your own units:
1. Click More to open the Units window,
2. Select one of the User defined unit slots (towards the end of the list).
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter an abbreviation for this unit (maximum of 16 characters) —
This abbreviation will be used in the Units and Default value fields.
5. Click OK twice to close the windows and apply your units — Once
defined, this new unit will remain in the list and can be selected like
any of the default ones.
MORE: See Associating Process Variables with Vibration
Recordings.
244
Edit Value after Collection

If you have entered the value of a keypad schedule entry incorrectly, you
can change this once the schedule entry has been transferred to Ascent.
To edit the value:
1. Right-click the recording in the navigator list > Select Edit.
2. Change the value as required.
3. Click OK.
Attached File Schedule Entry

Attached file schedule entries are similar to keypad schedule entries.
However, instead of being entered via a portable instrument, they are
entered directly into Ascent. You can attach image, audio, Word
documents, and more to this type of schedule entry measurement for
later reference and use. For example, you might want to attach files
associated with an oil analysis report to a single location.
Typically alarm states are associated with this function. However, like
keypad schedule entries, you can also use attached file schedule entries
to collect measurements such as machine temperature or motor
current, as well as arbitrary user-defined measurement values.
245
Create Attached File Schedule Entry

To create an attached file schedule entry:
1. Right-click a point or location > Select New > Attached File
Schedule Entry or click the Attached File Schedule Entry button
on the creation palette.
2. Enter a schedule entry name into the Description field.
3. Select an appropriate operational mode from the radio buttons
available:
• Value Entry Mode is used when you wish to manually enter
numeric measurement values, such as RPM or output current,
as a schedule entry recording.
• Alarm Mode is used if you wish to manually enter alarm states
(OK, Warning, Alert, Danger, Inoperative) as a schedule entry
recording.
4. If you selected Alarm Mode proceed to the next step. If you selected
Value Entry Mode, select a measurement unit from the dropdown
field or click More to select a standard unit or to create a user-
defined unit. Any previously selected user-defined or standard units
will be listed in the Attached File Schedule Entry dropdown field.
5. Click OK. The schedule entry will now be created. The attached file
schedule entry will display in the navigator tree and can be
identified by its paper clip icon .
NOTE: attached file schedule entries will not be transferred when a
folder is sent to a portable instrument.
To edit an existing attached file schedule entry, right-click it from the

navigator tree or list > Select Edit (or press CTRL + E).
246
Create Attached File Measurement

To create an attached file measurement:
1. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Attached File
Measurement panel:
• Right-click an Attached File Schedule Entry > Select New >
Attached File Measurement.
• Select an Attached File Schedule Entry > Click the Create an
attached file measurement button from the creation
palette.
NOTE: The panel displayed varies according to the mode you
selected when creating the schedule entry (Value Entry or Alarm
mode).
2. Use EITHER of these methods depending on the type of value you

are entering:
• Value entry — Enter a numeric value in the Trended Value field.
• Alarm state — Select a state from the Alarm State dropdown
field.
3. Adjust the Date/Time fields to change the timestamp of the entry
manually.
4. Click Add to attach a file to the measurement — A standard
Windows selection window opens, enabling you to select the file(s)
you wish to attach.
NOTE: You can select any file recognized by the Windows
operating system. Attached files are listed in the Attached Files
area once selected.
5. Click OK when you have entered a numeric value or alarm state and
attached any files you wish to associate with the entry.
6. Edit an existing attached file measurement entry using EITHER of
these methods:
• Right-click the entry on the navigator list > Select Edit.
• Press CTRL + E.
NOTE: Once you have recorded several measurements, these can

be trended using Ascent's normal trending tools (e.g. reports and
the 'Trend' chart). See Trending Data and Section 3: Reports.
247
Attached File Measurement Panel — Alarm Mode
Attached files
Manage Attached Files

You can use the Attached File Measurement panel to view, delete, or
export files attached to a measurement.
View File
You can use EITHER of these methods to view a file:
• Double-click it.
• Select it from the file list > Click View.
Delete File
To delete a file, select it from the file list > Click Delete.
248
Export File
To export a file:
1. Select it from the file list.
2. Click Export.
3. Select the location the file will be extracted to.
4. Click OK.
Add file
You can add a new file to any existing attached file schedule entry
measurement. To do this:
1. Open an existing attached file measurement.
2. Click Add.
3. Select any files you wish to add to the measurement.
4. Click Open.
Average Value Schedule Entry

Average Value schedule entries are used to determine an average signal
level from a specified sensor over a user-specified measurement period.
The Average Value numeric value can be trended and alarmed in Ascent.
For example, use this feature to measure power output from a wind
turbine, or a proximity probe gap as well as arbitrary user-defined
measurement values.
NOTE: Average Value schedule entries for Ranger devices are used
exclusively for taking temperature measurements.
249
Create Average Value Schedule Entry

To create an average value schedule entry:
1. Right-click a point or location > Select New > Average Value
Schedule Entry, or click the Average Value Schedule Entry
button on the creation palette.
2. Enter a schedule entry name in the Description field.
3. Select a tab that corresponds with the instrument type you will be
taking the measurement with:
• vbOnline
• vbX
• Ranger Temperature
NOTE: Ranger devices can only be used to take temperature

measurements using the schedule entry type.
4. Select the instrument channel the measurement will be taken with:

• SCOUT/vbX instruments — Select a channel from the Channel
dropdown field.
• vbOnline and Ranger devices — Click the More button
beside Channel to open the Device Channel Configuration
window > Select an instrument from the vb Device dropdown
field > Select a channel (axis for Ranger devices) from the
Channel field > Click OK.
NOTE: Average Value schedule entries for Ranger devices are used
only for taking temperature measurements.
250
5. Select the sensor type that will be used to take the measurement.
• SCOUT/vbX instruments — Select the sensor type from the
Sensor dropdown field. To add a new or user-defined sensor,
click Sensors > Configure a new sensor.
NOTE: To take this new schedule entry measurement when

performing a route, tick the Record this schedule entry when
performing a Route checkbox.
• VbOnline — Click the More button beside Sensor to open

the Configure sensor window. From the new window, select a
sensor type from the Sensor Enter dropdown field beside the
channel that will be used > Select the ... option to create a new
user-defined sensor type.
• Ranger — The Sensor field will be populated automatically after
channel selection in the previous step, and cannot be adjusted.
6. Select a measurement duration from the Duration dropdown field if
taking measurements on SCOUT/vbX or vbOnline devices.
7. Click OK — The new Average Value schedule item displays in the
navigator list.
NOTE: See Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings
for more information about the 'Display this value on all charts for
this Machine' checkbox.
251
Creating an Average Value Schedule Entry
Tachometer Schedule Entry

Tachometer schedule entries are used to record a numeric RPM speed
value from a tachometer.
MORE: See 'Creating Numeric Data Schedule Entries' in your

Instrument Reference Guide.
252
Create Tachometer Schedule Entry

To create a tachometer schedule entry:
1. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Tachometer Schedule
Entry window.
• Right-click a point or location > Select New > Tachometer
Schedule Entry.
• Click the Tachometer Schedule Entry button on the
creation palette.
2. Click the More button to open the Device Channel Configuration
window.
3. Select the vbOnline or Ranger Station device from the vb Device
dropdown field.
4. Select a tachometer input from the Tach dropdown field.
5. Click OK twice — The new schedule entry will displayed in the
navigator list, with the tachometer input selected in brackets.
Tachometer schedule entries
253
Associate Process Variables with Vibration

Recordings
Numeric schedule entries can be useful tools for recording machinery
process variables, i.e. the state of various processes and components in
a mechanical system as a whole (e.g. wind turbine power output and
speed, drive temperatures, process flow rates or any number of other
measurements). When you compare process variable measurements
and vibration measurements taken at approximately the same time,
these snapshot recordings can frequently provide valuable insight into
the underlying conditions that may have resulted in a particular
vibration measurement, or vice versa. If configured appropriately, you
can use Ascent to automatically display Average Value, Keypad, SDI
(Serial Data Input) and OPC import measurements on spectrum and
waveform vibration charts in the same way.
MORE: For more information on these measurement types, see

OPC Import, Keypad Schedule Entries, Average Value Schedule
Entries, and 'Serial Data Import' your Turningpoint Instrument
Reference Guide.
Once an association between a given process variable and vibration

measurements has been configured, any spectrum or waveform charts
within the specified machine will also display the process variable
measurement taken closest to the time of the vibration measurement.
This text information displays in the top right corner of the chart window,
together with an indication of the time differential between the
acquisition of the vibration measurement and the process variable
measurement.
NOTE: If you open a multi-chart view, such as SpecStack (stacked

spectra) or a waterfall display of several measurements, the
closest process variable displayed and/or the time differential
specified in the top right corner can be updated by selecting
individual measurements in the chart panel with your mouse
cursor.
Process variable measurements taken within 24 hours of a vibration

measurement will list the time differential of the process measurements
relative to the vibration measurement in hours and minutes, or minutes
and seconds, and 'later' or 'earlier' than the vibration recording.
254
Measurements taken more than 24 hours from the vibration

measurement (but the closest measurement taken, nonetheless) will
state a difference of greater than 24 hours 'before' or 'after' the
collection of the vibration measurement.
For example, you can have an Average Value measurement named

Average Value with a value of 11.787 Volts. This may have been taken 1
hour and 38 minutes before the vibration measurement being charted.
The vibration measurement was taken at 9:28 a.m. and the Average
Value measurement was taken at 7:50 a.m. This measurement was the
closest recording taken to the spectrum measurement.
To associate an existing Average Value, Keypad, SDI or OPC schedule

entry with vibration data within a Machine:
1. Right-click an existing schedule entry in the navigator > Select Edit.
2. Tick the Display this value on all charts for this Machine checkbox.
3. Click OK.
NOTE: To associate a new schedule entry with vibration data, tick

the Display this value on all charts for this Machine checkbox
when creating the new entry.
In future, measurement data for this item will display in the top right
corner of vibration charts for the machine. To remove the association,
edit the Average Value, Keypad, SDI, or OPC process variable schedule
entry, untick the Display this value on all charts for this Machine
checkbox and save (OK).
255
Associating process variables with vibration recordings
Demodulation
Demodulation is a useful process for extracting very low amplitude, high
frequency signals associated with impulse or impact events.
Demodulation is also useful as an early warning device because it
detects bearing tones before they are visible in a normal spectrum.
The process works by passing the data through filters to eliminate high
amplitude/low frequency data, extracting the ‘envelope’ around the
remaining signal, and displaying the results in a frequency/acceleration
spectrum.
256
Demodulation Setup
The high frequency signals demodulation aims to extract are very
localized. Consequently you need to take extra care to ensure the
accelerometer is mounted correctly. You will need to ensure that the
accelerometer is:
• Mounted close to the vibration source.
• Well coupled, using either stud mounting or a very strong
magnet on bare metal. A handheld probe or stinger is not
recommended.
• Consistent between visits.
The bandwidth determines which range of frequencies the

demodulation process will use.
Access Suggested Suitable Demodulation Bandwidth

You can use Ascent to suggest a suitable demodulation bandwidth using
the machine's RPM. To access this option:
1. Right-click a machine in the navigator > Select Edit.
2. Specify a default RPM.
3. Specify any restrictions related to your instrument capabilities (as
available bandwidths vary by instrument model and age).
4. Select the Parameters tab.
5. Click the Recommend button on the Schedule Entry editor panel.
The table outlines some typical bandwidth recommendations you can

make.
NOTE: If your instrument is a vbOnline16 device, Ascent might

suggest alternative higher alues are suitable for stud-mounted
accelerometers.
257
Demod Bandwidth Recommended Speed Range
250 Hz - 10 kHz <100 RPM

500 Hz - 10 kHz 100 - 300 RPM
1 kHz - 10 kHz 300 - 1000 RPM
2 kHz - 10 kHz 1000 - 3000 RPM
4 kHz - 10 kHz >3000 RPM
Determine Appropriate Bandwidth

If a default machine speed has not been configured, Ascent will not be
able to recommend a bandwidth. You will need to manually select a
bandwidth option suitable for the application. You can use the following
procedure to determine an appropriate bandwidth:
1. Take a measurement using the following parameters:
• Domain Enter — Freq
• Quantity — Accel
• Fmax value — 20 kHz (1200 kCPM)
2. Examine the chart for a region of broadband high frequency noise
(‘haystack’).
3. Examine where the haystack starts and ends > Choose a
corresponding Hz (or kCPM) range/bandwidth.
EG: A range of 4 kHz to 20 kHz (240 to 1200) kCPM is best for the
chart below, as most unwanted low frequency noise falls below 4
kHz (240 kCPM).
It is very important that you reject all the large amplitude/low frequency
peaks. If no significant haystacks display, we recommend a standard
bandwidth of 2 kHz to 10 kHz (120 to 600) kCPM).
For low-speed machines, you can reduce the Demod bandwidth lower
limit, however ensure you keep this at least 100X running speed.
EG: For a machine that runs at 600 RPM (10 Hz), a 1-10 kHz band
should be appropriate.
258
Example haystack
Analyze Demodulation Data

The process for measuring, recording, and viewing demodulation data is
the same as for a frequency/acceleration spectrum. You can transfer the
demodulation spectra to Ascent and analyze it using the same
techniques that are available for normal spectra (e.g. trend plots, alarms,
fault frequencies, bearings, and gears).
Remember the following points when analyzing demodulation data:

• As a bearing deteriorates, the baseline noise level increases and
bearing tones develop running speed sidebands.
• In the final stages of bearing wear, the bearing tones might
become less prominent as cracks and pits become more
rounded and distributed over the race.
• A raised noise floor is often the result of a lubrication problem.
Set / Update RPMs for Multiple Recordings

There are several ways to control how RPM values are applied to
schedule entries and/or recordings. The range of affected recordings
may be restricted by date range.
You can ignore recordings with RPM values that are already set.
You can use RPM multipliers to take gearbox ratios and other point
variances into account.
MORE: See Defining the RPM of a Recording to set an individual

recording's RPM value.
259
Define RPM Value

You can apply an RPM value directly from the 1X peak of a chart or type
in a value, and then apply this to your chosen recordings. To do this, you
will need to set your RPM value using one of the methods described
below, and then follow the instructions in the next topic to apply this
value.
NOTE: Regardless of the method you use, the RPM value will not
propagate to any recordings until you choose the options where
you want it to be applied (see next topic).
1 — Using the 1X Peak

This method enables you to enter an RPM value without knowing the
running speed of your machine. When you position your cursor on the
1X peak, Ascent will calculate the running speed for you.
To set the RPM value using the 1X peak:

1. Open a chart.
2. Double-click the first big peak.
3. Press CTRL + 1 to display the value in the Set 1X RPM window and
click Apply to Machine.
4. Follow the steps provided in next topic — Apply RPM value.
2 — Manually Enter RPM Value

This method is useful if you already know the RPM value but want to
manually select a date range of recordings to apply this to.
To set the RPM value manually:

1. Select a machine/point/location/schedule entry.
2. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Set RPM window:
• Select Edit > Set Speed.
• Right-click the machine/point/location/schedule entry you
selected > Select Set Speed.
3. Enter an RPM value in the field provided.
260
3 — Manual Entry with Predetermined Date Range

This method enables you to preselect a date range over which to apply
an RPM value. This is useful where you want to use the same recording
date range on other locations at the same machine.
To set the RPM value manually with a predetermined date range:

1. Select recordings across the required date range in the navigator
list.
TIP: Use SHIFT to select multiple recordings.
2. Use EITHER of these methods to access the Set RPM window:

• Right-click the machine/point/location/schedule entry you
selected > Select Set Speed.
3. Enter an RPM value in the field provided.
261
Apply RPM Value

You can apply the RPM value to a range of recordings and schedule
entries. The RPM value will be applied to the recordings/schedule entries
you have selected on the navigator.
EG: If a single point is selected, the RPM value will only be applied
to the recordings/schedule entries at that point.
• Set RPM to — This is the RPM value that will be assigned to

schedule entries and/or recordings (or the speed if the machine
has been specified as Linear Speed).
• Apply RPM Multiplier at each Point — This will apply a point-
level RPM Multiplier to all recordings on the selected machine
points. The Point RPM Multiplier will typically be used on linear
speed machines where the rotational speed may vary between
points. You can set the RPM Multiplier by right-clicking a point
and selecting Edit, or by clicking the Edit Multipliers button on
the Set RPM panel to open the Machine Speed Utility.)
• Only apply where there is no RPM set already — This will apply
your RPM value to all recordings and/or schedule entries that do
not have an RPM value. Recordings/schedule entries with
existing RPM values will not be affected.
• Start Date/End Date — Use the drop-down box to apply the
RPM value to all recordings/schedule entries within your
specified date range.
Applying an RPM value
262
Linear Speed Support

On linear speed machines (e.g. paper machines) the rotational speed of
individual machine components differs according to the various
diameters of rollers or pulleys, much like the output of a gearbox. If you
enter these diameters into Ascent, along with the linear speed of the
machine while the recordings were taken, Ascent can calculate the
actual RPM value at each point.
Some of your measurement locations are likely to be on non-roller parts

of the machine (e.g. roll drive motors). Ascent can calculate the
appropriate RPM values for these points if you supply the ratio of the
motor RPM compared to the roll RPM. For example, if the drive motor
gearbox has a reduction ratio of 0.333 (the motor is turning 3 times
faster than the roll), enter 3 in the RPM Multiplier field.
NOTE: If the diameter for a point is not defined, the linear speed
setter will have no effect.
263
To specify the relevant data in Ascent:

1. Right-click a machine > Select Edit.
2. Select Linear speed as the speed type.
3. Click OK.
4. Right-click a point > Select Edit.
5. Enter an RPM Multiplier value.
TIP: Leave the default setting as it is if you don't want to use the
multiplier.
6. Enter the diameter of the roller or pulley.

7. Click OK.
8. Select the machine you want to set the linear speed for.
9. Use EITHER of these methods to:
• Right-click the selected machine > Select Set Speed.
10. Enter the linear speed of the machine.
MORE: See Applying the RPM Value for more information on the
various settings.
11. Click OK when you have finished selecting options.
Setting the linear speed for a recording
264
Collect RPM Value while Measuring

This option does not apply to online devices such as the vbOnline or
Ranger. If the machine RPM is available when you take a recording (e.g.
from an installed rev counter or hand held tachometer), you can enter
the RPM using the keypad on your vb instrument.
NOTE: If you are using a Ranger Station and Ranger sensor, the
Ranger Station tachometer RPM will be appended automatically to
waveform measurement values displayed in Ascent if the RPM
value is used as a criteria for the recording. See the Ranger
Reference Guide for more information on criteria and RPM
measurements.
To activate the collecting RPM feature:

1. Right-click the required machine > Select Edit.
2. Select Ask user for speed — When collecting data you will be
prompted to enter the speed value when the measurement is taken.
3. Enter a value in the Default speed field — This default value will
display on the instrument screen. Simply press ENTER on the
instrument to continue.
NOTE: The speed value entered is saved with the recording and
automatically transferred to Ascent next time you run the Receive
operation.
You can enable Ask user for speed on every schedule entry on a
machine. The instrument will not reprompt you when new
measurements are collected. Instead it instrument remembers the
speed value you last entered on that machine and automatically reuses
it for subsequent recordings. If you wish to be reprompted at a certain
part of the machine (for example after a gearbox), change the Default
RPM for those schedule entries.
MORE: See Setting/Updating RPMs for Multiple Recordings for

details on how to set the default RPM for all schedule entries on a
machine.
265
Collecting the RPM value while measuring
Baseline Recordings
A baseline recording is a vibration measurement taken on a machine
considered to be in good condition. The baseline is used as a
comparison recording with which to observe changes in vibration
patterns.
You can set a recordings as a baseline recording by right-clicking it and

selecting Set Baseline. When this recording is plotted, the label Baseline
will display at the top of the chart and in the chart legend.
The baseline overall RMS value is shown in the Parameter Set/Schedule

Entry editor's Baseline Overall RMS window. You can edit it here (see next
topic).
Display baseline value on portable SCOUT/vbSeries

instrument
Once you have taken a recording on your instrument you can display
the RMS value of the baseline recording and compare this with the
measurement you have just taken.
To display a baseline value on your instrument:

1. Select Alarms > Update Baselines in this Folder.
2. Send the folder to your instrument — The baseline RMS value
displays at the top right of the screen after a measurement is taken.
TIP: If you intend to update your baselines intermittently, you
should select Alarms > Update Baselines Before Send. Every time
you set a new recording as a baseline, this will be transferred to
your vb instrument automatically when you click Send.
266
Display last measurement's value instead of baseline value

As an alternative to using baselines, you can display the measurement
values from your last recording session.
To display the previous measurement's RMS value, select Alarms > Use
Last Measurement if no Baseline. This value will labeled as a baseline
on your instrument.
Remove baseline from instrument display

To hide a baseline from displaying on your instrument:
1. Right-click the schedule entry containing the baseline recording >
Select Edit.
2. Select the Baseline Overall RMS tab.
3. Click Clear then OK. When you next send this folder to your vb
instrument the baseline value will no longer be displayed.
Hiding a baseline from your instrument display
Use Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries

You can use the Parameter Set / Schedule Entry editor to control the
measurement parameters used by your instrument.
Edit existing schedule entry

To edit an existing schedule entry, right-click the schedule entry > Select
Edit.
267
Create new schedule entry

Use EITHER of these methods to create a new schedule entry:
• Right-click a location > Select New > Schedule Entry.
• Click the Build button to activate Build mode (click the Manual
Build Mode link if you are using the licensed Machine Builder
wizard) > Select one of the [Add Schedule Entry] placeholders.
Reminders
A parameter set defines the actual parameters that will be used to take
a recording (the measurement units, measurement domain, etc). You
can reuse these as many times as you like.
A schedule entry represents a recording that will be taken at a

measurement location. A schedule entry gets its parameters from the
parameter set assigned to it. In the editor, invalid options are highlighted
in red. If you see this, ensure you check the value you have entered.
You can use the Domain area to choose a measurement type or

combination of measurements (on instruments that support these
functions). This includes multi-measurement 6Packs, Demod spectrum
and waveform, and standard spectrum and waveform recordings.
Simultaneous multi-measurement types are only available on
SCOUT/vbX instrument models, not vbX000 instruments such as the
vb1000 or vb3000 or online devices such as the vbOnline or Ranger.
Your instrument can support a wide range of sensor types and their
corresponding measurement units.
NOTE: This depends on the version of vb firmware you are using.

Contact your local reseller or Commtest Instruments if you are
unsure.
To choose a different type of unit or define your own unit, click Other
Units.
MORE: See Keypad Schedule Entries to learn more about selecting

or creating new units.
268
You can choose from parameter sets already in use using the dropdown
field at the top of the window labeled Select Parameter Set.
NOTE: Switching between the Time, Frequency and Demodulation

domains will enable different options on the Edit Paramset /
Schedule Entry editor.
NOTE: The editor will also change depending on which instrument

you are designing the parameter set for. Newer versions of the vb
firmware have additional features that will only be visible when
that instrument is selected in the Applicable vb Instrument tab.
Tabs
You can edit the information contained in the following tabs according
to your requirements:
• Parameters tab — Set individual parameters such as the Fmax
and number of averages to use.
• Channel/Sensor — Specify a channel and/or sensor other than
the default for a particular instrument. You can click the
Sensors button to define new sensors and edit existing ones
(their sensitivity and settling times, etc). The sensor assigned to
any schedule entry must match the type of signal being
measured.
• Applicable vb Instrument tab — Choose the vb instrument
these parameters will be sent to. This enables Ascent to indicate
which settings are valid for that instrument.
• Baseline Overall RMS tab — Enter a baseline value that will
display in your instrument when this schedule entry is being
recorded. See Baseline Recordings for more information.
• FFT Options tab — Set the window type (Hanning or
Rectangular) and overlap percentage.
269
Parameter Set / Schedule Entry editor
270
Fmin
Your instrument can be instructed to ‘zero out’ frequencies in a
spectrum below a particular Hz value. This enables you to remove 'ski-
slopes' or create special measurements that exclude low frequencies
from the overall value.
The Fmin setting is available in the editor when a demodulation or

frequency domain parameter set is being edited.
NOTE: The frequency resolution of the spectrum will not be

affected by the Fmin setting. If the Fmin value is 100 Hz, the Fmax
value is 125 Hz, and the Lines setting is 400 lines, then 400 lines of
data will be taken from 0 Hz to 125 Hz. The lines corresponding to
frequencies below 100 Hz will be set to zero.
Orders-based Parameter Set

You can specify the Fmax of a frequency-based vibration measurement
in Orders instead of Hz. This means no matter what the actual running
speed of the machine is, you can specify that the measurement should
have a frequency range of 'n' orders of the running speed.
NOTE: Ascent must know the running speed of a machine to be

able to display orders.
271
Create orders-based parameter set

To create an orders-based parameter set:
2. Select Ask user for speed — You will be prompted to enter the
speed value when taking measurements.
3. Enter a value in the Default speed field — This will display on your
instrument's screen. You can simply press ENTER on your instrument
to continue.
4. Right-click a location in the navigator tree > Select New > Schedule
Entry to create a new spectrum schedule entry.
5. Select Orders instead of Hz for the Fmax units.
6. Specify the measurement lines of resolution and other
measurement values. These will vary according to the type of
measurement required.
Your instrument will select an Fmax from the normal available Fmaxes
that give at least the specified number of orders of frequency. For this
reason, the recording will display in the navigator with an Fmax value in
Hz/CPM. The range on the bottom axis will probably be slightly higher
than the requested number of orders.
For example, if you choose 20 orders and an RPM of 1100:

• The running frequency in Hz is 1100 / 60 = 18.33 Hz.
• 20 times 18.33 = 366.6.
• The smallest Fmax that will give a frequency range of 366.6 Hz
is 400 Hz.
• When plotted, the number of orders shown on the bottom axis
will actually be 400 / 18.33 = 21.8 orders.
If the tachometer is being used to trigger the measurement, the RPM will
be determined automatically.
In addition to setting frequency domain measurements in orders, you

can set demodulation domain measurements in orders, and time
domain measurements in revolutions.
272
Edit Parameter Set

The Schedule Entry and Parameter Set editors are integrated into one
screen (the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor).
You can edit a single schedule entry by changing its settings in the Edit
Paramset / Schedule Entry editor. To do this:
1. Right-click the schedule entry > Select Edit.
2. Make the required changes — If several schedule entries use the
same parameter set, you can edit these collectively by modifying
the parameter set assigned to them.
3. Select Edit > Manage > Parameter Sets — The Manager - Parameter
Set window opens, listing all parameter sets in the entire site (the
site contains all your folders, which in turn contain all your
machines).
4. Select a parameter set.
5. Click Edit to open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor —
Because you are editing the parameter set, rather than an individual
schedule entry, the options on the editor that relate to schedule
entries will be hidden. Any changes you make will be applied to all
schedule entries that use that parameter set. This includes all Child
Machines if the parameter set is currently being used by a Template
Machine in the templating system.
Editing a parameter set
273
Work with Parameter Sets/Schedule Entries on a

Single Folder, Machine, Point, or Location
You can use the P/Sets button to open the Select Parameter Sets
window. Here you can add, edit, or delete multiple schedule entries in a
single folder, machine, point, or location. To access these options:
1. Select the navigator item containing the schedule entries you wish
to work with.
2. Click the P/Sets button:
• The Usage column in the Select Parameter Sets window shows
the number of measurement locations using the parameter set.
• The Template Type column specifies whether the parameter
sets are template (master) entries. This is indicated by the prefix
[T] for template, [C] for child entries, or blank for free entries
that are not used by the templating system.
NOTE: Most entries will be blank.
3. Select a template type in the Machine Template Filter dropdown field

to filter parameter sets by template type — Only parameter sets of
the specified type will display in the parameter set list.
MORE: See the Template Machines section.
4. Click Add to All to open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor
and create a new parameter set — When you click OK, schedule
entries will be created using this parameter set. They will be added
to all the selected item's subitems.
EG: If you have a machine selected, schedule entries will be added
to all locations. If you have a point selected, schedule entries will
be added to all locations on that point.
5. Click Edit to open the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor and
adjust any parameter sets being used by the schedule entries in this
folder, machine, point, or location.
6. Select a parameter set on the Select Parameter Sets window.
274
7. Click Edit — Any changes you make to this parameter set will only be
applied to schedule entries that are subitems of the currently
selected item.
EG: On your machine structure, you might have two points and
two locations at each point (four locations in total). The schedule
entries at each location all use the same parameter set. You wish
to edit the parameters for the two drive end schedule entries but
don't want to change the parameters of the other schedule entries.
Select the point labeled Drive End. Click the P/Sets button to open
the Select Parameter Sets window. Select the parameter set (only
one will display). Click Edit to make your changes. When you click
OK, a new parameter set will be created and assigned to both
drive end schedule entries. The other two schedule entries will use
the old (unchanged) parameter set.
8. Click Remove to remove all schedule entries using this parameter

set from the selected folder, machine, point, or location — This is the
same as right-clicking individual schedule entries and selecting
Delete. Removing the parameter set does not delete it from the
database. It will still display in the Select Parameter Set dropdown
field in the Edit Paramset / Schedule Entry editor.
9. Click Modify Usage to see how many locations in this folder,
machine, etc use the selected parameter set:
a. Select a parameter set.
b. Click Modify Usage.
c. Tick the checkboxes to add or remove the parameter set from
multiple locations.
275
The bottom of the Select Parameter Sets panel contains configuration

information about the selected parameter set:
• The left column specifies the Fmin and Fmax frequencies. It also
shows the number of lines of resolution for any individually
selected spectrum parameter set.
• The right column displays the waveform measurement duration,
number of samples, and number of averages for any
individually selected waveform parameter sets.
Select parameter sets panel
Columns that are not applicable to the selected parameter sets will be
labeled N/A. All parameters will be listed as N/A if more than one
parameter set is selected from the parameter set list.
Machine structure with points and locations
276
Clean up Parameter Sets and Schedule Entries

If you have several parameter sets or schedule entries and not all of
them are being used, the Select Parameter Set dropdown field will
contain unwanted duplicate entries.
NOTE: This field displays when you create or edit a schedule entry.
You can use the schedule entry and parameter set clean-up utility to find
and remove entries that are not being used, and merge any duplicate
entries into a single item. To access this option:
1. Select Database > Utilities > Clean-up Schedule Entries and
Parameter Sets — The Clean-up Schedule Entries and Parameter
Sets window opens, containing the following options:
• Merge all duplicated parameter sets — Consolidate any
duplicate parameter sets using the same configuration in a
single parameter set.
• Remove all unused parameter sets — Delete any parameter
sets not currently used in the navigator (i.e. any parameter sets
not actively used for measurements).
• Update all schedule entry names — Update the names of your
schedule entries. This is useful if you have changed default
measurement units, or if you changed the interface language
for Ascent after creating a schedule entry.
• Merge all duplicated schedule entries — Consolidate duplicate
schedule entries at the same measurement location.
Consolidation is most likely to be successful when duplication
follows the import of folders or machines from older Ascent
databases.
2. Tick one or more checkboxes from the Clean-up Schedule Entries
and Parameter Sets window.
3. Click OK then Yes to confirm the action — The clean-up process may
take some time to complete.
277
Triaxial Measurements
Triaxial recordings are available on vb6 and vb8 portable instrument
models only. To configure a triaxial on-route recording on a vb6 or
SCOUT140/vb8 instrument:
1. Create three locations at a single point using Ascent (i.e. Horizontal,
Vertical, Axial) — Each of these locations must be set to correspond
with one of the three available triaxial sensor axes (X, Y or Z),
matching the orientation of the sensor when mounted.
2. Open Ascent.
3. Right-click a location > Select Edit.
4. Select an axis from the Triax Axis dropdown field.
5. Repeat the above steps for each of the three locations, choosing
one of the three available axes for each — When you have done this,
send the route to your instrument for data collection (see
Transferring Folders to a vbSeries Portable Instrument).
NOTE: Each of the three locations must have a unique Axis name
and triax axis. Do not assign the same axis to more than one
location.
MORE: See your Instrument Reference Guide to learn how to take a

triaxial measurement.
278
Sensor Settings
If you use more than one accelerometer for data collection, you can
store each sensor's sensitivity and settling time in Ascent. When setting
up schedule entries, you can select different sensors for taking the
measurements. To access these options:
1. Select Edit > Manage > Sensors.
2. Click Add or Edit to enter or change the details of your sensor.
NOTE: If you have specified any sensor setup details on your
instrument, you will NOT be able to transfer this data to Ascent.
NOTE: If you have set up sensors in Ascent, these will overwrite

any sensors with the same name on your instrument.
Selecting sensor settings
279
Bias Voltage Enter

You can use the Bias Voltage Enter feature as a warning system for any
errors or fault conditions (e.g. short-circuits, faulty sensors or open-
circuits). This involves comparing the actual sensor bias voltage with the
expected voltage range.
To use the Bias Voltage Enter feature:

• Click Add to add a sensor > Select the sensor type.
• Click Edit to edit an existing sensor you have selected.
3. Click the Other button beside Bias Voltage Check on the Sensor
Setup window.
NOTE: Most accelerometers have an output voltage cantered on
12 V DC. Consequently, the default bias voltage range Ascent
provides is 8 V to 16 V (4 Volts of headroom above and below the
typical output value). Ranger sensors have a narrower bias voltage
range of 3 V to 3.7 V.
NOTE: Some sensors may use a lower or higher bias voltage. If

using such a sensor, review the manufacturer's documentation
and create a new bias voltage range to suit. To create a new Bias
Voltage setting:
4. Click the Add button — The new bias value window opens.
5. Enter a name for the new bias value range entry in the Description
field.
6. Enter the required minimum bias voltage value in the Min Bias field
— This value should typically be 2-5 Volts below the anticipated
minimum output voltage used by the sensor.
7. Enter the required maximum bias voltage value in the Max Bias field
— This value should typically be 2-5 Volts above the anticipated
minimum output voltage used by the sensor.
8. Click OK to save the new entry.
NOTE: To edit an existing bias voltage record, select it from the
Bias Voltage Enter list > Click Edit.
280
Bias Voltage Enter
281
Manually Enter Vibration Data

You might already have vibration data recorded on paper or in a

spreadsheet. You can enter this into an Ascent database manually if
required. To do this:
1. Select Edit > Edit Measurements.
2. Fill in the information for the timestamp, units, x values, and sample
data.
3. Click the Create at this location button to add the measurement to
the current location:
• Timestamp — The date/time of the recording.
X units:
for waveform: secs, ms
for spectra: Hz, CPM
• X start and X stop — The range of x axis values.

• calc 1st line — Sets X start to (X stop ÷ number of samples).
• Y units — The left axis amplitude values (g, adB, mm/s, vdB SI,
mm).
• Post scaling — Spectrum only. The amplitude values (peak, RMS,
peak-peak).
• Assoc. RPM — The RPM of the recording.
• Demod — Demod spectra only. Select this option if this is a
demod recording. Enter the demod bandwidth in the two blank
fields.
• Complex Data — If checked, 'real' amplitude values must be
given followed by all the 'imaginary' values. For each frequency
bin in the spectrum there is a 'real' and an 'imaginary'
amplitude. Together these define a 2d vector. Ascent calculates
the amplitude and phase for that frequency from this vector.
NOTE: You will need to paste the amplitude values into the blank
text area on the right. The number of samples will be determined
automatically when you click Create at this location.
282
4. You can also click Load from Measurement to fill in the form using
the currently selected measurement.
5. Right-click the sample value text area to access some useful options
that enable you to manipulate your data:
• Create single column, remove text — Remove all text, leaving
only numeric values.
• Remove first column — Remove the first column of data if there
is more than one.
• Remove right columns — Remove any columns to the right,
keeping only the first.
Entering vibration data manually
283
Customize Axis Name

When you are in Build mode, you can define new axis or location names
as you create your machines. To do this:
1. Click Build to activate Build mode.
2. Click an [Add Measurement Location] placeholder > Select <other>
from the list.
3. Click OK.
4. Enter a name for this location.
5. Click OK again to assign it — This new location displays in the
dropdown field. You can assign it to other locations if required.
Defining new axis or location names as you create your machines
Edit, Add, or Delete Location Names

You can edit any location name you define (and some of the defaults).
NOTE: The first five default names in the list cannot be edited.
To edit your location names:

1. Select Edit > Manage > Axis Names.
2. Select the item you wish to add. edit, or delete.
3. Click the appropriate button.
NOTE: Ascent prevents you from accidentally deleting a location
name if it is being used by a machine.
284
Tagging
Tagging provides a way to group selected items so you can carry out
collective operations on the grouped items. You can tag any data item.
Once you have tagged items, you can carry out the following collective
operations:
• Delete — Delete all tagged items.
• Update RPMs — Change the RPM value of all tagged items.
• Export Tagged to File — Export all tagged items and their
contents to a .vb file.
• Automated Report — Run a report on all tagged items.
• Set Channel/Sensor to Default — Reset all tagged schedule
entry channel and sensor settings to default.
• Create Route — Create a route from all tagged measurement
locations.
You can access all these operations by selecting Tag > View Tagged
Items.
Tag items
You can tag items:
• Manually — Select the required items in the navigator. Press
CTRL + T. To untag, repeat the process.
• Automatically — Select Tag > Search and Tag to search the
database for data that matches specific criteria.
TIP: If you have several items to tag, it may be quicker to use the
'Search and Tag' option and then untag individual items. For
example, to add all but a few measurement locations to a route,
you could tag all locations at once and then untag the ones that
are not needed.
285
Store Reusable Components in Library

You can use EITHER of these methods to create a new machine:
• Build a new machine from reusable components
• Copy and rename existing machine
To save yourself setup time, you can store commonly used components
in the Ascent library (e.g. alarm bands and envelopes, user-defined
bearings, gears, machines, etc). You can use these components to build
new machines. Having one central storage area saves you having to
search through your folders to find the components you wish to copy.
One way to set this up is to create folders within the library to store
different types of machines, and other folders for each type of
component.
Add Item to Library

To add an item (e.g. a machine) to the library:
1. Right-click the item in the navigator > Select Library > Add Selection
to Library — The Save As window displays, showing the list of the
folders currently in your library. If you don't have any folders set up
you can create them at this time by clicking the Create New Folder
button on the top section of this window. A New Folder icon will
display in the list. Rename this to whatever you want and click away
from the folder to save this name.
2. Open the folder you wish to store your component in so it displays in
the top dropdown field.
3. Click Save.
286
Retrieve Item from Library

To reuse a component stored in the library, you need to import it. To do
this:
1. Right-click the required component in the navigator area > Select
Library > Commtest (or the folder you saved the component in).
2. Select your required template file — This will be called <name of
component>.vb.
3. Enter a name for the new component.
4. Click OK — Your new component displays in the navigator tree. Any
changes you make to this new component will not affect the
template stored in the library because this component is a copy of
the template.
NOTE: The supplied library templates use orders-based parameter
sets. Once you have imported a machine from these templates,
select the machine (or point in the case of a gearbox) > Select Edit
> Set speed. Enter the running speed of the machine. Deselect the
option Only apply where there is no RPM set already.
Edit Library
You can edit the library to delete unused templates or change the
names of template files. To do this, select Library > Edit Library. Copy,
move, or rename the library files and folders as required.
Open Entire Site

If you work with several folders and spend lots of time switching
between these, you can open the entire site. This will list all the site's
folders in the navigator tree, enabling you to access the machines within
them more quickly.
To open an entire site:

1. Click the Open button — The window displayed shows all your sites
and folders.
2. Select the site you wish to open.
3. Click OK.
4. Double-click a folder in the navigator tree to open it.
287
Expand and Collapse Folders

You can hide or show the contents of some or all folders (i.e. each
machine and its points, locations, etc):
To show or hide the full contents of a particular folder, right-click the

folder > Select Expand Branch or Collapse Branch.
To show or hide all folders in a database, right-click the top level

database folder > Select Expand Branch or Collapse Branch.
Expanding the selected folder
288
Section 8 — Transfer Data

This section explains how to transfer data to and from Ascent.
Import and Export Data

You can transfer data to and from an Ascent database using the Import
and Export functions.
You can transfer folders, machines, and individual recordings using the
Export command. Doing so creates .vbz3 files. You can attach these to
an email and use the Import command to transfer them to a PC.
When importing data, ensure you first select the location on the
navigator tree where you wish to insert the data.
EG: If you have tagged and exported a measurement location, you

will need to select a point in the navigator tree when you import it.
289
Export Data
To export the current folder to a .vbz3 file:
1. Open the folder.
2. Select File > Export Folder to File.
3. Use ONE of these methods to tag the item (e.g. machine):
• Select Tag > Tag.
• Right-click an item in the navigator list > Select Tag.
• Press CTRL + T.
4. To build a set of machine templates, select Tag > Clear Tags to
untag any existing items. Select Tag > Export Tagged to File.
5. Select File > Export Folder to File to create a .vbz3 file that contains
recordings from a specific date range.
6. Tick the top checkbox to restrict data to a specific date range.
7. Use the dropdown fields to select the start and end dates for this
range.
8. Click OK.
Exporting data
290
Import Data
To import data from a .vbz or .vb file (earlier versions of Ascent):
1. Select File > Import File.
2. Locate the .vbz file.
3. Click Open — The data is transferred into the current folder:
• Click Yes to only import new data from a .vbz file into the
existing folder — Any data you already have in your database
will not be duplicated.
• Click No to create a new folder for this data.
Import or Export to File via Command Line

You can use DOS commands to export .vbz3 files from an Ascent
database, or import .vbz3 files into an Ascent database. This command
causes Ascent to export or import data using a standard set of
instructions.
This feature is useful if you wish to:

• Automate regular importing and exporting tasks
• Transfer large amounts of data
• Import or export data from large numbers of databases and
.vbz3 files
When you save the DOS commands as a conventional Windows batch

file (.bat format), you can schedule these operations to occur at regular
intervals using the Windows scheduling system.
291
Create Batch File

A batch file is a small file containing a sequence of Windows commands
written in plain text. Once you have created the export and import
commands described in Command Line Layout, you are ready to create
a batch file.
NOTE: It is possible to run a sequence of export and import

commands in a single batch file. You may wish to export a .vbz3
file then immediately import this file into another database. You
can also export .vbz3 files from a large number of databases. To
do this, simply paste all export and import commands within the
same batch file, separating each command line with at least one
line break.
To create a batch file:

1. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Notepad.
2. Paste the export or import command line into the application.
3. Copy and paste the following text in the top of the text file: @ECHO
STARTING DATA TRANSFER — You will be notified when the export
or import action has started.
4. Copy and paste the following text to the bottom of the text file:
@ECHO FINISHED — You will be notified when the export or import
action is complete.
NOTE: Export or import commands must be composed on a single
line. If a command contains line breaks, it will not function.
5. Select File > Save As in the Notepad main menu.

6. Select All Files in the Save as type dropdown field.
7. Select a location to save the file from the Save in dropdown field.
8. Enter file name in the File name field — The file name must end with
the suffix .bat.
9. Click Save — The batch file is ready to use.
10. Double-click the batch file.
11. Right-click it > Select Open.
12. Copy and paste the batch file in its final destination folder on your
computer — This folder will also contain the log files generated by
each export or import sequence.
MORE: See Log File.
292
Text file example
Log File
During the export process, a log file is created in the folder that contains
the export and import command batch file. This log file contains:
• Details of the export and import actions performed
• Files generated (if any)
• The result of the export/import process (success or failure)
To view the log file:

1. Browse to the folder containing the batch file you created — The
folder contains a file named Ascent_vbz3_log.txt.
MORE: See Create a Batch File.
NOTE: The log file is generated during the export process. If you
have not yet run the batch file contained in the folder, no log file
will be present.
2. Double-click the file to open it in your default text editor.
Example of individual log record
The record in this image indicates that at 12 a.m. on January 1st 2000
an export process commenced (as indicated by the date at the top of
the record). During the export process the
C:\ExportTest\ASCENT_DATABASE.FDB database file was opened, and a
.vbz3 file exported to the folder C:\MyExportFolder. The name of the .vbz3
file created was ASCENT_DATABASE_Example Data[2000-01-01 12-00-
00].vbz3. The final line indicates the export process was successful.
The log file will be appended every time an export or import process is
initiated.
293
MORE: See Delete Existing Log Command in Additional Commands

to create a new log file with each sequence.
Additional Commands
In addition to the core commands specifying the export or import tasks
to be completed, the command line export feature also enables you to
perform secondary tasks. This includes deleting existing log files or .vbz3
export files that are still contained in the target export directory.
Delete Existing Log File

Enter the following text at the top of your batch file to delete previously
created log and .vbz3 file.
@echo off
@echo DELETING EXISTING VBZ3 AND LOG FILES
del "C:\vbz3ExportFolder\*.vbz3"
del "C:\FolderContainingBatchFile\*.txt"
These examples will delete all .txt format log files in the folder
C:\FolderContainingBatchFile\ and all .vbz3 format files in the folder
C:\vbz3ExportFolder\.
294
Display Error Messages During Export / Import

You can insert the following text after the primary export/import
command (i.e. at the bottom of the batch file) if you wish to view a brief
description of the most common export or import error messages you
may encounter using the export tool. These may be useful during your
initial configuration of the batch file. However, they are typically
removed once the file has been correctly configured.
if %errorlevel%==1 goto one
if %errorlevel%==2 goto two
if %errorlevel%==3 goto three
if %errorlevel%==4 goto four
if %errorlevel%==5 goto five
if %errorlevel%==6 goto six
if %errorlevel%==7 goto seven

if %errorlevel%==8 goto eight
goto end
:one
@echo database does not exist
goto end
:two
@echo failed to create output directory
goto end
295
:three
@echo input file or folder not found
goto end
:four
@echo no vbz3 files found in folder
goto end
:five
@echo import folder not found in database
goto end
:six
@echo failed to open database
goto end
:seven
@echo error querying database for version
goto end
:eight
@echo database mismatch
:end
@ECHO FINISHED
Pause
296
Export or Import Schedule Data

You can use the Windows Scheduler to run your data export or import
batch file at regular intervals. To do this:
2. Double-click Scheduled Tasks.
3. Double-click Add Scheduled Task > Click Next.
4. Click Browse to locate and select the batch file created previously (in
Create a Batch File).
5. Enter a name for your new scheduled task in the top field.
6. Use the radio buttons provided to specify the frequency at which the
file should be run > Click Next.
7. Specify a start time in the field provided — This is the time of day the
file will be run.
8. Use the Perform this task options to specify how often the task
should be completed — Every day, week days only, or a manually
specified frequency.
9. Use the Start date dropdown calendar to specify the date this
scheduled task will commence > Click Next.
10. Enter your Windows password in the field provided.
11. Re-enter your password in the Confirm password field.
12. Click Next then Finish — The batch file will be executed at the
regular intervals you have configured.
Scheduling data
297
Import or Export as XML

You can export folders and their associated routes and schedule entries
from an Ascent database as XML files. You can also export XML files
containing measurement data from a SCOUT/vbX portable instrument
that has a USB host port. Once you have exported the XML file, you can
import it into Ascent.
NOTE: SCOUT/vbX instruments with serial numbers above 40800

have a USB port. vbX000 instruments do not have a USB port.
This process provides a way to transfer data between an Ascent

database and your instrument without a direct, real-time connection.
You can also use it to generate an XML file containing a route and all
associated machines and schedule entries:
1. You email the file to an instrument operator in the field.
2. The operator imports it using their instrument's USB host port.
3. The operator collects the route as normal.
4. The operator exports the measurements in XML format using the
USB Host port and emails the file back to you.
5. You import the file into Ascent and conduct a normal measurement
or route analysis.
Export as XML
To export the current folder to a .xml file:
1. Click Send.
2. Select Export to File in the Comms Method field.
3. Tick the checkbox beside the folder(s) you wish to export.
4. Click Export.
5. Select the Save as type dropdown field > Select a file version that is
compatible with your instrument.
TIP: The easiest way to determine the suitable file version is to
check your instrument's current firmware version. You can then
select the corresponding file version that lists this firmware
version. If an incorrect file version is selected, the XML file cannot
be imported.
6. Click Save in > Locate and select the .xml file to be exported.
7. Click Save — You can now import the XML file into your instrument.
298
Import as XML
To import a .xml file exported from an instrument:
1. Click Receive.
2. Select Import from File in the Comms Method field.
3. Click the browse button to locate and select the import .xml file
(e.g. on a USB flash memory drive).
4. Click Import.
NOTE: A file exported from Ascent cannot be re-imported directly

into Ascent. The file must first be imported into an instrument, then
exported from that instrument. The file exported from your
instrument can then be imported into Ascent. Only files exported
from instruments included on your CLK license can be imported
into Ascent.
299
OPC Import
The OLE for Process Control (OPC) Import feature currently supports only
versions 2 and 3 of the OPC protocol.
MORE: Associating Process Variables with Vibration Recordings.
OPC is a series of open standards based on Microsoft OLE technology. It

is used to support the movement of real time data from process
hardware such as PLCs, DCSs, and other control devices to Human
Machine Interface (HMI) display clients.
The Ascent OPC Import function enables you to record process

parameters exported from OPC-compatible devices to an Ascent
database. Wind turbines, drives, refrigeration units, or other hardware
equipped with internal sensors and monitoring equipment that is able to
provide OPC-compatible output values can be added to the
OnlineManager's schedule of measurements, alongside standard
vibration and process measurements taken via vbOnline or Ranger
devices. This ability enables Ascent to trend values from existing data
sources. It also enables customers to use any compatible measurement
device.
You can trend and alarm these process control parameters in Ascent.
You can also use them to control the scheduling of other recordings.
In Ascent, OPC schedule entries define:

• Which OPC server to read the data from
• Which data source to record
• How to scale the raw data obtained
• Which engineering units to save data as
300
Configure Engineering Units and Scaling

To configure engineering units and scaling, you need to set up a special
'virtual sensor' in Ascent. To do this:
2. Click Add.
3. Select Standard Sensor.
4. Select Input from OPC in the Input Range and Coupling dropdown
field.
5. Enter a description for this OPC sensor in the Desc/Serial No field.
EG: Its signal type or OPC source — WTG RPM from OPC.

• Select a sensor unit from the Sensor Units dropdown field.
• Click Other if the signal type you wish to assign to the OPC
value is not listed — This opens the Units window where you can
select the unit your sensor will measure. You can also define
your own units by clicking Add and entering an abbreviation for
your new unit.
7. Enter a numeric value in the Gain field — This value specifies the
multiplier that will be applied to the raw data from the OPC input
sensor. The default value is 100, but you can choose any value,
including 1 to record a raw, unaltered, input value.
8. Enter a numeric value in the Offset field to directly alter the OPC
input following gain adjustment — The offset addition or subtraction
and gain multiplier work together to enable basic mathematical
manipulation of the OPC input value. This ability can be useful for
converting between units or adjusting output trims.
EG: To convert an OPC value of Kelvin into Fahrenheit, select a
Sensor Unit of Fahrenheit then set a gain value of 1.8 and an offset
of -459.72. 1 OPC unit (in Kelvin) x 1.8 (Gain) - 459.72 (Offset) =
Fahrenheit conversion.
9. Click OK to finish defining the sensor — You can now assign the new
sensor to an OPC schedule entry.
301
Configuring engineering units and scaling
302
Configure OPC Schedule Entry

Before you can configure an OPC schedule entry, an OPC server must be
running and available for connection. Contact your network
administrator if you require the OPC server's IP address and host server.
To create an OPC schedule entry:

1. Open the Ascent Creation Palette.
2. Use EITHER of these methods to add an OPC schedule:
• Click the Add OPC Schedule button.
• Right-click a point or location > Select New > Add OPC Schedule
Entry.
3. Enter a name for the new schedule entry in the Description field.
4. Select the OPC sensor configured above from the OPC Sensor
dropdown field — If no sensor is selected, the raw OPC values will be
stored in Ascent without scaling or engineering units.
5. Enter the IP address or host name of the OPC server host computer
in the OPC Host field — An IP address will normally come in the form
of 192.168.1.X or 172.168.1.X where X is a number between 1 and
256. The exact number sequence varies in each network situation.
Contact your network administrator if you require assistance.
6. Select an OPC server from the OPC Server dropdown field — Servers
will only be listed if the OPC Host field was correctly completed in the
previous step, enabling the AscentOPC application to successfully
connect Ascent to the OPC server.
7. Select an OPC data source from the OPC Data Source field.
8. Click OK — The schedule entry will display beside an OPC icon in the
navigator list, beneath the measurement location.
MORE: See Associating Process Variables with Vibration
Recordings for more information about the 'Display this value on
all charts for this Machine' checkbox.
9. Select the Manual Entry tab if the OPC tag entries are NOT
displayed in the Browse window — I.e. they are NOT being openly
broadcast.
303
10. Enter the tag names of the OPC data items you wish to import —
You may need to contact your IT department or access the OPC
server control panel for these details. The source you select should
correspond with the process signal output you wish to record.
MORE: See Taking Recordings Manually to learn how to perform a
simple test of the new OPC schedule entry to confirm it is working
as expected.
Once you have configured the OPC sensor and OPC schedule entry, you
can assign an appropriate interval to the schedule entry using the steps
detailed in Step 4: Configure Recording Intervals. You can also use these
recordings as criteria to control the acquisition of other recordings. For
example, you may only wish to take vibration readings when OPC
informs Ascent that the machine is running. This is explained in Criteria
and Conditional Monitoring.
Create OPC schedule entry
304
Template Machines
This feature is available with Ascent Level 3 software. It will only be
available to you if it is included as part of your license agreement. If you
wish to enable this feature, please contact [email protected] or your
distributor for more information.
The Template Machines system enables any new or existing collection of

tree items in Ascent to be marked as a Template. This template consists
of a machine and its associated point, location, and schedule entries.
You can then deploy and use this to generate or update any number of
duplicated child machines. This function is useful if your site includes
several instances of common hardware components (e.g. drive motors,
fans, or turbines).
The ability to deploy templates greatly simplifies the setup and

maintenance time required for larger site installations. You can also
modify each master template machine. This includes changing its point,
location, and schedule entry configuration. You can then simultaneously
propagate these changes to all associated child machines.
You can identify template and child machines in Ascent by their status
tags. Template machines and associated items are listed in the
navigator with a [T] label beside them. Child items are labeled with [C].
You can also change and deploy templates in the VantagePoint web
application.
NOTE: Setting and applying templates are individually licensed

features. Under normal circumstances, only a single 'master'
Ascent instance will be licensed to create and edit template
machines. All other associated instances will be allowed to apply
these template machines to update or generate child machines.
However, you will not be able to change existing template
machines or create new ones. If the Template Machines feature is
used on a single Ascent installation in a closed-loop environment,
both license capabilities should be applied to the same Ascent
installation.
305
Create Template Machine

To create a machine template:
1. Select an existing machine or configure a machine containing the
required number of points, locations, and schedule entries — You
can configure any schedule entry types. It is not necessary to assign
a vbOnline device to schedule entry recordings if you will export
then import the template file to another installation of Ascent (e.g. at
another location). This is because your instrument must be assigned
locally.
NOTE: When using the templating system, any changes you make
to a parameter set that is used by a template machine will also
affect child machines.
2. Right-click the machine name in the navigator panel > Select

Template > Set As Template.
3. Enter a template name in the field provided.
TIP: We recommend you enter a version number as part of the
template name. This will enable you to track template versions as
you make changes over time and propagate to child machines.
4. Click OK — The template is created and a confirmation message

displays. The machine name and elements listed in the navigator list
display in bold. All element names are labeled with a [T].
NOTE: The template name is used as the default name for

exported template files — See Export or Import a Template File.
You can edit the template name by right-clicking a template
machine and selecting Edit. You should update the version number
of the template whenever you edit it to ensure each version is
tracked.
Template machine with labels in bold
306
Export or Import Template File

Once you have created and configured a template machine, you can
export the template information as a vb template (.vbt) file. You can then
send this file to another copy of Ascent (e.g. via email) and import it. You
can create any number of child machines using the template file. You
can also update child machines you created previously using older
template files, with newer template files.
Export Template File

To export a vb template file:
1. Right-click a template machine in the navigator list > Select
Template > Export Template File.
2. Navigate to an appropriate location.
3. Click Save — The default file name will be the template name.
4. Click OK.
NOTE: Although it is possible to change the name and version
number of the exported file at this point, we recommend you only
update only the template name to avoid confusion. To do this,
right-click Template Machine in the navigator list > Select Edit.
When you import the .vbt file, the template name will display
regardless of the vb template file name. You can leave the .vbt
default file name untouched to ensure the template name and
exported file names match each another.
307
Import Template File

To import a vb template file:
1. Right-click the folder icon > Select Template > Import Template File.
2. Choose a vb template file (.vbt).
3. Click Open.
4. Use the Import Template window to:
• Create new child machines using a vb template file — See
Create Child Machine.
• Update existing child machines with a newer vb template file —
See Update Child Machine.
• Preview changes made to vb template files — See Preview
Template Changes.
Import Template
Create Child Machine

To create a child machine:
2. Select a vb template file (.vbt).
3. Click Open.
4. Click New Child Machine.
5. Select the folder you wish to create the new child machine in.
6. Enter a name for the child machine in the field provided.
7. Click OK.
308
Update Child Machine

To apply an updated template file to existing child machines:
2. Select a vb template file (.vbt) > Click Open.
3. Tick the checkboxes beside the required child machine(s) or click
Select Children to select all child items.
4. Click Apply — The selected child machine(s) will be updated.
Apply Machine Template to Existing Machine

You can apply an existing machine template to any existing machine in
a database. To do this:
1. Right-click the existing machine name in the navigator list > Select
Template > Import Template File.
3. Click Open.
4. Click Apply — The template machine is applied to the existing
machine. Any new points, locations, and schedule entries contained
in the template machine will be overlaid onto the existing machine.
Any points, locations, and schedule entries already contained in the
existing machine will be retained as independent, 'free' items.
In the example above, note that the 3-Gen-E point, Vertical location and
velocity spectrum schedule entry are retained as free items when the
template machine is applied. You can edit these items normally. The
template machine's Drive End point, Vertical location, and acceleration
spectrum schedule entry are added as new child items. The machine
itself is also converted to a Child of the Machine template.
Machine before Template applied
309
Machine after Template applied
Preview Template Changes

To preview template changes:
3. Click Open.
4. Select a machine to compare the new vb template against.
5. Click Preview — The Preview Report panel shows the selected
machine as it will display with the selected template applied. New
items that will be added to the machine by the new template file are
listed with an [Add] tag. Items that will not change name in the new
template machine file configuration are listed as [Matched]
(although the included schedule entries may have been modified).
NOTE: If the vb template file is applied to a child machine with
independently created points, locations or schedule entries, these
will be tagged as [Free]. These items will be left untouched if the vb
template file is applied. Applying a vb template does not delete or
change 'Free' category items.
Previewing template changes
310
Change Template Name

To change a template name:
1. Right-click a machine in the navigator list > Select Edit.
2. Enter a new template name in the field provided.
3. Click OK.
Release Child or Template Machine

To release a child or template machine:
1. Right-click a child or template machine.
TIP: You can identify child machines by their [C] tag and template
machines by their [T] tag.
2. Select Template > Free Template — The machine is released and

converted to a free item.
MORE: See Apply a Machine Template to an Existing Machine to
learn how to reapply a vb template file.
311
Audit Template Database

The template system provides an efficient mechanism for ensuring
machine setups used in the field conform to existing corporate
standards. You can use the Structure report in Ascent to quickly and
easily confirm which template is applied to each machine and the
version number of that template.
To confirm the template status of your child machines:

1. Select a folder containing child machines in the navigator list.
2. Select Report > Structure Report.
NOTE: Depending on the folder size, the report might take some
time to open.
3. Right-click the structure report > Select Setup Report.

4. Select Machines in the Structure Detail dropdown field.
5. Select the Click here to continue button — The structure report is
updated. It lists all machines in the folder, together with their
associated template versions and status (child or template).
TIP: If child machines display with an inappropriate or incorrect
template version, simply apply or reapply the correct template
version as detailed in Update Child Machine.
NOTE: It is critical that you update template names consistently

with appropriate version numbers whenever you modify a
template. To do this, right-click the template machine in the
navigator, select Edit > Update the Template Name field. The
Structure report will only reflect the current template name. If this
name is not updated to accurately reflect changes to the template,
the Structure report might become misleading over time.
Example Template Structure report
312
GMT Handling and Time Zones

If you take recordings in a time zone different to that of your local PC,
the GMT offset will be shown in brackets beside the recording in the
navigator.
Recording with GMT offset
All recordings are internally stored in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The
local time offset is also stored with each recording. This value is used to
show the correct date or time for a recording in the local time of the
instrument that recorded it.
Edit Local Time Offset for Recording

To change the local time offset for a recording:
1. Right-click the recording in the navigator > Select Edit.
2. Change the GMT offset in the top right of the window.
Edit GMT Time Offset for vbOnline or Ranger

To adjust your instrument's time zone setting:
2. Select the required vbOnline or Ranger instrument using EITHER of
these methods:
• Double-click the instrument.
• Select the instrument > Click Configure.
3. Ensure the Properties tab is selected.
4. Enter a GMT offset in the Time Zone field — This will be used for
recordings received from this online instrument. The default setting
is Same as PC, which means the system time zone will be used.
313
Edit Windows System Time Zone

You can change the Windows system time zone by double-clicking the
clock in the bottom-right of the Windows taskbar and selecting the Time
Zone tab.
Configure vbX000 Instrument

Communication
This topic applies only to vbX000 instruments such as the vb3000 and
vb2000 analyzers.
If Ascent cannot detect your instrument when you click Send or Receive,
you can change the COM port being used. To do this:
1. Select Options > Configure VB Comms.
2. Select the COM port from the drop-down box or click Find to let
Ascent automatically detect this for you.
Changing the COM port
314
Connect Instrument via Serial COMs

To connect your instrument via serial COMs:
1. Connect your vbX000 instrument to your computer using a serial
cable.
2. Click Find — Ascent starts scanning your computer's COM ports. If
an instrument is found it will be connected automatically and the
window will close. If an instrument is NOT found, Ascent will
continue scanning ports until you click Close or Cancel.
3. Select a serial port manually:
a. Select the Serial Port dropdown field on the VB Communications
window.
b. Select the port your instrument is connected to.
c. Click Test.
Connecting a vbX000 using serial COMs
Reduce Settling Time

When you select Send schedule entries in an order which optimizes
settling time, Ascent will reorder the schedule entries when sending a
folder to your instrument. This ensures measurements at the same
location are taken in the most efficient order (e.g. acceleration
measurements, then velocity, then displacement, which has the longest
settling time). Reordering measurements will reduce your data collection
time.
To reduce settling time, select Options > Configure VB Comms > Tick the
appropriate checkbox.
315
CPU Intensive Comms

When you enable CPU Intensive Comms mode, your PC will use 100%
CPU time while communicating with your instrument. If you are using a
laptop and want to reduce keep battery consumption, you can disable
this option. It will make a difference of 0-10% of the download times,
depending on the speed of your PC. If Rush Data is activated, this option
will not make much difference.
Rush Data
This option is available with vbX000 firmware 2.15 and higher.
When Rush Data mode is enabled, your PC will try to download data
from your instrument in larger chunks. This will make the download time
about three times faster compared to when Rush Data is NOT activated.
If the serial communications line is prone to errors, Rush Data might

slow down significantly. If this happens, simply deactivate Rush Data.
Synchronize Instrument and PC Date and Time

There might be a difference between the date or time on your PC and vb
instrument. This is likely if you are receiving recordings that were taken
in a different country or time zone. You can synchronize the time clock
on your instrument and PC. To do this, you set your instrument's clock to
update automatically each time you click Send or Receive.
To activate this option:

1. Select Options > Configure VB Comms.
2. Select Synchronize VB Date and Time with the PC — Once
activated this feature remains switched on.
316
Troubleshoot vbX Network

Communications
This topic applies only to SCOUT/vbX series instruments such as the vb7
and vb8 analyzers. It does NOT apply to vbX000 instruments such as the
vb3000 analyzer.
Check Firewall Settings

Before changing your network configuration, ensure a firewall is not
responsible for your communication difficulty. To check this:
1. Temporarily disable any active firewalls (e.g. Windows Firewall).
2. Check that the masvb32.exe file has permission to access your
network (i.e. it has an 'exception' rule applied to it, if using a firewall).
317
Change Ethernet Network Address

SCOUT/vbX series instruments and Ascent use a default network
address to communicate. You should not need to change this address
unless the default network settings conflict with your current network
settings. You can check for a conflict by observing whether other
network connections are lost while your instrument is connected to your
computer, and restored when you unplug your instrument. To fix this
problem, you can change the network settings in Ascent and your
instrument.
NOTE: Your changes will only take effect once your instrument
hardware is reset.
NOTE: If you change the network address you must change it in

your instrument and software to ensure they can communicate.
This does not apply if you are only changing the last digit of the IP
address).
1. Switch on your instrument.

2. Plug it into the network using an Ethernet cable.
3. Open Ascent.
5. Select your instrument.
6. Click Configure.
7. Select the Setup tab.
8. Enter a new IP address In the Ethernet field.
NOTE: If this field is unavailable, untick the Obtain an IP address
automatically via DHCP checkbox.
9. Click Apply — You will be informed that the IP address has changed.
The instrument screen will prompt you to reset your instrument.
10. Press + to reset.
11. Click OK twice.
12. Click Close to close the Ascent windows.
318
Section 9 — Manage Data Storage Effectively
Section 9 — Manage Data Storage

Effectively
Once you have set up a program for collecting and storing machine
information you will be able to store thousands of recordings in your
Ascent database. However, if your database becomes very large, it will
eventually slow down data retrieval and display in Ascent.
Although it is important to collect enough historical data to be able to

trend a machine's condition over time, you do not need to keep every
recording ever taken on each machine.
To reduce the size of your Ascent database you will need to reduce the
number of recordings stored in it. There are several approaches you can
take to do this:
• Periodically thin your database by deleting old recordings (e.g.
those that are more than a year old).
• Back up your database regularly (every few months) and store
these old recordings separately on your hard drive or a CD-
ROM. Once you have done this you can delete all recordings
from the active copy of your database. If you use the Data
Thinning function in Ascent, you can selectively delete all
recordings, except for baselines.
MORE: See Data Thinning for more information.
• Use the Ascent database optimization tools to compact the

database and reclaim lost space. This will help speed up Ascent.
MORE: See Database Optimization to learn more about backing up
your database and using the database optimization tools.
319
Data Optimization (Thinning)

You can use data optimization/thinning to thin out your recordings by
removing unneeded historical data. This can significantly reduce the size
of your database, thereby improving the speed of data retrieval and
display. A thinned database will also take up less room on your hard
drive.
NOTE: Databases must be compacted as part of the optimization

process before hard drive space will be reclaimed.
You can use the data thinning feature to keep different numbers of
recordings for different time periods. For example, you might want to
keep most new recordings but only a few recordings from 6 months ago
and even fewer recordings from 1 year ago. You can also create a
backup file before the thinning process takes place. You can use the
backup file to restore the deleted data in the event of any accidental
deletions.
NOTE: If you are using a vbOnline device rather than a vb portable,

you can configure the OnlineManager program to regularly run the
thinning process automatically. See the vbOnline Reference Guide
for more information.
320
Data thinning enables you to selectively remove recordings from a

database, site, folder, individual machines, points, locations, or schedule
entries. To execute data thinning:
1. Select a level in the navigator from which you wish to remove
recordings.
EG: Select the entire folder or an individual machine or location).
2. Select Database > Data Optimization.

3. Select the required data optimization option:
• OPTION 1: Backup database before thinning — This will create
a backup file or a complete copy of the database before it is
thinned. This enables you to recover data at a later stage if
recordings are accidentally deleted. Use the browse button
to navigate to the backup folder and save the backup or
database file.
• OPTION 2: Selectively thin old recording data — This option will
thin recordings that are older than an age you specify in days,
weeks, months, or years. It will only keep a selected number of
recordings for the specified interval.
EG: "For recordings older than 6 months, keep one recording per
12 hours".
4. Use the radio buttons to select the data you wish to apply the
setting to (entire database, site, folder, or navigation list item).
5. Choose the number of recordings you want to keep over a specified
period — Use the drop-down boxes and enter numbers in the blank
fields to complete the sentence, For recordings older than X
days/months keep one recording per X minutes/hours.
EG: "For recordings older than 2 days, keep one recording per 6
hours".
6. Click Add Row to specify additional periods — Any additional rows

must have a time defined further in the past than the preceding
rows.
NOTE: Selecting Add Row or Delete Row will always add or delete
the bottom row.
321
7. Tick EITHER of these checkboxes:

• Keep baseline recordings to keep all baseline recordings.
• Keep recordings with notes or remarks to only keep
recordings that have notes or remarks associated with them.
8. Click Preview to see the specific schedule entries and number of
recordings that will be deleted, and the total number of recordings
that exist for that schedule entry.
9. Click Close.
10. Adjust your thinning criteria (if necessary).
• OPTION 3: Compact database — This process will compact
then restore the database following the thinning process. This
recovers space on your hard drive if recordings have been
deleted during the thinning process. If a database is thinned but
not compacted, it will remain approximately the same size even
though recordings have been deleted.
11. Click Run when you have finished selecting which of the three data
optimization actions you wish to perform and have configured them
according to your requirements — A confirmation window will
display, confirming the actions to be carried out:
• Database Connections specifies any other processes on your
computer that are connected to the database being optimized.
If no connections are found you can proceed safely. If other
processes on your computer or network are connected to the
database (e.g. OnlineManager or other instances of Ascent), you
should shut down these processes before optimization begins.
When you have disconnected all external processes, click
Refresh to confirm that all process connections have been
terminated.
• Backup indicates whether a database backup will be created
before database thinning starts, and the location at which it will
be saved.
• Thinning indicates what data will be thinned (database, site,
folder), whether recordings with baselines and notes will be
thinned, and the specified thinning parameters.
NOTE: If you make a mistake you can select Database > Restore >
Restore from Backup to restore the data using the backup file if
this option was selected.
NOTE: If the thinning options you selected have not been

previewed, this will be indicated at the bottom of the panel. We
recommend previewing all thinning actions before they are
performed to prevent the accidental loss of recording data.
322
NOTE: If a recording that has a corresponding multi-channel

recording is marked to be kept, these recordings will be retained.
This does not guarantee preservation of orbit plots. These may
only contain an x axis or a y axis after thinning.
12. Click Proceed to start the database optimization process — This may
take some time for larger databases. When the process is complete,
you will be asked whether you wish to view the event log of the
actions that have just been carried out.
13. Click Yes to view the log or No to close and finish.
NOTE: If you selected the 'Compact database' option, the database

will automatically close when the compacting process is complete
(sequential backup and restore). You will need to select Open to
reopen the database.
Preparing to thin your database
323
Option 2 — Selectively thin old recording data
Option 3 — Compacting a database
324
Database Optimization Event Logs

Whenever you optimize a database using the Database Optimization
panel (data is backed up and/or thinned and/or compacted) the actions
carried out are stored in a log file. You can access this logging
information by selecting Database > View Event Logs — This opens the
Event Log Viewer panel.
The left column lists:

• The start of the database action (typically DBOptimization for
database optimization)
• Exception if the action failed
• The date and time the action began and finished
• Whether the action was successful — The icon to the left of the
log entries indicates the type of log file it is:
• The blue icon indicates the log is stored in the Ascent
database and as a text file in the folder location specified at
the bottom left of the window.
• The white icon indicates the log is only stored as a text
file in the folder location specified at the bottom left of the
window, and not in the Ascent database. Typically this is
because the log was deleted from the database at some
point. To fully delete a log, it must be removed from the
Ascent database and the log text file must be deleted.
Selecting any log entry in the left column will display the full log details in
the right panel. This includes the results of each individual optimization
stage (backing up, thinning, compacting) as well as the new database
size (if compacted) and the total process running time.
To select a different folder location for the log text files, click the browse
button.
To open the selected folder and view the log text files, click the Open
Folder button.
To copy the text contents of the expanded log file (displayed in the right
half of the panel), click the Copy to Clipboard button.
325
NOTE: You can manually delete individual log entries by selecting

them from the log list on the left, pressing Delete, then confirming
the action.
Data optimization event logs
326
Back up Database
A backup of your database provides a known good point to revert back
to in case your database ever becomes corrupt.
TIP: Ensure you back up your Ascent and Machine Assessment

report databases regularly to avoid the risk of data loss.
MORE: See Machine Assessment Report.
Select Database > Backup Now! to back up a database.
NOTE: This action will immediately create a backup of the Ascent

database. The Machine Assessment Report database will NOT be
backed up unless you have previously configured the backup
system to do this. The configuration steps required to back up both
databases is described in Configuring Database Associations.
Backup files are automatically named with the date and time the backup
was performed. This includes the name of the database that the backup
file was taken from. Machine Assessment Report backup files use the
same naming convention, but are appended with the text _Report. They
are stored in .gbak format rather than the .backup format used for
Ascent databases.
NOTE: We recommend you save copies of your backup files to a

network server or CD-ROM, in case of computer hard disk failure.
327
Automatic Periodic Backups

You can use the Backup Options window to set options for creating and
deleting backup files automatically, and for restoring a database from a
backup file. To access these options:
1. Select Database > Backup Options. to open the Backup Options
window.
2. Select a compression method in the dropdown field.
3. Select any other options as required.
NOTE: Setting the 'Days without backup before reminder is
displayed' option to a value less than two and enabling the 'Start
automatically' option will cause backups to be taken every 15
minutes when Ascent is idle. This is not recommended.
4. Select the Ascent Files tab.

5. Click Backup Now! if you want to back up the database
immediately.
6. Click OK when you are finished.
Backing up a database
328
Change Backup Directory

By default, backup files are stored in a folder named Backup in the
directory Ascent was installed into. To change the location:
1. Select Database > Backup Options — The backup directory location
is listed at the bottom of the window.
2. Use EITHER of these methods to specify the new location:
• Enter your new path in the Backup Directory field.
• Click Browse > Navigate to the location where you would like
your backups stored.
Back up Files to Shared Network Folder

To specify a shared network folder for backups:
1. Follow the instructions in the previous topic for changing the backup
folder.
2. Enter the network path using the following format:
\\ServerName\share_name\file_path
329
Archive Large Database

As your Ascent database increases with the addition of new recordings,
it may cause Ascent to slow and eventually become unwieldy. Your
routine vibration analysis tasks may take longer to complete. To
minimize this effect, you may need to pro-actively reduce the size of
your database.
The easiest way to reduce the size of your database is to delete older
recordings you no longer require. You can use the Database
Optimization tool to do this.
If you wish to retain data you use only occasionally, you can create a
backup archive database. Once you have created an archive database,
you can import any old data you wish to file away from the source
database. You can then regularly update the archive database with the
newer data being acquired in the source database. You can then purge
older data from the source database to reduce its size and increase the
speed of Ascent operations.
To ensure your source database retains a manageable size:

1. Ensure you regularly export newly collected data from the source
database.
2. Add it to the archive database.
3. Thin the source database.
4. Perform a backup and restore sequence to compact the database —
This will ensure that while the archive database continues to
increase in size, the source database remains only as large as
absolutely necessary.
TIP: We recommend you perform this archiving and thinning
process at least once every month. Depending on your rate of data
collection, it might be best to do this once a week.
330
Create Archive Database

To create an archive database:
1. Close Ascent.
2. Open Windows Explorer.
3. Navigate to the Firebird database containing the data you wish to
archive.
TIP: Typically this database will be located at C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Documents or C:\Program
Files\Commtest\Ascent. For computers running the Windows Vista,
Server 2008 or 7 operating systems the database will be stored by
default in C:\Users\Public\Documents.
4. Right-click the database file (.fdb extension) > Select Copy.

5. Right-click the folder containing the database > Select Paste — A
copy of the database will be created within the folder.
6. Right-click the new database copy in Windows Explorer and rename
it, adding archive to its title.
331
Thin Source Database

Before thinning the source database, ensure the newly created archive
database is intact and contains all required measurement information.
IMPORTANT! You should only thin the source database when you
are certain this data is present. If the database does not contain
this information, repeat the archive creation process.
To thin the source database:

1. Start Ascent.
2. Open the source database.
NOTE: This is the original database, NOT the archive copy created
in Create and Archive Database.
3. Select File > Database > Database Optimization.

4. Tick the Selectively thin old recording data checkbox.
5. Tick the Compact database checkbox.
6. Select the data you wish to remove from your source database
using the options listed beside Selectively thin old recording data:
• Specify the data to be thinned (the entire database, site, folder
or navigator selection).
• Specify the recording types by classification (baseline
recordings, recordings with notes attached, and number
required per hour/day/month/year etc.).
• Specify the age.
7. Click Preview to verify you wish to remove the selected recordings.
8. Click Run when you have selected the correct recordings.
9. Ensure the thinning options displayed are correct in the
confirmation window that displays.
10. Click Proceed — The database is thinned. I.e., the data you have
specified as unnecessary is removed.
11. Click Yes if you wish to view the event log of the thinning process or
No to exit — The database will now contain only the remaining data
that was specified during the thinning process. It may be
significantly smaller than the original database, allowing Ascent to
perform analysis tasks more efficiently.
NOTE: See Data Thinning for more information on this process.
12. Click Save & Close.
332
Thinning the source database
333
Export Data from Source to Archive Database

We recommend you perform the following process regularly (typically
weekly). This should ensure your newly thinned source database does
not get too big. No data should be lost during this process. Exported
data should merely move from one database to another. This archive
data is not deleted and can be viewed at any time in Ascent.
To open the source database containing the data you wish to archive:
1. Open Ascent.
2. Click Open.
3. Select your source database from the first Database dropdown field.
4. Click OK — The database opens in Ascent.
5. Select File > Export Folder to File.
6. Tick the Only export measurements/notes made between the
following dates checkbox.
7. Select the Start Date dropdown field — The calendar interface
opens.
8. Use the left and right arrows to select the date you last exported
data to your archive.
NOTE: If this is the first time you have exported data to the archive,
choose the initial creation date of the archive database. The End
Date will list today's date. You do not need to change this.
9. Click OK — The Ascent Export window opens.

10. Enter a name for your .vbz3 export file in the File Name field.
11. Navigate to the location where you wish to save the file (e.g. your
desktop).
12. Click Save — The .vbz3 format export file is generated.
334
Exporting data from the source database to the archive database
335
Import Data to Archive Database

To import data to the archive database:
1. Select Open.
2. Click the Change button — The Select Database window opens.
3. Click the Browse button — The Open Database window opens.
4. Select your archive database.
5. Click Open.
6. Select a folder or site name in the Open window.
7. Click OK.
8. Select File > Import File — The Ascent Import window opens.
9. Select the .vbz3 export file created previously (as described in Export
Data From Source Database).
10. Click Open — A message displays asking if you wish to update the
currently selected folder with data contained in the export file.
11. Click Yes — The data will be imported. Any new data will be added to
the archive database.
12. Ensure the archive database contains the specified measurement
information.
13. Thin the Source Database once you are sure the data has been
imported successfully,
IMPORTANT! If the archive database does NOT contain the newly
exported data required, do NOT thin the source database. Simply
repeat the export and import processes detailed in the previous
topics.
Import data to archive database
336
Restore Ascent or Machine Assessment

Report Database
If your computer's hard disk fails or your database becomes corrupt, you
will need to select your latest backup file and restore the Ascent
database. You will also need to restore the Machine Assessment Report
database, if you are using this.
Restore Ascent Database

Use EITHER of these methods to restore your Ascent database:
• Select Database > Restore > Restore from Backup:
a. Click Browse to navigate to a particular backup file.
b. Click Open.
c. Click Next.
d. Ensure the backup file chosen is correct.
e. Click Finish — The restore process starts.
• Select Database > Restore > Restore from Factory Default to
create a new factory default database.
NOTE: The backup will overwrite your active Ascent database. Any
recordings you have been taken since the last backup will not be in
this file and will therefore be lost.
Restoring an Ascent database
337
Restore Machine Assessment Report Database

To restore a machine assessment report database:
1. Select Database > Restore > Restore Report — An message warns
you that restoring a Machine Assessment Report database will erase
all data in the database you currently have open and that the
Ascent database must be no older than the Reporting database you
are restoring.
2. Click Yes to continue.
3. Navigate to a specific backup file (.gbak format).
4. Click Open — The restore process begins. When this is complete,
review the process text to confirm the process was successful and
without errors.
5. Click Close.
6. Select View > Advanced Reporting Editor to reopen the Machine
Assessment report editor.
NOTE: The backup will overwrite your active Machine Assessment
Report database. Any reports that have been created since the last
backup will not be in this file and will therefore be lost.
Database Optimization
The database engine Ascent uses stores the entire database as a
database file (.gdb or .fdb). This section describes how to ensure the
database file is being used efficiently.
338
Where to Store Database Files

The database file must be stored on a hard disk of the computer running
the database server. If you are running Windows XP and Vista, there is a
feature called System Restore that will track changes to your system
setup by monitoring changes to files that are not stored in document
folders. If the database file is not stored in a document folder, System
Restore will log all changes to that file, causing the software to slow
down during database access.
NOTE: A document folder is any folder that belongs to the

Documents and Settings folder on the hard disk. Any other folder,
such as a folder in the Program Files folder, will be subject to
System Restore.
To get around the System Restore problem, save your database file (.gdb
or .fdb) in a folder within the My Documents folder, rather than in
Program Files.
Relocate Database
You can use the following steps to relocate the database for optimal
performance:
1. Start Ascent.
2. Back up the database.
3. Select Database > Create Database > Create from Backup.
4. Click Browse > Locate and select the backup file you wish to restore
from.
NOTE: Ensure you use the newest backup file.
5. Click Next.
6. Click Browse > Locate and select your My Documents folder >
Name and save the database here.
7. Select the dropdown field at the top of the screen to navigate to My
Documents.
8. Click Next.
9. Ensure the file paths specified are correct.
10. Click Finish — The original database file remains in the same
location. You can delete it if required.
339
Reduce Database Size

You can back up and restore a database to help reduce the size of the
database and increase its speed. When you do this, unused space in the
database file is reclaimed and the data is defragmented.
To reduce the size of a database:

1. Select Database > Backup Now! to create a backup of the
database.
2. Select Database > Create Database > Create from Backup to
create a new database.
3. Select the backup file you created before.
4. Save your backup file to replace the existing database.
Rebuild Database
Rebuilding a database reindexes the tables and reorders items. This
makes it easier to access a database. Once several records have been
added or deleted from the database, you can rebuild the database
indexes to achieve a slight improvement in database speed.
To rebuild a database, select Database > Rebuild Database.
340
Section 10 — Handle Large Amounts of Data with Views
Section 10 — Handle Large Amounts of

Data with Views
This section explains the best ways to view large amounts of data.
Walkthrough — Create your own Views

You can create your own customized views to display data in any
combination of ways. For example, you can create a view that plots a
stacked chart of the last four velocity spectra on the left of the screen,
and a trend of the last 50 overall RMS measurements on the right of the
screen. You can specify whether you want alarms, notes, and chart
remarks visible on your custom view and set axes to use the units of
your choice. You can also specify a target to apply your custom view to.
For example, you might wish to plot data from an entire machine or
individual points, locations, etc on a selected machine.
NOTE: If you have any trouble creating a specific view for your
needs, please contact [email protected] with details of the kind
of view you are trying to build.
To create a custom view:

1. Create an empty view.
2. Split the screen into segments to create a layout for the view (if
required).
3. Add components to the view (e.g. a report or chart).
4. Set a target for the view (if required) so you can apply it to a
particular navigator item — The default target for a view is the
schedule entry. You can change this to have your view applied at
the machine, point, or location level.
5. Further customize the view (if required):
• Include or exclude details such as notes.
• Restrict the amount or type of data displayed — E.g.: You can set
the number of recordings to plot and only display velocity data.
TIP: Another good way to create a custom view is to start with a
view that already exists. You can then select View > Save View As
> Enter a new name for the view, and build on it from there. This
technique is explained in Saving Changes to a View.
341
EG: Set up combined Waterfall and Trend View

You can design as many views as you want. The following walkthrough
guides you through setting up a combined Waterfall and Trend view. The
waterfall chart will plot the last 6 recordings only. The trend chart will
plot all available recordings. When this task is complete, we will explore
some of the more detailed features that can be included in a view.
To design a combined Waterfall and Trend view:

1. Open a folder containing some recordings so you will have some
data to plot as you create the view.
2. Select View > Create new View.
3. Enter the title WaterfallTrend for the new view.
4. Click OK — The title you entered is also used by default as the file
name (WaterfallTrend.av) for this view in the Autoview folder. You
now have an empty view (blank chart or report) that is ready to
accept components. The Select Auto View Component window
opens in the middle of the screen.
NOTE: The components shown in this window might differ from
those on your PC. Ascent only displays the features you are
licensed to use.
NOTE: The Select Auto View Component window contains all the
basic components for building your views. You can select an item
to display a description of it in the right pane of the window. You
can select some components now and read their descriptions so
you can learn more about what can be displayed in a view.
342
5. Choose Splitter from the Select Auto View Component window to

add a splitter to the view so you can split the screen into two parts.
6. Click OK — The Click here to add a component to this splitter label
displays in the middle of the screen. You can now choose to split the
screen top to bottom or left to right.
7. Right-click the chart > Select Layout Top-Bottom — This will split the
screen into two halves so you can add your trend and waterfall
charts.
NOTE: The split will only be visible when you add a component.
8. Right-click anywhere in the empty view > Select Set Top Component
to add your first chart to the view.
9. Select Trend under Vibration Views on the Select Auto View
Component window.
10. Click OK — You will see a trend chart at the top of your view.
NOTE: The trend chart is empty because you haven't yet selected
any data to plot. You can test your view by single-clicking a
schedule entry. Double-clicking the schedule entry will plot the
latest recording.
11. Click the empty bottom half of the screen to open the Select Auto
View Component window and add the waterfall chart to your view.
12. Choose Spectrum.
13. Click OK.
343
14. Modify the spectrum to turn it into a waterfall chart:

a. Right-click the empty spectrum > Select Chart Display >
Waterfall.
b. Right-click the empty spectrum again > Select Set plot
limit.
c. Enter 6 as the value to restrict the waterfall chart to
displaying only 6 recordings.
d. Click OK.
e. Right-click the empty spectrum to test your view again >
Select Waterfall Trend (Parent) > Update — Your view
should look something like this:
344
15. Select View > Save to save your view now that you know it is
working correctly.
16. Add your new view to the Report or Chart button list.
TIP: Because your view is a chart, it would be better to place it
under the Chart button.
17. Select View > Category > Charts to move your view to the Chart
button list.
18. Select View > Save.
19. Click the Chart button — You will see your view listed here.
345
Edit Custom View

Once you have created a custom view, you can edit it as required:
• Resize view — Press F11 to make the view fill the entire screen.
Press F11 again to resize the view.
• Rename view — Open the view by selecting it from the Chart
dropdown field > Select View > Save View As, and enter a new
name.
• Move view — To move a view between the Report or Chart lists,
open the view > Select View > Category > Make the appropriate
selection > Select View > Save to save the view in this location.
• Delete custom view — Open the custom view you have created
> Select View > Delete.
346
Define AutoView Components

The Ascent AutoView components are all fully customizable. Once you
have added one to your view, you can right-click it to select the required
options and make the required adjustments.
The next few topics take a closer look at AutoView components,

explaining what they are and how you can customize them.
Selecting AutoView components
347
Building Blocks
Building blocks are used to divide your screen into sections so you can
place display components in the required positions. For example, you
might want to display components side by side or stacked on top of
each other:
• Panel — May contain any number of other components
(including more panels). You can use panels to help arrange the
AutoView components. To do this, you divide the panels into
sections using a splitter.
• Splitter — Contains up to two components side by side, or one
on top of the other.
• Selector — Provides a dropdown field for selecting a target
navigator item. For example, you might want to select a
machine, location, or schedule entry. You can also use the
selector as a filtering mechanism to restrict the data displayed.
You can filter the data by:
• Axis — E.g. only show recordings taken on the horizontal
axis.
• Measurement type — E.g. only show recordings taken in
acceleration.
• Domain — E.g. only show demodulation recordings.
348
Vibration Views
Vibration views are the normal vibration charts such as spectra and
waveforms. Once you have added a vibration view, you can further
customize it by setting plot limits, choosing a chart mode (stacked,
waterfall), or adjusting the axes:
• Spectrum — Displays the most recent spectra from the selected
schedule entry.
• Waveform — Displays the most recent waveform from the
selected schedule entry.
• Trend — Displays a trends of overall values, alarm levels,
numeric data, and more. You can select the data that displays.
To do this, right-click the chart > Select Data Enters as the data
type.
• Spectrum/Waveform — Displays spectra from the selected
schedule entry in the navigator. If no spectra are found, it
display waveforms. For optimal performance, use the
Waveform or Spectrum component where possible, instead of
this general purpose component.
349
Reports
This option is provided for advanced SQL users only. This is a completely
configurable HTML report based on SQL queries on the database. To
create the SQL report right-click the blank report > Select Edit Report
Definition.
NOTE: Displays machine, point, location, and measurement notes

applicable to the current selection, looking back a maximum
specified number of days. To set the number of days, right-click the
report and enter the required number of days into the message.
• Balancing Report — Displays the latest balancing report for the

selected machine.
• Text Based Trend — Displays a table of trend values e.g. alarm
band levels, spectrum overalls etc. This report has a similar
structure to the Last 8 Measurements report.
• Exception Report — Displays a summary of alarms at each
machine.
Analysis
Frequency Based Waveform Analysis — A two-section chart used to
analyze waveforms. The chart displays a time waveform in the lower half
and plots a spectrum of this recording in the upper half. You can drag a
range of frequencies in the spectrum to filter out the frequencies in the
waveform and display the filtered waveform below.
Partial Waveform Analysis — A two-section chart that lets you select a

portion of a time waveform and convert it to a spectrum. The chart
displays a time waveform in the upper half and plots a spectrum of this
recording in the lower half. You can drag a range of samples to show the
spectrum of that section in the bottom chart.
350
Further Customize your View

You can fully customize the display components of a chart or report in
the same way as a regular chart or report. For example, you can:
• Set the axis units on the chart.
• Display a stacked or waterfall chart.
• Make the alarm bands and envelopes visible.
• Display baseline RMS values.
MORE: Several of the available shortcut menu options are

explained in Using Charts.
Shortcut menus are context-sensitive. This means when you right-click

an item, the shortcut menu displays commands that apply to that item.
You can right-click a chart in a view to open the main chart display
menu. If you right-click a special part of a chart, (e.g. as an alarm band),
this will open a submenu containing commands specific to alarm bands.
All context-sensitive menus have an option named Other which you can
use to access the main chart display menu.
351
Assign Keyboard Shortcuts

There are keyboard shortcuts for some of the default views. For
example, you can press F7 to open the SpecTrend view.
TIP: Click the Chart button to see the list of views and their
assigned shortcuts.
You can assign keyboard shortcuts to your own views. This enables you
to access these from the Chart button and your keyboard.
To assign a keyboard shortcut to a custom view you have set up:
1. Open your custom view.
2. Select View > Set Shortcut — This opens the Select Shortcut window
which contains a list of available key combinations you can assign
to your view.
3. Select a keyboard shortcut from the dropdown field.
4. Click OK.
5. Click the close button at the top right to close the view.
6. Click Yes when you are prompted to save your changes.
7. Press your chosen key combination to open the view and test the
shortcut.
Creating a keyboard shortcut
352
Reuse Part of Existing View

Reusing components from existing views can save setup time, especially
if a component has been extensively customized. You can copy and
reuse a component within the same view, so that further adjustments
can be made to the copied item. Alternatively, you can copy a
component from an existing view and reuse it in a new view.
To reuse part of an existing view:

1. Open the view you want to copy the component from.
2. Open the view you wish to copy the component to.
3. Ensure you have an empty space in which to place the copied
component (split the panel to create a space).
4. Right-click the component you wish to copy > Select Component
Functions > Copy Component. This saves the component
temporarily so you can retrieve it later.
5. Select the View tab in the bottom left corner of the navigator to
display the view where you will paste this component (if necessary).
6. Right-click the empty panel > Select the appropriate Set Component
option (left, right, top or bottom) — A message will display, asking
Would you like to use the Control that is on the clipboard?.
7. Click OK to paste the copied component into the view.
353
Save Changes to View

Because Ascent does not save changes to any view until you tell it to,
you can make temporary changes to any view (including the system-
defined ones) to change the way your data displays on a chart or report.
This might only be a small change such as changing the left axis units or
hiding alarm bands to increase the size of your display area. When you
close the view, you will be prompted to save your changes. Click No to
discard all changes.
Alternatively, if you have made several adjustments, you might decide it

is worth keeping this view intact. You might want to keep the original
view too. You can select View > Save View As to achieve this. It enables
you to make as many changes to a view as you like and then save the
new view under a different name. It also enables you to use any of the
system-defined default views or any of your own views as a starting
point to create new ones. For example, you could plot a spectrum, then
use View > Component Functions > Split Left-Right, to create a new
blank panel on the right of the screen. You could then add components
to the blank panel and further customize the layout before saving the
view under a different name.
Restore System Default Views

If you save changes to one of the system-defined views, you can undo
your changes at any time by selecting View > Reset Default Views.
Doing so will restore any system defined views to their original format.
When you click Yes to confirm, if you have any user-defined views, you
will be asked whether you want to delete these as part of the restore
process. Choose No to keep any user-defined views or Yes to delete
these.
354
Change View File Name

When you name a view, the .av (view) file is created in the Autoview
folder by default. This file uses the same name as the view, minus any
spaces and special characters. You can rename the .av file
independently of the view to ensure the file uses a different name from
the one that displays in the Chart dropdown field.
To rename a view file:

1. Open your view > Select View > Set ID.
2. Enter a new name for the .av file.
3. Click OK.
Use Selector
When you open a view to plot data, there will often be more than one set
of data that could be displayed on a chart. Consequently, Ascent will
choose one by default. A selector is a dropdown field at the top of a
chart that enables you to select the data you want to display in that
chart. The list contains measurements (or locations, schedule entries,
etc) that match the criteria you specify. This could be something like
include in the selector list, all locations that have demodulation data.
When you select an item in the navigator tree, the selector will create a
list similar to the one below.
Using a selector
355
Example of Using Selector

To see an example of how selectors are used:
1. Choose a point that has several measurement locations (or select an
entire machine or folder).
2. Select Chart > Vel+Demod to open the Vel+Demod view. Because
this view targets measurement locations (axes) to decide which data
to plot, the selectors will display. This is because there is more than
one location to choose from.
3. Select a schedule entry — The selectors will disappear because
there is only one target to choose from (the location containing this
schedule entry).
356
Add Selector
To include a selector in a view, you must add the selector before adding
the component it is attached to. You cannot add a selector directly to an
existing report or chart. However, there are several ways of working
around this. These solutions are described at the end of this topic.
The following method describes how to add a selector to an empty view

or panel (i.e. a panel that does not already contain a component):
2. Choose Selector from the Select Auto View Component window.
NOTE: If this is not currently open, you will need to right-click and
use one of the Set Component commands.
3. Choose the type of component that will display the data listed in the
selector (e.g. a chart).
4. Right-click the empty panel > Select Create child component.
5. Select a component from the list or click the grey panel to open the
Select Auto View Component window and select a component.
6. Use the selector shortcut menu to tell the selector what type of data
to look for and where to look for it.
NOTE: The menu item 'Selector1' is the default name chosen for the
first selector. If a selector has been created previously (by you or
someone else) this name will be different e.g. 'Selector2'.
7. Right-click the component > Hover on Selector1 (Parent).
NOTE: This gives you options for choosing what the selector will
choose. Move the mouse over each submenu item in turn, from
Target downwards, to get an idea of how these options are used.
8. Choose a target for this part of the view — The target is the
navigator item you want the selector to choose (e.g. machine, point,
schedule entry, etc). When you click a navigator item, the selector
will list all the targets under this item.
EG: If you choose 'location' as your target, selecting a point will
cause the selector to list all the locations at this point that contain
the data that you have chosen to display in your chart or report. If
you select a machine, the selector will list all locations on this
machine. Selecting a folder will list all locations in this folder.
357
9. Restrict the data listed in the selector by choosing items in the axis,
units, and domain submenus.
EG: You can right-click and select Selector1 (Parent) > Restrict to
units > Acceleration. This will force the selector to only list
schedule entries that specify acceleration data.
10. Right-click > Select Selector1 (Parent) > Select by default to set the
default data for this component > Select the required menu item —
The default specifies which data from all the available targets is
displayed in your chart or report (until you make a selection in the
selector). The default item becomes the first item listed in the
selector.
EG: An example is to set the target to schedule entry, and the

default to 'Worst alarm state'. When you select a
folder/machine/point/location, all schedule entries that belong to it
will be listed in the selector. The schedule entry with the worst
alarm state will be selected by default (i.e. this schedule entry is
listed first in the selector, and the displayed chart or report will
show data from this schedule entry).
11. Select an item in the navigator when your selector is complete to

test it.
12. Use the Previous and Next buttons or press the keyboard spacebar
to jump from one target to the next in navigator tree.
NOTE: By default, machines and points display in the navigator
tree in the order in which they are created. You can change the
default order by selecting Screen > Sort Navigator by Alarms or
Screen > Sort Tree Alphabetically. When you choose the default
target for the selector, the first and last default target options refer
to the position of the target in its default order. If the navigator tree
has been reordered, the position of the first and last targets might
change from their original creation order. This means the selector
might choose different first or last targets to those you expect.
358
Add Selector to Existing Chart or Report

To add a selector to an existing view, you can split the view, thereby
creating an empty space in which to place the selector and component.
Alternatively, if you don't want to change the layout of your view, you
can use the copy and paste functions to remove and then replace a
component once you have added a selector. Copy holds the component
in memory so you can delete it from a view without permanently
removing it. After adding a selector, paste puts the component back into
its original place. This technique is recommended if you have spent a lot
of time customizing a chart or report and do not wish to recreate it.
To add a selector to an existing chart or report:

2. Right-click the component you wish to add a selector to > Select
Component Functions > Copy Component — This saves the
component temporarily so you can retrieve it later.
3. Right-click the component > Select Component Functions > Delete
to delete the component.
NOTE: If the view contained only one component, e.g. a single
chart, you will now have an empty view. If there was more than
one component, the remaining components will now expand to fill
the whole screen. In this case you will have to resplit the view to
create space for the selector.
4. Right-click > Select Component Functions > Split Top-Bottom (or

Left-Right) to split the screen (if required).
5. Right-click the panel > Select one of the Set Component options
(top, bottom, left, or right) > Choose Selector from the Select Auto
View Component window.
6. Ensure your selector is in place.
7. Paste the deleted component back into position.
8. Right-click the panel under the selector > Select Component
Functions > Paste Component.
NOTE: The selector can now be customized as described earlier in
this topic.
359
Assign Priority and Target

When you create a view you can control how it behaves in the view
system. For example, you can specify which data types the view applies
to and whether your view will be opened as the default action when you
double-click an item to plot data.
Each view that displays in the Chart dropdown field is assigned a priority
value. When you double-click an item in the navigator, if several views
could be used to plot the data, the view with the highest priority will be
used by default. For example, double-clicking a frequency domain
measurement will open a spectrum by default (rather than the
SpecTrend or SpecStack views) as this view has the highest priority for
frequency data.
To assign a priority and target:

2. Select View > Icon and Target.
3. Select the data types applicable to this view (i.e. time or frequency
domain data) and the navigator item(s), such as schedule entries,
that will open this view when double-clicked.
4. Assign a priority value to this view — This can be any integer value
(e.g. 20 or 150).
5. Select a target for this view — The target is the item the navigator
will jump to when you use the Previous and Next buttons. For
example, if you select Measurement Locations as the data type,
clicking Next will take you to the next location in the navigator and
plot the data at that location.
6. Select a menu icon — This will display in the Chart dropdown menu.
7. Click Save to finish.
TIP: To get a better idea of how to set the behaviour of your view,
open one of the factory default views > Select View > Icon >
Target. This will display the data types, priority, and target for that
view.
NOTE: If you plot data using a view other than the default, you can
open the default view by right-clicking the assigned target and
selecting Open Default View.
360
NOTE: The Add, Edit, and Delete buttons are not currently used.
They are included for future compatibility.
Assigning a priority and target
361
Design View Layout

A view may consist of a single chart or report, or it can be made up of
several parts. When you create views that consist of more than one
component, you will need to define a layout. This is so Ascent knows
where you want your components placed. To create a layout you need
to use Panels and Splitters as building blocks to divide the view into
parts.
You can think of a panel as a blank canvas onto which you place
displayable components (e.g. charts and reports). A splitter is used to
split the panels into halves so more than one component can be
displayed. The Waterfall Trend chart created in the walkthrough
consisted of a single panel split in two. However, you can create views
with as many parts as you like.
The following image demonstrates how you can build up a view by

splitting a panel in two, adding a panel to each half, then splitting those
panels and repeating the process.
You can split a panel left-to-right or top-to-bottom to organize the

components of a view according to your requirements. When creating
multi-part views, you might find it useful to first sketch out on paper
where you would like the parts to be, and then use panels and splitters
to create the view layout.
362
The process for creating a multi-part layout is as follows:

1. Open your empty view.
2. Add your first component to the view (e.g. a chart) — By default this
will fill the whole screen. An empty view already has a panel as its
base so components can be placed directly onto it.
3. Create a space to add other components.
4. Split the base panel from left to right or top to bottom e.g. right-click
> Select Component Functions > Split Left-Right.
NOTE: Your first component will fill half the screen while the other
half remains blank until a component is added to it. Nothing will
display yet as no data is selected.
5. Set a component for the empty part of the screen i.e. click anywhere
in the empty half to open the Select Auto View Component window.
6. Select the required component — This can be a displayable
component such as a report, note, or chart, or another panel so you
can split the layout again.
NOTE: You can further subdivide the view by adding and splitting
panels to create a four-part view. Alternatively, you can split one
panel to make a three-part view. The view can be as complex or
simple as required. Components can be stacked on top of each
other. For example, you can have a base panel containing several
components. If you delete the bottom panel, this will also delete all
the components on top of it.
7. Right-click a component, select Component Functions > Delete to

delete it.
363
How Parts of a View Fit Together

This topic examines the way the parts of a view fit together. Once you
are familiar with this, you can explore the options for manipulating a
layout,
To learn more about how the parts of a view fit together:
1. Select the Chart button > Open the SpecTrend view.
2. Right-click the spectrum to open the chart shortcut menu:
TIP: Ensure you do NOT right-click a special item such as an alarm
band or note as this will open a special menu item.
• Halfway down you will see the relevant menu items:

• The Component Functions menu item contains a submenu of
options for working directly with a component.
TIP: You can right-click a component in a view to access this menu
directly.
• The Splitter1 (Parent) submenu contains two child components

(the spectrum and trend charts). Its submenu contains
commands for placing child components within the splitter. The
Splitter1 (Parent) submenu contains its own Component
Functions item for working with the splitter component (e.g.
copy, rename, or delete the splitter. Splitting a splitter
component will resize it to only fill half of the space. This creates
an empty area for you to add new components.
3. Select Splitter1 (Parent) > Component Functions > Split Left-Right
to split a splitter so you can see the effect — You can undo this split
when you close the view by clicking No when you are prompted to
save changes to the view.
NOTE: If you delete a splitter, any child components will also be
deleted. This is because they are contained in the splitter.
NOTE: SpecTrend (Parent) is the name of the view. All the

components (trend chart, spectrum and splitter) are contained
within this parent. Its submenu contains commands for working
with the view as a whole (for example, setting its target or
updating and saving the view). The SpecTrend (Parent) submenu
contains its own Component Functions item so that you can
rename the view or add more components.
364
4. Select Design from this submenu.
NOTE: Design mode shows you the underlying structure of a view.

You can create your views in Design mode if required, as all the
right-click menus are available here. Design mode is useful if you
are making changes to a complex view. This is because it shows
you how the view has been put together (what components are
contained within others).
5. Switch off Design mode.

6. Right-click the spectrum > Select SpecTrend (Parent) > Design.
How parts of a view fit together
365
Change Layout
You can access the commands for manipulating a component by
selecting that component (e.g. delete, copy, split, etc), and selecting
Component Functions.
When you add components to a view, Ascent assigns them a default

name (e.g. Splitter1, Selector1, Panel1, etc). The instructions in this topic
use the default names. These may differ from what you see on your
computer.
NOTE: Several items in the Component Functions submenu are

included for the purpose of backward compatibility. They will only
be visible when other options are selected first. In previous
versions of Ascent, the options 'Set Alignment', 'Set Size', and 'Set
Position' were used to create the layout of a view. Splitters are
now used in place of these positioning options.
Add New Component

To add a new component to a view, you must first split the view to
create an empty space to place your component in. To add a new
component:
1. Right-click the component you wish to split > Select Component
Functions > Split Left-Right (or Top-Bottom).
2. Right-click the empty panel > Select the appropriate Set Component
option (left, right, top, or bottom) > Select the component you wish to
add.
Swap Positions of Two Components

When there are two components on the same split panel (e.g. two charts
stacked one above the other) you can swap their positions around. To do
this, right-click one of the components > Select Splitter1 (Parent) >
Switch.
You cannot select a component directly and use the switch command
because both components are contained 'in Splitter1'. Consequently
they must be accessed through this component.
366
Rename Component
If you are building multi-part views that contain several panels, splitters,
and selectors etc, you might want to rename these components so you
can identify them more easily. Once you have renamed a component,
when you right-click it, the new name will display in the menu instead of
the default name.
To rename a component:
1. Right-click it > Select Component Functions > Rename.
2. Enter a new name.
3. Click OK.
Resize Component
You can resize sections of a multi-part view. To do this:
1. Move the cursor over a separating border until the cursor becomes
a double-headed arrow.
2. Drag the cursor up-down or left-right.
Using cursors to resize a component
Unsplit View (Delete Component)

If you have split a panel but not yet added any components you can
unsplit it. If components have already been added, remove the one you
don't want. Deleting a component removes the split. The remaining
component will expand to fill the space.
To unsplit a panel:
1. Right-click the empty part (grey area) > Select Unsplit.
2. Right-click a component, select Component Functions > Delete to
delete it.
Delete View
To delete a view, open the view > Select View > Delete.
367
Section 11 — Use Machine Builder Wizard
Section 11 — Use Machine Builder

Wizard
Introduction
The Machine Builder wizard automates the process of building machines
by stepping you through the machine setup process and creating
appropriate points, locations, schedule entries, and alarms based on the
information you supply.
The wizard implements several ISO standard alarms for assessing

overall RMS levels and The Proven Method from Technical Associates of
Charlotte, P.C. The Proven Method defines up to six power band alarms
per point for your machine. This is based on machine classification,
rotational speed, number of gear teeth and blades, etc.
Whichever alarm standard you use, the process is essentially the same.
You will specify the type of machine to build, then the alarms will be built
for you. The ISO standards require less detailed information. However,
the alarm bands generated are overall alarm bands only. The Proven
Method requires more detailed information about the machine. It also
generates more detailed alarm bands targeted at specific components
of the machine.
The rest of this section provides a walkthrough of how to use the

Machine Builder wizard. We will use The Proven Method to create power
band alarms that will be used to monitor a direct-coupled pump.
368
Walkthrough — The Proven Method

The following image shows the direct-coupled pump we will be
monitoring.
Direct-coupled pump
To monitor a direct-coupled pump:

1. Click the Build button or select Alarms > TA & ISO Alarm Creator —
The Machine Builder wizard is presented in the form of HTML-style
documents. You can click the blue underlined ISO standard or
Proven Method links to access a walkthrough of the setup process
for creating machines with predefined alarms and alarm thresholds.
2. Click the Manual Build Mode link to create your own machines and
alarms and exit the Machine Builder wizard — This opens a machine
placeholder structure in the navigator tree, enabling you to
manually set up your machines, points, and locations.
MORE: See Creating Machines Using Build Mode.
3. Select the measurements units you wish to use.

4. Click the Set Wizards link at the bottom of the screen. Use in/sec 0-
pk and CPM for this walkthrough.
5. Select other units from the dropdown fields (if required) > Click Set
these units.
6. Click the Return to index link to redisplay the Machine Builder
wizard screen.
7. Click the The Proven Method 4th Edition link to continue.
369
Machine Builder wizard
Selecting the required measurement units
370
Overall Condition Rating

The first step in The Proven Method is to determine an overall condition
rating for the machine. This gives overall vibration levels for GOOD, FAIR,
and ALARM operation that will be broken down into individual alarm
bands in the next section.
You can press F11 to toggle full-screen mode. You can make the forms
fill the entire screen or return the screen to normal size.
Establishing the overall condition rating for a machine
371
Select Overall Condition Rating

To select an overall condition rating:
1. Examine the list of machine types to find one that best describes
your machine.
2. Examine the GOOD, FAIR, and ALARM thresholds listed for this
machine.
3. Select this machine and continue if the thresholds appear suitable
for the machine you are monitoring.
NOTE: If the thresholds are NOT suitable, adjust them before
proceeding.
4. Enter a value in the All ratings are currently % higher than normal
field to adjust the alarm thresholds to use higher (or lower) values.
5. Click Update — This will reset all values in the table.
6. Set the overall condition manually if you cannot find a machine type
that matches yours.
7. Enter your values in the Manual Entry fields at the bottom of the
page to set the manual thresholds > Click GO.
NOTE: The remaining steps in The Proven Method will be the same
regardless of the overall condition rating you select. The machine
type you select specifies numerical values that are substituted into
behind-the-scenes equations in the next stage.
8. The selection that best describes our machine is General Purpose

Horizontal Pump – Direct Coupled (under Centrifugal Pumps in the
machine list).
9. Click this link to continue.
Selecting the overall condition rating
372
Select Cases
The machine you selected, along with its alarm thresholds, is displayed
at the top of the screen. At this stage you are given a selection of cases.
Each case will create different alarm band setups suited to the machine
component they describe. Almost all machines will have Case A or Case
B measurements on the bearing housings. The remaining cases are for
more specialized measurements.
You know the number of vanes on the pump (8), so you will use CASE G
TYPE 1 on the pump bearings.
The motor is an AC Induction Motor so you will use cases E and F on the
motor itself.
If you wanted to monitor a simple bearing point, you would use Case A
or B. Case G incorporates information for the bearing, so you will not
need to use Case A or B in this example.
Selecting cases
373
Case G Type 1
This case provides an example of a driven centrifugal component with a
known number of vanes (or blades) and rolling element bearings.
1. Click the CASE G type 1 link.
2. Select all the checkboxes at the top right of the form to apply all
alarm levels.
3. Enter the following information in the form:
• Typical machine RPM — 3000.
• Number of blades — 8.
• The bearings are ball bearings — All other bearing types.
4. Click Continue — Ascent performs all calculations defined in the

Proven Method to give you specific alarm bands for this
measurement point. The results of the calculations are summarized
in a table at the bottom of the screen (you will need to scroll down to
see this).
374
NOTE: This step would normally take several minutes to complete

if you were using The Proven Method document manually with a
calculator, pen, and paper.
Calculation results
NOTE: You can now apply the alarm bands to an existing machine
or create a new machine and point. To use a point on an existing
machine, you will need to select it in the navigator before you fill
out the form. For the purposes of this walkthrough, you will need
to create a new machine to apply the alarm bands to apply to. You
may need to scroll down to see the lower part of the form.
375
5. Enter Pump #3 in the first blank field.

6. Click Create Machine — This machine displays in the navigator tree.
7. Change the default point name from Bearing Housing to Pump
Inboard.
8. Leave the checkbox ticked to create this new point.
9. Leave the Speed field empty — This will create a new point with the
same default speed as the machine. I.e. it will use a point multiplier
of 1. If you enter a new point speed, a point multiplier will be
calculated and applied to the new point or all points on the
machine.
MORE: See Applying Different Rotational Speeds Across a Machine
to learn about point multipliers.
10. Leave the checkboxes ticked for Step 3 on the form to create
horizontal, vertical, and axial locations at this point.
11. Click Create Alarm & Measurement.
376
Example of navigator tree when you

create the alarm and measurement
12. Create a second point using the same settings.

13. Change the point name to Pump Outboard in the Machine Builder
wizard.
14. Click Create Alarm & Measurement again.

recreate the alarm and measurement
377
Cases E and F
These two cases define special measurements to detect problems
specific to AC induction motors.
1. Click the Return to Case selection link at the bottom of the Machine
Builder wizard form to return to the Case Selection screen.
2. Click the CASE E link under AC Induction Motors.
NOTE: Case E requires no specific information to create its alarm

bands. The alarm level choice does not affect the alarm thresholds,
It only determines the kind of alarm raised (Warning, Alert or
Danger) when these fixed thresholds are exceeded.
3. Leave the Alarm Enter as Alert.

4. Click Continue — The Machine Builder wizard is now ready to create
alarm bands and schedule entries on your machine. This
measurement should be taken on the Outboard Bearing, Horizontal
point as indicated on the form.
378
5. Select Pump #3 in the navigator — You are going to add these

alarm bands to the same machine.
6. For Step 2, change the point name to Motor Outboard.
7. Click Create Alarm & Measurement — This will create a new point
for Pump #3 called Motor Outboard.
8. Click the Return to Case Selection link.
9. Click the CASE F link under AC Induction Motors — You are prompted
to enter information to create alarms for the inboard bearing.
10. Enter the electrical AC line frequency as 50 Hz.

11. Leave the Alarm Enter as Alert.
12. Click Continue — Ascent is now ready to generate alarm bands and
measurements.
379
13. Select Pump #3 in the navigator — You are going to add these
alarm bands to the same machine.
14. Change the point name to Motor Inboard.
16. Click the Return to Case selection link at the bottom of the Machine
Builder wizard form to return to the Case Selection screen.

create the alarm and measurement
380
Case A
The Case E and F measurements do not look for bearing problems. For
this we will use Case A, which deals with general rolling element bearing
components without vanes.
1. Click the CASE A link under General Purpose — You are going to add
these alarm bands and schedule entries to the Motor Inboard and
Motor Outboard points that have already been created.
2. Leave the bearing type as ball bearing.
3. Click Continue.
4. Untick the Create a new Point checkbox.
5. Select the Motor Inboard point on the navigator tree.
6. Leave all settings as they are.
8. Select the Motor Outboard point > Click this button again.
9. Click the Close button in the top right corner to close the Machine
Builder wizard.
10. Select one of the schedule entries in the navigator tree — The
associated alarm icons display in the navigator list.
NOTE: Now that the machine structure is complete, you can now
create a route and send this folder to your instrument for data
collection.
TIP: If this is a common machine type, we recommend you right-

click the machine and add it to the library. This will enable you to
retrieve and reuse the template in the future. See Storing Reusable
Components in the Library, for more information.
381
Example of final machine structure (schedule entries not shown)
Example of alarm icons displaying on the navigator tree
382
Section 12 — Statistical Alarms

Statistical Alarm Overview

ISO standards and The Proven Method provide excellent starting points
for setting alarm thresholds. However, once you have a history of data
for your machines, or data on many similar machines, you can use
statistical analysis of that data to generate new alarm thresholds that
are tailored specifically for those machines.
Statistically derived alarms take the specific vibratory characteristics of

your machines into account. They provide more reliable and accurate
alarms that will trigger when a machine is vibrating more than normal.
You can generate statistical alarms for envelopes, peak bands, and
power bands. Once you have collected a reasonable amount of data (6-
12 surveys) you can fine-tune your existing alarm thresholds using
statistical analysis. You can use a history of data to generate some
statistics, or run statistics across a family of similar machines.
MORE: See Machine Families.
The following example shows how you can use statistically derived
alarms to fine-tune existing alarm thresholds on a machine. This
machine uses several power band alarms created with The Proven
Method.
383
Combined spectrum and trend chart of the machine before statistics are applied.
384
The bottom trend plot suggests all except one of the alarms have their
thresholds set too high. The alarm trends are on the zero axis. You
cannot see them without zooming. The one visible alarm possibly has its
thresholds set too low as this alarm has already reached Warning level.
Same machine after the statistics are used
The alarm thresholds have been reset to levels that are more accurate
for this machine. I.e. the alarms will now trigger if there is any significant
increase in vibration.
385
Ascent comes with a number of predefined statistical alarms that you

can apply to your data. If you want to use the predefined statistical
alarms, and you do not intend to create your own alarms, you do not
need to read the entire section. The following list of topics includes the
minimum reading necessary to get you started (we recommend you
read the rest of the section once you are comfortable with using the
predefined statistical alarms):
• What are Generation Parameters — How Ascent creates
statistical alarms.
• Applying Predefined Alarms — How to apply predefined alarms
to your machines.
• Redefining Thresholds for Existing Alarms — How to generate
new thresholds for existing alarms.
• Updating Alarm Thresholds — How to create more accurate and
reliable alarm thresholds.
If you intend to create your own statistical alarms, or make adjustments

to the predefined ones, you will need to read the entire section. This will
give you a thorough understanding of:
• How alarm thresholds are created and adjusted.
• The mathematical processes involved.
• The data needed to make statistical threshold calculations.
386
Generation Parameters
When you create a statistical alarm, Ascent needs to know what:
• Type of alarm to create — Envelope or band.
• Amplitudes to set for the alarm thresholds.
This information is provided in the Generation Parameters used to create

the alarm. Generation parameters are statistical alarm templates that
specify which settings will be used to generate statistical alarms for your
machines.
For example, a set of generation parameters might specify that the:

• Alarm created will be a band alarm.
• Alarm thresholds will be calculated using a history of collected
data.
• Thresholds will be set for Warning, Alert, and Danger.
The system-defined generation parameters included in Ascent are based

on standards from ISO and the Technical Associates of Charlotte, P.C.
These provide excellent starting points for setting up your statistical
alarms. You can use them to create alarms for machines that do not yet
have alarms set up, or to redefine thresholds for your existing alarms to
make them more accurate.
Window showing a selection of predefined generation parameters
387
Apply Predefined Alarms

You will need to create some alarms before statistical alarm thresholds
can be calculated for your data. If you have a machine with no alarms,
or a machine with alarms that aren't working effectively, you can use the
Alarm wizard to create new alarms.
The Alarm wizard is an alarm management tool you can use to create
statistically derived alarms quickly and easily. To do this:
1. Select a machine to create the alarms for.
2. Select a set of predefined generation parameters to apply — These
specify the alarm type (band or envelope) and alarm thresholds to
create.
3. Select the schedule entries you wish to apply the alarm to.
4. Specify a frequency range for the band alarms.
5. Click OK — The wizard analyzes your data and builds the alarms at
each schedule entry you have chosen.
TIP: If you are going to use the Alarm wizard to build new alarms,
envelope alarms are the most effective type to create. If you want
more detailed band alarms with predefined frequency ranges, use
The Proven Method to create appropriate bands before redefining
their thresholds using statistics (see Redefining Thresholds for
Existing Alarms).
388
Create and Apply Alarms

To create and apply alarms:
1. Select the machine that you wish to build alarms on.
2. Click the Alarms button to open the Alarm wizard — Any existing
alarms display in this window.
Alarm wizard showing existing alarms
3. Select any existing alarms you wish to remove > Click Delete.
5. Select the Tasks tab to return to the main screen.
6. Click Add to create your new alarms.
7. Click the browse button to open the Alarm Templates window.
Alarm Templates window
389
8. Highlight the generation parameter set you wish to assign to these

alarms.
TIP: The descriptive names should help you decide which
generation parameters are most suitable.
9. Click Select to open the Alarm Creator window.
Alarm Creator window
10. Tick the schedule entry checkboxes you wish to apply the alarms to.
NOTE: If you are creating peak or power band alarms you will need
to manually set the frequency range for these alarms.
11. Select the Alarm Band Frequency Range tab.

12. Enter the start and stop frequency values.
390
13. Click OK to create the new alarms — Your data is analyzed. The
generation parameters you selected are used to create the
thresholds for these new alarms. The Alarm Summary window
displays the results of the generation process:
• OK — Indicates new thresholds were generated.
• Black exclamation ! mark — Indicates thresholds were
generated, however a minimal amount of data was used (the
Warn if less than value has not been reached).
• Warn if less than value — Refers to the number of vibration
recordings used as source data for statistical calculations.
• Red exclamation ! mark — Thresholds were NOT generated.
Either there was not enough data or another error occurred.
NOTE: The furthest column on the right contains more information
about the generation process. For example, you might find
information about how many outliers were rejected and whether
there were any suspicious recordings.
Alarm Summary window displaying results of generation process
14. Select the Source Data tab to access a more detailed breakdown of
the data values used in the generation process.
NOTE: In the expanded navigator tree, calculated unit values
display in your preferred units. This is based on the unit
preferences currently configured in Ascent (under Options > Unit
Preferences), the units of the template, and the alarm band units.
391
Using the Source Data tab to access more information
15. Click OK to save these new thresholds — Ascent creates the alarms
and writes the new thresholds to the database.
NOTE: If you click Cancel, the alarms will not be changed and you
can try selecting a different set of generation parameters to fine-
tune the thresholds before generating them.
392
Redefine Thresholds for Existing Alarms

When you apply generation parameters to existing alarms, their
thresholds are recalculated using statistical analysis of your collected
data. The generation parameters you select determine how the
thresholds are calculated.
To redefine thresholds for existing alarms:

1. Select the folder, machine, point, location, or schedule entry
containing the alarms.
2. Click the Alarms button to open the Alarm wizard — Create, update,
and generate alarm thresholds on all the selected alarms at once.
Alarm wizard
3. Press SHIFT or CTRL while you select the alarms you wish to update
thresholds for.
4. Click the Template button to open the Alarm Templates window —
This window contains a list of currently defined alarm generation
parameters. You can apply the parameters to this alarm and later
include your own parameters. If there are no suitable alarm
generation parameters for these alarms None will display.
393
Alarm Templates window
5. Select the appropriate generation parameter set.

TIP: The descriptive names should help you decide which
generation parameters are most appropriate.
6. Click Select — The Alarm Summary window displays the new alarm
information. An icon beside each row in the threshold summary
shows whether new thresholds were generated successfully for
each alarm:
• OK — Indicates new thresholds were generated.
• Black exclamation ! mark — Indicates thresholds were
generated, however a minimal amount of data was used (the
Warn if less than value has not been reached).
• Warn if less than value — Refers to the number of vibration
recordings used as source data for statistical calculations.
• Red exclamation ! mark — Thresholds were NOT generated.
Either there was not enough data or another error occurred.
NOTE: The furthest column on the right contains more information
about the generation process. For example, you might find
information about how many outliers were rejected and whether
there were any suspicious recordings.
NOTE: The suitability of generation parameters is based on the

type of alarm. For example, if you select a band alarm, the
generation parameters will be hidden.
394
Alarm Summary window
7. Click the Source Data tab to access a more detailed breakdown of

the data values used in the generation process.
NOTE: In the expanded navigator tree, calculated unit values
display in your preferred units. This is based on the unit
preferences currently configured in Ascent (under Options > Unit
Preferences), the template units, and the alarm band units.
8. Click OK to save these new thresholds — Ascent writes the new

thresholds to the database.
NOTE: If you click Cancel, the alarms will not be changed. You can
select a different set of generation parameters to fine-tune the
thresholds before generating these.
Redefine Thresholds for Single Alarm

To update a single alarm using statistics:
1. Double-click a recording to display the alarm on a chart.
2. Right-click the alarm on the chart > Select Update Thresholds.
3. Select the appropriate generation parameter set > Click Select.
4. Click OK to save the new thresholds or Cancel to discard them.
395
Update Alarm Thresholds

The accuracy of statistically generated alarm thresholds is largely
determined by the number of recordings used. A larger number of
recordings will provide a more accurate estimate of the mean and
standard deviation. As you collect a history of data, we recommend you
update your alarms periodically (e.g. every 6-12 surveys) so that reliable
alarm thresholds can be established. Whenever thresholds are updated,
statistical outliers will be rejected during the update.
When you update alarms, Ascent uses all recordings available at that
time to generate statistics. It then perform calculations on these to
determine new thresholds. The number of recordings used and the
locations from which they are sourced are determined by the settings of
the alarm generation parameters you selected when you created the
alarms.
You can update several alarms at once. Doing so will generate new
thresholds based on the generation parameters assigned to each alarm.
To update alarms:
1. Click Alarms to open the Alarm wizard.
2. Use the menu to select the alarms you wish to update.
TIP: Press SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple alarms.
3. Select Alarms > Update alarm from template — The Alarm

Summary window displays, showing you whether the new
thresholds were generated successfully for each alarm and what
the new thresholds are.
4. Click OK if you wish to save these new thresholds.
NOTE: If you click Cancel the alarms will not be changed and you
can try editing the generation parameters to fine-tune the
thresholds before updating again.
396
Update Thresholds for Single Alarm

To update a single alarm;
1. Double-click a recording to display the alarm on a chart.
2. Right-click the alarm on the chart > Select Update Thresholds.
3. Click OK when the Alarm Summary window opens if you wish to
save the new thresholds.
397
Apply Statistics to Alarms

To generate statistical alarms, Ascent applies statistical calculations to
your data (vibration recordings) and uses the end results to set the alarm
thresholds:
1. Given a set of data, Ascent calculates the mean and standard
deviation values.
2. It then sets alarm levels at mean plus a number of standard
deviations above the averaged spectrum so only outlying data
values (higher than normal amplitudes) will trigger an alarm:
• For envelope alarms this involves calculating the mean and
standard deviation of each frequency in each spectrum.
• For peak and power alarms this involves calculating the mean
and standard deviation of the Peak or Power value within the
alarm's frequency range for each recording.
When calculating the mean for a sample of recordings:

• For envelope alarms, the mean = the average value of each
frequency.
• For power band alarms, the mean = the average value of the
power in that band.
• For peak band alarms, the mean = the average value of the
highest amplitude in that band.
NOTE: If there are less than 25 vibration recordings in your sample,
Ascent will use the (n -1) denominator in the standard deviation
calculation. This provides a standard deviation estimate of the
population from a sample. This is the standard employed by the
American Society of Quality Control. If there are 25 or more
vibration recordings, the (n) denominator is used.
If the measurements are distributed normally along a bell curve, 99% of

the data values will fall within mean plus or minus three standard
deviations. This is regarded as the normal level of vibration.
If you set your alarm levels at mean plus three standard deviations, you
would expect less than 1% of normal data to trigger an alarm. However,
unusually large data values (those higher than mean plus three standard
deviations) will trigger the alarm.
398
Statistical Outliers
Statistical outliers are data values that are much larger or smaller than
the mean value.
NOTE: Spectral points that exhibit unusually high or low levels of

vibration are classified as outliers.
Ascent detects any statistical outliers in your data and excludes them
from its calculations. This reduces the likelihood of false or non-triggered
alarms.
Outlier Detection and Suspicious

Recordings
Ascent uses the Median Absolute Deviation (MAD) method to
automatically identify statistical outliers. Values that are more than 3.5
estimated standard deviations from the estimated mean are rejected
from the calculations. For peak and power bands, this means the entire
recording is rejected (because each recording only produces one value).
You can change the default value of 3.5 estimated standard deviations
to control how much outlier removal is used. You can access this option
from the Statistics Option tab.
399
Suspicious Recordings (envelopes only)

When generating envelope alarms, a data point which is an outlier does
not cause the entire measurement to being rejected. If Ascent finds that
more than 25% of the data points from a recording have been rejected,
it regards that recording as suspicious. This is just a flag on the
recording. It does not affect the processing. We recommend you mark
this recording as bad quality if you think it is an unsuitable
measurement. This will ensure all its values are excluded from the
statistics.
To flag a recording's data quality as bad:

1. Right-click the recording in the navigator list > Select Edit.
2. Select Inspected and Rejected, Quality Bad in the Data Quality
dropdown field.
3. Click OK.
Specifying the quality of a recording
400
Outlier measurements are shown on trend charts using X markers. Here

are the default colors for these X markers:
NOTE: These use the color scheme as described in Schemes.
• Black — The measurement was not included in statistics

because its data quality is set to Bad or the measurement did
not meet criteria (RPM out of range, not a baseline, data doesn't
match, etc) if you are using Statistics by History.
• Red (alarm band trending only) — The measurement was
identified as an outlier.
• Dark pink (envelope trending only) — This indicates that more
than 25% of the points on the envelope were rejected, making
the recording is suspicious.
The following example shows an alarm band that has been updated
using statistics. Red crosses mark three measurements that were
rejected as outliers. A black cross marks one measurement that was
rejected because its data quality flag was set to bad.
Example of alarm band updated using statistics
401
Here is an example of an envelope trend where the last measurement

was considered suspicious because more than 25% of its values were
rejected.
Envelope trend showing suspicious measurement
Once statistics have been generated, you can get this information in
detail from the Source Data tab of the Alarm Summary window.
Using the Source tab to access statistics
402
Statistical Alarm Setup

Statistical alarm thresholds are created by defining generation
parameters. Ascent uses this setup information in its statistical
calculations.
The generation parameters used with an alarm are permanently

associated with that alarm. You can update the alarm at any stage using
the same parameters with any new data that might be available. As with
parameter sets, you can use a single set of generation parameters on
several machines.
You will need to create alarms before you can calculate statistical alarm
thresholds for your data. There are different ways to create new alarms.
You can:
• Manually create alarms directly on charts — See Using Alarms.
• Use the Machine Builder wizard to define the alarms and
measurements using The Proven Method or an ISO standard.
• Use the Alarm wizard to create alarms, select generation
parameters, and generate thresholds for these new alarms.
403
Alarm Wizard
You can use the Alarm wizard to create, update, and generate alarm
thresholds on all selected items at once. To access these options:
1. Click the Alarms button to open the Alarm wizard.
2. Select the required option:
• Add — Open the Alarm Creator window where you can set the
alarm frequency range and access alarm templates and
generation parameters.
• Edit — Edit and update individually selected alarms.
• Delete — Delete the selected alarm(s).
• Template — Open the Alarm Templates window where you can
add or edit the generation parameters associated with the
selected alarms.
The next few topics will walk you through each of the alarm setup
screens and describe the settings and information you need to supply so
Ascent can generate alarms for you.
NOTE: As you explore the Alarm wizard, some parts of the screens
will be hidden and will only become visible when you select
options or enter information. The instructions will tell you when
you need to perform an action.
Using the Alarm wizard
404
General Settings
To specify the general settings for alarms:
1. Click Alarms to open the Alarm wizard.
3. Click Add.
4. Use the General Settings tab to specify the basic information for
your alarm generation parameters.
• Description — This is a unique name you supply for this set of
generation parameters. Before you proceed, enter a name in
this field.
NOTE: You will be prompted for a name later if you do not enter
one now.
• These generation parameters are for Envelopes (Narrowband

Alarms) — Tick this checkbox to specify that you are creating an
envelope alarm. Doing so will display the Envelope Options tab
in the Threshold editor.
• Use history at each location for statistics — Tick this checkbox
to have historical data at each measurement location used to
generate mean and standard deviation values. Doing so will
display the History Options tab.
Select options to make relevant information tabs display
• Use measurements on other machines in same family for

statistics — Tick this checkbox to have measurements at other
machines in the same family used for statistics as well. Doing so
displays the Family Options tab. You can use historical and
family measurements for statistics if required.
NOTE: If statistics are not being used (neither the history nor family
is selected for statistics), you can specify absolute alarm levels only
(e.g. for ISO 2372 alarm bands).
405
• Maximum RPM difference — When you create a new alarm or

update the thresholds, Ascent finds the RPM of the most recent
measurement. When you look through the history and family for
more measurements, it only uses measurements within this
number of RPM from the most recent value. This RPM value is
static and will not change until you update the alarm.
• Only consider baseline measurements — Select this option if
you wish to set up one of these special case scenarios:
• Used in conjunction with Use history at each location for
statistics — If the history limit is set to 1 (on the History
Options tab), you can base the alarms on the most recent
baseline at each location.
• Used in conjunction with Use measurements on other
machines in same family for statistics — If this option is also
selected, statistics are generated using the baseline
measurements across the machine family.
• With only one data value (the most recent baseline), the
standard deviation is calculated to be zero.
However, you can use the other threshold defining attributes,

such as Percentage offset from Mean and the Minimum and
Maximum values to allow alarms to be specified at a relative or
absolute level, based on the baseline at each location.
History Options
The History Options tab displays when you select Use history at each
location for statistics. To access history options:
1. Select the History Options tab on the General Settings tab if History
Options is not visible.
2. Tick Maximum number of historical measurements to use (at each
Schedule Entry) to specify a limit on how many historical recordings
will be used. If this is set to 1, the statistics will be based on the most
recent recording at each location or the baseline recording if Only
consider Baseline measurements is selected on the General Settings
tab.
3. Enter a value in this field.
4. Tick Only consider history since most recent baseline if you only
want Ascent to go as far back in the history as the most recent
baseline recording.
406
Family Options
The Family Options tab displays when you select Use measurements on
other machines in same family for statistics on the General Settings tab.
The following options are available for the Family Options tab:
• Group data by axis — Select this option to generate alarms
using data gathered from axes of the same name in a machine
family (e.g. all recordings taken on the horizontal axis).
• Group data by point — Select this option to generate alarms
using data gathered from points in a machine family that have
the same name (e.g. all recordings taken on the Drive End point).
If you select both options, when you collect data for statistical analysis
of a particular point on a family of machines, the recordings from axes
and points with the same names will be grouped together. I.e. all
machines in the family will have their Drive End – horizontal alarms
created/updated based on the Drive End – horizontal readings of all the
other machines in that family only.
The following table summarizes how Ascent gathers data depending on

the options selected. In the following example, the alarm threshold is
being generated for Point 1 - horizontal on Machine 1.
MORE: See Machine Families to learn how to create machine

families and categorize machines into families.
407
History Family Family Family Family

group by group by group by
point axis point and
axis
Machine 1
Point 1
(alarm) H X X X X X
V X X
Point 2
H X X
V X
Machine 2
Point 1
H X X X X
V X X
Point 2
H X X
V X
408
Thresholds
You can use the Thresholds tab to define your threshold levels for each
alarm. To do this:
1. Select the Thresholds tab at the top of the window — The values
displayed here are entered using the Threshold editor.
2. Click the arrow beside the Threshold units dropdown field > Select
the type of alarm band you wish to create from the list of amplitude
units, measurement units, and scaling type (0-pk, pk-pk, rms). The
amplitude units you choose must match those of the alarm you are
updating or creating. However, the measurement units and scaling
type do not have to match.
3. Click Add to open the Threshold editor — This is where you will enter
the values displayed on the Thresholds tab.
Using the Thresholds tab
409
Threshold editor
View of Thresholds window once values have been entered in the editor
If you are using statistics (history or family is selected for statistics on the
General Settings tab), the Threshold Editor window will contain fields that
enable you to calculate a statistical threshold. If you are NOT using
statistics, the Threshold editor will contain fields that enable you to
specify absolute alarm thresholds. You only need to enter the Alarm
Enter and Min Value (see the following list of definitions).
This alarm threshold calculation is:

mean + (a number of standard deviations + percentage of mean)
Typically when generating alarm envelopes, you would use mean + 3

standard deviations.
Here are some typical formulae for peak and power band alarms:
• A level 1 alarm (Alert) = mean + 2 standard deviations.
• A level 2 alarm (Danger) = 1.5 times the level 1 setting (50%
above mean + 3 standard deviations).
410
You can specify min/max values to limit the threshold determined by

Ascent:
• Min/max delta limits the part of the calculation enclosed in
brackets.
• Min/max value limits the final result (add the mean to the delta).
The following fields are available on this screen:
NOTE: Some of these fields are optional.
• Select the type of alarm that will be raised (required) — This

type of alarm will be raised when the threshold is exceeded
(warning, alert, etc). The alarm type you choose must match the
alarm type you are creating or updating.
• Increase Mean by % (optional, set to zero if not required) —
Specifies the percent amplitude the alarm threshold will be
placed above the average spectrum (or average peak/power for
band alarms). You can also specify negative percentages for
those special cases where they may be needed. This value will
display in the Percent Offset + field on the Thresholds tab.
• Factor to multiply the Standard Deviation by (optional, set to
zero if not required) — Specifies the number of standard
deviations to use. For example, entering 2 will multiply the
standard deviation by 2 and add it to the mean. This value will
display in the S.D Multiplier field on the Thresholds tab.
• Minimum Delta (optional, leave blank if not required) —
Specifies the minimum difference between the mean and the
alarm threshold. For example, if the Min Delta is set to 1 mm/s
and the number of standard deviations + the percentage of
mean value is less than 1 mm/s, it is increased to 1mm/s before
being added to the mean to get the threshold value.
• Maximum Delta (optional - leave blank if not required) —
Specifies the maximum difference between the mean and the
alarm threshold. For example, if the Max Delta is set to 1 mm/s
and the number of standard deviations + the percentage of
mean value is more than 1 mm/s, it is reduced to 1mm/s before
being added to the mean to get the threshold value.
411
• Minimum (optional, leave blank if not required) — Specifies a

minimum amplitude for this alarm threshold to ensure it will not
be set to a very low value (thereby causing false alarms). If the
final threshold value calculated by Ascent is lower than the
minimum value, the threshold is set equal to this value. This
value is displayed in the Min Value field on the Thresholds tab.
• Maximum (Not To Exceed) (optional, leave blank if not required)
— Specifies a maximum amplitude for this alarm threshold to
ensure it will not be set to a very high value. If the final threshold
value calculated by Ascent is higher than this value, the
threshold is set equal to this value. This value is displayed in the
Max Value field on the Thresholds tab.
412
Envelope Options
The Envelope Options tab displays in the Threshold editor when you
select These generation parameters can be used for Envelopes under the
General Settings tab.
To access the envelope options:

1. Select the Envelope Options tab — You can use the following
options to specify the width of the envelope around peaks in the
statistically averaged spectrum. If you select more than one of these
options, the greatest width determined by the options will be used at
each point (spectral line) in the envelope:
• Hz — Specifies a frequency at which the envelope will be placed
either side of a peak. For example, a value of 6 Hz will generate
an envelope 3 Hz either side of each peak.
• Lines — Specifies the number of spectral lines between the
envelope and each peak in the spectrum. For example, a value
of 10 will generate an envelope five lines either side of each
peak. We recommend this option for machines that run at or
near the same speed from one recording to the next.
• Percentage of frequency — Specifies the frequency percentage
at which the envelope will be placed either side of a peak. For
example, a value of 10% around a peak at 2000 CPM will place
the envelope 5% either side of the peak at 1900 CPM and 2100
CPM. At higher frequencies on the same spectrum, the envelope
will become much wider, for example at 60 000 CPM, the
envelope will extend 3000 CPM either side. We recommend this
option for machines that run at variable speeds or whose RPM
varies significantly from one recording to the next.
• Lines (number to ignore) — Specifies the number of spectral
lines that will be ignored at the beginning of the spectrum. I.e.
the envelope will be drawn around all frequencies except the
first few lines. This helps avoid false alarms caused by the ski
slope shape often found at the low frequency end of spectra.
2. Enter values in the first three fields.
3. Click OK to return to the Thresholds tab.
413
Accessing envelope options
414
Statistics Options
The Statistics Options tab displays when you select Use history at each
location for statistics and/or Use measurements on other machines in
same family for statistics on the General Settings tab.
The following options are available when you select the statistics
options:
• Use the Peak value of measurements instead of the Mean — If
you select this option, Ascent will use the peak value of the data
instead of the mean for all calculations. If you use the peak
(highest amplitude value) instead of the mean (average value), a
higher threshold will be set. This option is typically used for
envelope alarms.
• Minimum number of samples required for statistics — New
thresholds will not be generated if this number of samples is not
available.
• Warn if less than — A black exclamation ! mark displays on the
Alarm Summary window after generating thresholds to indicate
the Warn if less than value has not been reached. When you
save the thresholds, Ascent warns you that a minimal amount of
data used.
• Estimated standard deviations — Ascent uses the Median
Absolute Deviation (MAD) method to identify outliers
automatically. By default, values that are more than 3.5
estimated standard deviations from the estimated mean are
rejected. You can adjust this outlier rejection value here.
415
Statistics options
416
Create Statistical Alarm Templates

To create statistical alarm templates:
1. Click Alarms.
3. Click Add.
4. Select the General Settings tab.
5. Enter a name for this alarm template.
6. Tick the required checkboxes and populated the fields as required.
7. Select the Thresholds tab > Select the appropriate threshold units
from the dropdown field.
8. Click Add.
9. Populate the information fields in the Threshold editor to define the
first alarm threshold.
10. Click OK when you have finished.
NOTE: You can click Add again to define additional thresholds
(Alert, Warning, etc).
11. Select the other tabs as required and enter the required information.
12. Click OK when you have finished entering data — Your new template
is selected in the Alarm Templates window.
13. Click OK to finish creating the template and close this window.
14. Select a new template in the Alarm Wizard window to apply it to
your alarms.
TIP: Use SHIFT or CTRL to select more than one alarm in the list.
15. Select Alarms > Add.

16. Select your new template in the Alarm Templates window.
17. Click Select.
18. Tick the checkbox schedule entries you wish to apply the alarms to.
19. Click OK to apply the template to your alarms — The Alarm Summary
window displays the details of the threshold calculations.
20. Click OK.
21. Click Close to finish.
417
Edit Statistical Alarm Templates

Any changes you make to the generation parameters of a statistical
alarm template will affect all alarms that use those parameters. The
change will be applied when next you update those alarms. If you only
wish to change a few alarms that share the same alarm template, you
can edit these individually or create a new set of generation parameters
and apply these to your selected alarms.
MORE: See Create statistical alarm template.
NOTE: You cannot change the frequency range of an alarm by

changing its generation parameters. For information on modifying
frequency, see the topics in Section 5 on editing alarms.
To edit statistical alarm templates:

1. Click Alarms.
3. Select the alarm template you wish to change.
4. Select Edit.
5. Click OK to confirm.
6. Click OK when you have finished making changes.
7. Click OK to confirm you wish to update the alarms — The Alarm
Summary window displays the new details of your alarm template.
8. Click OK to accept or Cancel to discard these changes.
NOTE: Cancelling enables you to try out different settings to see

the effect these will have on your alarm thresholds.
418
Machine Families
Similar machines exhibit similar vibration patterns. You can compare the
vibration patterns of similar machines to learn more about how the
machines are expected to vibrate. This makes it easier to detect when
they are vibrating abnormally.
A machine family is a user-defined group of machines that have similar

characteristics and are used for the same purpose. For example, if you
have several identical blowers made by the same manufacturer and all
operating under similar loads in similar environments, you can classify
these as belonging to the same machine family.
Ascent lets you define machine families so spectra from all machines in
that family can be compared and used to generate suitable alarm
thresholds.
NOTE: We recommend you use Statistics by history to set up

statistically-generated alarms. Statistics by family is useful if you
have no history of machine data because it enables you to use
statistics after just one single survey.
419
You should consider the following criteria when grouping machines into
families:
• Machine type — You can group blowers that perform the same
task, pumps with other pumps, etc. Note that you should not
group machines of the same type if they operate differently (e.g.
horizontal pumps and vertical pumps) as their vibratory
patterns will be very different.
• Size/capacity — Machines must be of a similar size/capacity to
each other. They must also operate under a similar load.
• Installation/mounting — Machines must have similar
supporting framework and be mounted in a similar fashion (e.g.
same base material).
• Machine age — An old machine may exhibit a very different
vibratory pattern than a newer machine. This could be due to
regular wear and tear rather than fault conditions. You should
compare spectral patterns closely before including old and
newer machines in the same family.
• Location — Machines must be spaced a similar distance from
other sources of vibration that may affect their vibration levels.
• Environment — The temperature and humidity of the machines'
operating environments must be similar.
• Physical properties — Machines must have similar mass, rotor
stiffness, damping, etc and exhibit similar sensitivity to load
changes.
NOTE: This list is not exhaustive. Use your own knowledge of the
machines studied to look for points of similarity that can be used
to group machines into families.
420
Create Machine Families

Machines must be in the same database in order to be grouped together
as a family. However, they do not need to be in the same site or folder. A
machine can be a member of more than one family at the same time.
To create a machine family:

1. Select Edit > Edit Machine Families — The top half of the Machine
Family editor shows all the machine families in the database. When
you select a machine family, the bottom half of the screen shows all
machines that belong to that family. You can double-click one of
these to select that machine in the navigator.
2. Click Add.
3. Enter a name for the new machine family.
4. Select Machines in this family are used for statistics if you want to
use this family to generate statistical alarms.
5. Click OK — Your new family displays in the upper half of the screen.
Creating a machine family
Edit Machine Family

To edit a machine family:
1. Select the machine family.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the family as required.
4. Click OK.
421
Delete Machine Family

To delete a machine family:
1. Select the machine family.
2. Click Remove.
Add / Remove Machine from Family

To add a machine to a family:
1. Select the machine in the navigator.
2. Tick a checkbox beside any machine families that you want the
machine to belong to.
Remove Machine from Family

To remove a machine from a family:
1. Select the machine in the navigator.
NOTE: In the Machine Family editor, any families this machine

belongs to will have a tick beside them.
2. Untick a checkbox to remove the machine from this family.
422
Section 13 — Network
Connect to Network Database

To connect to a network database:
1. Click Open.
2. Click the Change button.
3. Select the Network Connection tab in the Select Database window.
4. Select TCP/IP in the Connection type dropdown field.
5. Enter the server name, IP address, or DNS name of the computer
that contains the database in the Server field.
6. Enter the path to the database from the server's perspective in the
Path field.
NOTE: The Firebird server application must be installed on any PC

being used as an Ascent database server on your network. I.e.
this application must be installed on the computer housing the
.fdb format Ascent database. Port 3050 must also be open in any
installed software- or hardware-based network firewalls. The
Firebird server standalone installer is included on your Ascent
installation CD-ROM. You can also download it at
http://www.commtest.com/.
7. Click Test to check whether the database can be accessed.

8. Click OK to connect.
423
Connecting to a network database
424
Manage Multi-user Access

On a network, several users can access and change the same database
at once. Whenever you make a change (e.g. add or delete an item), the
Save button becomes available. You can click Save to commit your
changes to the database.
To revoke a change you have saved, select File > Undo \ Revert.
NOTE: There is only one level of undo. You cannot return to a state
that existed several saves ago.
NOTE: If a second user is working with the same database

elsewhere on the network, the Refresh button will display in their
toolbar when you click Save. This indicates that changes have
been made to the database. When the second user clicks Refresh,
their view of the database is synchronized with yours and they will
be able to see the changes you have made.
NOTE: The second user can also select the dropdown arrow beside
the Refresh button to configure an automatic refresh interval. You
can set the automatic refresh intervals to one hour, 10 minutes, or
every minute.
Deadlock / Conflict / Overwrite Protection

Ascent prevents deadlocking and database conflicts by not allowing
users to change the same piece of data at the same time. If one user
makes changes to the database that conflict with what a second user is
doing, they will receive a message advising them that the second user
needs to save their changes. Once the second user has committed their
changes to the database using Save, the first user can click Refresh and
make their changes again.
425
Section 14 — Administrative Tasks

This section explains how to complete the various administrative tasks in
Ascent.
Set up Ascent for Access by Non-

Administrators
You can run Ascent without an administrator account, but doing so
requires changes to Windows security permissions. Because
administrator permissions are required to perform this task you may
need to ask your IT support staff to make these changes on your behalf.
To set up Ascent so that non-administrative users can access it:

1. Log into Windows using an administrator level account.
2. Navigate to C:\Program Files\Commtest using Windows Explorer.
3. Right-click the Start button > Select Explore.
4. Right-click the Ascent folder > Select Properties.
5. Select the Security tab.
NOTE: if the Security tab is not visible, you must disable Simple file
sharing in Windows Explorer. Select Tools > Folder Options from
the main Windows Explorer menu. Select the Views tab. Scroll to
the bottom of the Advanced settings list > Deselect Use simple file
sharing (Recommended).
6. Select Users from the Group or user names list.

7. Tick the Allow checkbox beside Full Control under the Permissions
for Users list.
8. Click OK.
9. Propagate the new permissions to all subfolders if you are prompted
do so.
10. Select Start > Run > REGEDIT to open the Windows Registry editor.
11. Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\CLLC.
12. Right-click the CLLC folder > Select Permissions.
13. Select Users.
14. Select Full Control - Allow.
15. Click OK — Ascent now functions correctly under a non-
administrator Windows account.
426
Unlock vbOnline Device Features

Ascent is controlled by the CLK licensing system.
MORE: See Software Licensing.
However, vbOnline device hardware capabilities are managed by a

separate licensing system that does not use CLK keys. This alternative
licensing system unlocks licenses contained in your software files or the
Commtest License Server. Unlocking these licenses provides additional
channels on vbOnline devices. You can use this feature if you wish to
add support for extra channels after your original purchase (up to the
maximum allowed by the device's physical hardware).
If you wish to add this feature, please contact your distributor or

[email protected] for details.
427
Unlock Additional vbOnline Channels

To add channels to your vbOnline device you must obtain an unlock
license from GE Measurement & Control (NZ). This license is typically
downloaded from the Commtest License Server then installed and
activated using Ascent. However, if required, it can be provided to you as
a standalone license file.
To unlock additional channels on your vbOnline device:

1. Connect your vbOnline instrument and PC using the supplied
Ethernet communications cable.
2. Open Ascent on the PC.
4. Double-click your vbOnline device — The VB Device Properties panel
opens.
TIP: Click Add > Online Device if your instrument is not listed.
Select your instrument > Click Add vbOnline. See Adding a vbX,
Ranger or vbOnline Instrument to Ascent for more information.
5. Select the Tasks tab.

6. Click the Unlock button beside Unlock Additional Channels.
7. Select the Channels and Tachs tab.
8. Use EITHER of these methods to access your locate your license file:
• Click Check Web to download the license file.
NOTE: You must be connected to the Internet to download a

license file from the Commtest License Server. If you do not have
access to the Internet, contact GE Measurement & Control to
request your license upgrade as a standalone .vuf format file.
• Click Load From File if you have been provided with a

standalone license file > Navigate to the file location (.vuf
format) > Select the file > Click Open — Details of the unlock
license display in the Information field. Contact GE Measurement
& Control (NZ) if any of the details listed are incorrect.
9. Click Apply — The license is installed automatically. Your new
instrument channels are now active.
NOTE: The number of instrument channels available displays on
the 'VB Device Properties' panel (Tasks tab) beside the Unlock
button.
428
Unlock additional vbOnline channels
Create and Manage User Accounts

System administrators can create user accounts that are password-

enabled and have different levels of access to the Ascent database. Only
the person logged in as system administrator can create user accounts.
As system administrator, you can change your password. However, you

cannot delete or change the:
• Default login name, SYSDBA.
• Rights of this login name.
This is to prevent you accidentally locking yourself out of Ascent.
429
Create User Account

To create a user account:
1. Select Database > User Management.
2. Click Add User.
3. Populate the name and password fields.
4. Verify the password by re-entering it in the Verify Password field.
5. Select the appropriate rights for this user:
• Read Only — User can view but not change data in the
database.
• Update — User has Read Only access but can load new data
from the instrument into Ascent.
• Full Access (power user) — User has full control over the
database.
6. Click OK.
NOTE: Once you have created a user account you as the system
administrator can delete the user or change their password and
access rights. To access these options, simply select the user and
click the appropriately labeled button to perform that action.
Managing a user account
430
Enable Login
To enable the login system:
1. Log off as the system administrator.
2. Choose Database > Log off.
3. Restart Ascent.
4. Untick the Remember password checkbox.
5. Click OK to log in — The next time you run Ascent, all users will have
to enter their username and password.
Enabling the login system
431
Configure Ascent Directories

You can use the Setup window to manage or change the paths of the
Ascent directories. This window displays when you start the Ascent setup
program. You can also access it by pressing CTRL while Ascent opens.
You can use the Setup window to change the location of your database
directory, backup, files, and more. If you want to make changes without
opening Ascent, click the Don't run Ascent button.
Configuring Ascent directories
Database Directory
The database directory is the file where the actual Firebird database is
stored. This is the same as your site database.
Database List File Directory

The database list file directory is where the list of known databases is
stored.
NOTE: If you are the system administrator you can maintain a

master copy of the database list file in a read-only location on the
network. You can then control the list of databases that displays in
the dropdown field on all client computers in a multi-user
environment.
432
Backup Directory
The backup directory is where the .backup files are stored when you
back up a database.
MORE: See Backing up a Database.
Scheme File Storage Directory

The scheme file storage directory is where the .scheme files are stored.
These files contain the information for the various schemes. The three
system-defined schemes are stored in Ascent. If you delete them, they
will automatically return to their default states.
You can send .scheme files to other Ascent users. If they place the file in
their scheme file storage directory, it will be available the next time they
start Ascent.
MORE: See Schemes.
HTML Temporary Directory

The HTML temporary directory is where temporary HTML files are stored
when reports are generated.
.vbz Files
.vbz files are used for importing and exporting. They usually contain an
entire folder of information, however you can export individual items in
the navigator tree by tagging them first.
When you double-click a .vb or .vbz file, Ascent will ask whether you wish
to import the file into the database.
By default, exported files are compressed (.vbz) to reduce file size.

However, you can export uncompressed (.vb) files by selecting this
option from the dropdown field during the export process.
433
.fdb Files
.fdb files are Firebird database files. This is the default format used when
you create a new database.
Site Database
Each piece of data in the database must be identified with a universally
unique combination of numbers. You can accomplish this using folders,
machines, points, and measurement locations by including the site
identification number in the internal identifier for the item.
For data such as parameter sets, axis names, and other non-structural
data, an additional identifier is included to identify the database in the
site that this data was created in. This enables multiple installations of
Ascent at a particular site to share data types without the risk of
conflicting identifiers.
This combination of a site number and site database number is called a

Site Database. You can have more than one site database.
.scheme Files
.scheme files store the settings for your color schemes (e.g. Black and
White or High Contrast).
MORE: See Schemes to learn more about using schemes.
When you double-click a .scheme file, it is installed and selected within

Ascent.
.av Files
The views that display on the Chart and Report buttons are stored in .av
files.
When you double-click a .av file, Ascent installs that view and opens it.
434
.hex Files
.hex files store update files for the firmware in your instrument.
NOTE: This does not include vbX instruments.
When you double-click a .hex file, Ascent prepares to send this update
file into your instrument. This is equivalent to using the standard Proflash
function.
.mpf Files
.mpf files store firmware update files for SCOUT/vbX instruments such as
the vb5, vb7/SCOUT100, and vbBalancer devices.
435
Upgrade Instrument using Proflash

GE Measurement & Control (NZ) periodically releases updated versions of
the firmware on your instrument. These firmware upgrades enable you
to take advantage of product enhancements and new features that
were created after your instrument was purchased. To reprogram an
instrument with newer firmware you will need to PROFLASH the
instrument using a new firmware file.
WARNING! PROFLASHING an instrument restores the instrument

to the factory default state and deletes all stored information. This
includes folders, routes, machines, parameter sets, recordings, and
balance jobs. If you wish to save any of this information, you will
need to transfer all your folders to Ascent before PROFLASHING
your instrument.
To upgrade the firmware on your instrument:

1. Check whether a newer firmware version is available, visit our
website at www.commtest.com/downloads
http://www.www.commtest.com/downloads and check the
Software Updates section.
NOTE: You will need to register your instrument in order to
download the latest firmware file.
2. Check whether the firmware file version number on the website is

more recent than your current instrument firmware.
TIP: When you switch your instrument on, you will see the
firmware version in the middle of the screen (Firmware vX.xx).
3. Download the updated firmware file.

4. Proceed with the PROFLASH.
436
Proflash SCOUT / vbSeries Portable Instrument

To proflash a SCOUT/vbSeries portable instrument:
2. Connect the battery charger and switch it on.
3. Use the communications cable supplied to connect your instrument
to your PC.
4. Transfer any information stored on your instrument that you wish to
save to Ascent.
5. Open Ascent.
7. Double-click your instrument.
TIP: You can identify your instrument by its serial number.
NOTE: If your SCOUT/vbX series instrument is not listed, it has not

yet been added to Ascent. See Adding an Instrument to Ascent to
learn how to do this.
8. Use EITHER of these methods depending on the type of instrument

you wish to proflash:
• SCOUT/vbX — Click the Proflash button under the Setup tab
on the vbX Properties window.
• vbX000 — Click the Proflash button under the Tasks tab. The
Proflash window displays, listing the available firmware
version(s) stored on your PC.
NOTE: If Ascent locates more than one firmware file in the selected
folder, it will list all versions present. The recommended vbX
version will be highlighted at the top of the list. The text
'Recommended' will also display beside the recommended
firmware revision under the Suitability column. You will need to
select the recommended/suitable vbX000 update manually.
9. Ensure the required firmware version is selected.
437
10. Use EITHER of these methods, depending on the type of instrument

you are using:
• SCOUT/vbx — Click Proflash.
• vbX000 — Click Proflash now.
NOTE: Proflashing your instrument takes approximately one to two

minutes. You will see a series of progress messages and then be
prompted to reset your instrument.
IMPORTANT! Do not interrupt the Proflash process as this will

damage your instrument.
Apply License for Flex Feature

Once you have purchased a license for a Flex feature, you can apply the
license and start using the feature. To this:
1. Connect your instrument to your computer.
2. Select Edit > Manage > vbInstruments.
3. Select your instrument in the Manage Instruments window.
4. Click Configure.
5. Select the Tasks tab.
6. Click Unlock in the Unlock License File area.
7. Locate and select the license file you have purchase and stored on
your computer.
8. Click Open.
438
Unlocking an extra feature you have purchased
439
Bulk Tasks
You can use the Bulk Tasks feature to perform tasks on several
instruments at once. For example, you might wish to proflash all the
instruments in a database simultaneously. This feature is useful for
environments that contain large numbers of vbOnline or Ranger devices.
To use the bulk tasks feature:

2. Select all devices you wish to update or modify from the devices list.
3. Select the required instruments.
TIP: Use the CTRL key to select multiple instruments.
NOTE: The number of devices you select will show on the Configure
button as they are selected or deselected.
4. Click Configure — The Bulk Tasks configuration sequence begins.

Any selected instruments that have not already been added to the
Ascent database are added now.
5. Select a task in the Bulk Tasks window.
6. Click Start — The required task is performed for all instruments
selected. If you are proflashing devices, you will be asked for the
proflash file's location.
440
Machine Speed Settings Utility

Ascent databases created before the Ascent 2010 release (database
versions 208 and below) store running speed values at the schedule
entry level. Point level multipliers are then used to calculate correct shaft
speeds based on tachometer readings or manually entered machine
RPM. This technique, while functional, typically required the unnecessary
and repetitive entry of speed data. This situation was corrected in the
Ascent 2010 software release to allow default machine-wide speeds to
be entered at the higher machine level. RPM or Linear Speed at
individual points is then calculated by directly entering an RPM multiplier
value relative to the main machine speed as before. Alternatively, for
Linear Speed machines, this is achieved by entering the diameter of the
roller or pulley (to calculate point RPM) and an RPM multiplier.
This usability improvement necessitated an increase in the number of

fields used by the Ascent Firebird database. This changed the database
structure. Consequently, older databases that do not contain these new
fields (e.g. archived database backups) do not function correctly in
newer versions of Ascent until they have been upgraded and these
missing fields have been added and populated.
During the database upgrade process, several new default machine

speed and point multiplier values can be estimated accurately using
existing schedule entries and multipliers. However, some of these
estimates will be based on potentially inaccurate averaged values and
should be carefully checked for accuracy. To help with this, a small
upgrade utility has been added to Ascent. This tool enables you to view
machines containing ambiguous speed and multiplier readings, and
correct the values entered as required. The upgrade utility is typically
only used when transitioning an older database to the new database
structure. However, this utility may also be used as a general purpose
way to edit existing speed values in a previously upgraded database.
NOTE: When you open a database that was created before the
Ascent 2010 release that has not already been upgraded, the
database upgrade utility will be display automatically.
441
To access the upgrade utility manually:

1. Use EITHER of these methods to open the utility:
• Select Edit > Edit Machine Speed Settings.
• Right-click a machine, point, or location in the navigator list >
Select Set Speed > Click Edit Mulitpliers in the Set RPM for
Recordings window.
2. Select individual machines from the left navigator panel — The
current default speed of the selected machine and its speed type
(RPM-based or Linear) display near the top of the information panel
on the right.
3. Select a radio button beside the Speed Enter field to change the
speed type.
4. Edit the machine's default speed in the field provided (if required) —
Linear speed units display in the format currently configured under
Options > Unit Preferences > Linear Speed.
NOTE: If the Show Legacy Schedule Entry Speed checkbox is ticked,
rows that contain values that have been estimated are highlighted
in yellow. You will need to validate these values and correct them if
necessary. Once you have edited a machine value, the machine
name in the navigator list displays in bold.
5. Double-click the appropriate row in the Point Multiplier and Point

Speed columns to edit the point multiplier and speed values of
individual points > Enter a new value.
NOTE: Multipliers and speeds are rounded to the four most
significant figures.
NOTE: By default, the values you can edit display in bold blue text.
6. Double-click a row in the Diameter column to edit the diameter of

individual rollers and pulleys for Linear Speed machines > Enter a
new diameter value.
7. Navigate from machine to machine and repeat the steps above for
each as required.
8. Click Accept All Changes when you have checked all machine
speeds and corrected these if necessary — This commits the
machine values to the upgraded database. A notification displays
when the changes have been saved.
9. Click Close to exit the utility.
442
Using the Machine Speed Settings utility
DUNS Numbers
DUNS numbers are assigned automatically in Ascent. They are used as
primary database keys and cannot be changed manually.
443
Section 15 — Troubleshooting
This section details some possible problems you might encounter with
Ascent and how to resolve these.
Troubleshoot USB Communications

If the version of Ascent and your instrument firmware that you are using
was released before 2009, you may occasionally experience difficulty
communicating with your instrument when using a USB connection. This
usually indicates a communications conflict or firewall activation. We
recommend you upgrade to the latest release of Ascent which includes
a Plug and Play USB driver.
Alternatively, the following steps might resolve the conflict:

1. Connect your instrument and PC using the USB cable supplied.
3. Open Ascent.
5. Double-click your instrument.
TIP: You can use the serial number to identify your instrument.
NOTE: If your SCOUT/vbX series instrument is not listed, this is

because it has not yet been added to the instrument database in
Ascent. See Adding an Instrument to Ascent to learn how to do
this.
6. Check your instrument's IP address in the field provided.

7. Press Options on your instrument.
8. Press Comms.
9. Ensure the IP listed beside the USB button matches the IP
address in Ascent — If the IP addresses do not match, change the
address in the Properties window to match your instrument IP
address > Press and hold + to restart your instrument >
Close the Properties window > Try to connect to your instrument
again. If you are still unable to communicate with your instrument,
temporarily disable any firewalls. If communication is restored, add
a firewall exception for Ascent (masvb32.exe in the Program
Files\Commtest\Ascent folder on your PC) or open port 13000.
444
Upgrade Database Generates ISC Error

When you upgrade a Firebird database while upgrading to a newer
version of Ascent, you might receive an error message if more than one
person is currently connected to the database. To resolve this:
1. You can upgrade the database normally using EITHER of these
methods:
• Close all instances of Ascent that are communicating with the
database (local or network).
• Restart the Firebird database server:
a. Select Start > Run from the Windows menu or press Start
(Windows flag key) + R — The Run Windows interface opens.
b. Enter services.msc in the Open field.
c. Click OK — The Services window opens.
TIP: You can also access the Services window using the Windows
Control Panel's Administrative Tools.
d. Right-click the Firebird Server, > Select Restart.

2. Open Ascent.
3. Proceed with the database upgrade.
Resolving an issue by upgrading a database
Contact Technical Support

If you have any problems, please contact Commtest Support for
assistance at [email protected].
We also provide a searchable knowledge base of frequently asked

questions (FAQ) on our website — www.commtest.com. Click the
Frequently Asked Questions link under the Support menu to access the
knowledge base.
445
Index
Index
A
Acceleration
power level........................................................................................................................ 140
spectrum amplitude..................................................................................................... 141
waveform amplitude ................................................................................................... 141
Advanced Reporting System
configuring........................................................................................................................... 84
creating a machine assessment report ............................................................... 85
publishing ............................................................................................................................. 92
view report ........................................................................................................................... 88
Alarm
alarm report ................................................................................................... 79, 211, 222
applying templates to ................................................................................................. 233
band ..................................................................................................................................... 200
drawing on a chart .................................................................................................. 204
editing...................................................................................................................204, 207
exceeding ..................................................................................................................... 211
hiding/displaying ...................................................................................................... 207
peak ................................................................................................................................. 201
power.............................................................................................................................. 202
trending ......................................................................................................................... 215
checking alarm status ................................................................................................ 197
envelope............................................................................................................................. 218
adding to a chart ...................................................................................................... 219
editing............................................................................................................................. 220
exceeding ..................................................................................................................... 222
hiding/displaying ...................................................................................................... 220
margins, changing................................................................................................... 219
trending ......................................................................................................................... 224
global editing of.............................................................................................................. 234
ISO standard alarms .................................................................................................... 368
overall RMS ....................................................................................................................... 225
statistical ............................................................................................................................ 383
Alarm templates .................................................................................................................. 227
applying ....................................................................................................................227, 232
creating............................................................................................................................... 227
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 236
editing.................................................................................................................................. 234
446
Index
Alarm wizard ......................................................................................................................... 404

Archiving items ............................................................................................................... 48, 63
Ascent
configuring directories................................................................................................ 432
locating the database file ............................................................................................ 23
locating the executable file......................................................................................... 28
System Requirements .......................................................................................................2
Attached File Schedule Entry........................................................................................ 245
Auto save ................................................................................................................................... 56
Auto-scaling .......................................................................................................................... 144
B
Backing up the database ............................................................................................... 327
backup directory............................................................................................................ 433
Balancing report..................................................................................................................... 80
Band alarms .......................................................................................................................... 200
adding to a chart ........................................................................................................... 204
editing........................................................................................................................204, 207
exceeding .......................................................................................................................... 211
hiding/displaying ........................................................................................................... 207
peak ...................................................................................................................................... 201
power ................................................................................................................................... 202
trending .............................................................................................................................. 215
Baseline recordings ........................................................................................................... 266
displaying on the vb..................................................................................................... 266
including in views .......................................................................................................... 135
removing from the vb ................................................................................................. 266
setting ........................................................................................................................135, 266
update before send ...................................................................................................... 266
use last measurement if no baseline.................................................................. 266
Bearing
adding a bearing to......................................................................................................... 49
database ............................................................................................................................ 238
defining your own ............................................................................................................ 51
finding in the archive ................................................................................................... 238
interchange bearing ....................................................................................................... 49
Bode plots .....................................................................................................................153, 178
Build mode ................................................................................................................................ 36
Bulk tasks ................................................................................................................................ 440
447
Index
C
Charts
adding on-chart remarks .......................................................................................... 125
changing colours of ...........................................................................................188, 190
customizing the scale ................................................................................................. 144
displaying multiple recordings ............................................................................... 120
displaying orders/Hz.................................................................................................... 128
displaying revolutions ................................................................................................. 128
emailing offsite ............................................................................................................... 160
modes .................................................................................................................................. 122
plotting data..................................................................................................................... 111
printing................................................................................................................................ 186
trend charts ...................................................................................................................... 161
overall RMS .................................................................................................................. 225
peak band alarms .................................................................................................... 215
power band alarms ................................................................................................. 215
using cursors on............................................................................................................. 114
waterfall ............................................................................................................................. 122
depth/direction.......................................................................................................... 122
reverse plot order..................................................................................................... 122
waveforms ........................................................................................................................ 136
zooming and panning................................................................................................. 112
Commtest Bearing Archive.................................................................................... 49, 238
Compressed files................................................................................................................. 433
Copying navigator items.................................................................................................... 40
to multiple locations ....................................................................................................... 54
CPM, displaying frequency as ...................................................................................... 142
Creation palette ...................................................................................................................... 64
Crest factor ............................................................................................................................ 138
Cursors ..................................................................................................................................... 114
snapping to a peak....................................................................................................... 116
D
Data structure ......................................................................................................................... 21
Data thinning ........................................................................................................................ 320
Database.................................................................................................................................... 21
backing up...............................................................................................................327, 433
creating.................................................................................................................................. 29
deadlock protection ..................................................................................................... 425
directory ............................................................................................................................. 432
448
Index
factory default.................................................................................................................... 29
multi-user access, managing ................................................................................. 425
optimizing the performance of ....................................................................338, 340
rebuilding ........................................................................................................................... 340
reducing the size of ............................................................................................320, 340
restoring ............................................................................................................................. 337
selecting another................................................................................................... 34, 423
storage location ..................................................................................................... 23, 432
transferring data between
importing/exporting................................................................................................ 289
using multiple databases ............................................................................................. 34
Demodulation ....................................................................................................................... 256
analyzing data ................................................................................................................ 259
setup..................................................................................................................................... 257
Design mode ......................................................................................................................... 364
Displacement
power level........................................................................................................................ 140
Drag and drop ......................................................................................................................... 58
E
Envelope alarms.................................................................................................................. 218
adding to a chart ........................................................................................................... 219
editing.................................................................................................................................. 220
exceeding .......................................................................................................................... 222
hiding/displaying ........................................................................................................... 220
margins, changing ........................................................................................................ 219
trending .............................................................................................................................. 224
Exporting files ....................................................................................................................... 289
compressed files ............................................................................................................ 433
F
Fault frequencies ................................................................................................................ 129
defining customized frequencies.......................................................................... 132
displaying on charts..................................................................................................... 129
nudging............................................................................................................................... 132
Filter, Navigator ...................................................................................................................... 59
Folder ........................................................................................................................................... 21
creating.................................................................................................................................. 30
deleting .................................................................................................................................. 31
449
Index
importing/exporting..................................................................................................... 289
maximum number in Ascent...................................................................................... 21
opening .................................................................................................................................. 32
sending to the vb.............................................................................................................. 70
G
Gear
adding to a point .............................................................................................................. 51
Generation parameters................................................................................................... 403
creating............................................................................................................................... 417
editing.................................................................................................................................. 418
GMT, timezones ................................................................................................................... 313
Graphics file, creating....................................................................................................... 160
Greenwich meridian time ............................................................................................... 313
H
Hz, displaying frequency as .......................................................................................... 142
I
Importing files....................................................................................................................... 289
compressed files ............................................................................................................ 433
XML........................................................................................................................................ 298
Instruments
set vbX IP address ............................................................................................................ 69
vbX
send folders to the instrument............................................................................. 70
send folders to the software ................................................................................. 72
ISO standard alarms ......................................................................................................... 368
K
Keyboard shortcuts ........................................................................................................... 193
Keypad schedule entry .................................................................................................... 242
associating with process variables...................................................................... 254
editing.................................................................................................................................. 245
L
Language, choosing a......................................................................................................... 18
Library
editing.................................................................................................................................. 286
storing components in................................................................................................ 286
Licensing
450
Index
Dongle .......................................................................................................................................4
Hardware Dongle ........................................................................................................ 7, 15
software licensing ...............................................................................................................3
Uninstalling .......................................................................................................................... 14
unlocking channels ...................................................................................................... 428
upgrade license features ............................................................................................. 13
Linear speed support........................................................................................................ 263
Logging on.............................................................................................................................. 429
Long time waveforms ...................................................................................................... 140
M
Machine
adding a machine note ................................................................................................. 48
adding an image to ......................................................................................................... 47
copying ....................................................................................................................... 40, 286
creating....................................................................................................................... 36, 286
storing.................................................................................................................................. 286
Machine Builder Wizard .................................................................................................. 368
Machine families ................................................................................................................. 419
adding machines to ..................................................................................................... 422
creating............................................................................................................................... 421
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 421
editing.................................................................................................................................. 421
family options .................................................................................................................. 407
removing machines from.......................................................................................... 422
MAD, median absolute deviation ............................................................................... 399
Manually entering vibration data............................................................................... 282
Mean.......................................................................................................................................... 398
Measurements
archiving................................................................................................................................ 63
Recordings sorting
most recent first........................................................................................................... 58
oldest first ........................................................................................................................ 58
Multiple items, selecting..................................................................................................... 62
N
Navigator ................................................................................................................................... 33
copying items ..................................................................................................................... 40
filter .......................................................................................................................................... 59
list.............................................................................................................................................. 57
selecting items in.............................................................................................................. 62
451
Index
sorting..................................................................................................................................... 58
tree ........................................................................................................................................... 74
Network
connecting to................................................................................................................... 423
Notes ............................................................................................................................................ 48
adding a note ..................................................................................................................... 48
archiving................................................................................................................................ 63
deleting .................................................................................................................................. 48
editing..................................................................................................................................... 48
O
On-chart remarks
adding.................................................................................................................................. 125
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 125
editing.................................................................................................................................. 125
spreading out .................................................................................................................. 125
OPC import ............................................................................................................................. 300
Orbit plots .....................................................................................................................153, 170
Orders, displaying on charts ......................................................................................... 128
Overall rms alarms............................................................................................................. 225
creating............................................................................................................................... 225
trending .............................................................................................................................. 225
P
Panning .................................................................................................................................... 112
Parameter set
creating.................................................................................................................................. 41
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 274
editing............................................................................................................. 267, 273, 274
orders-based ................................................................................................................... 271
removing unused sets ................................................................................................ 277
setting the parameters............................................................................................... 267
Photo, adding to a machine............................................................................................. 47
Point
adding a bearing to......................................................................................................... 49
adding a gear to................................................................................................................ 51
copying .................................................................................................................................. 40
creating a.............................................................................................................................. 38
Printing charts and reports ........................................................................................... 186
Process Variables........................................................................................... 242, 254, 300
452
Index
PROFLASH ............................................................................................................................... 436

multiple instruments.................................................................................................... 440
R
Recordings
archiving................................................................................................................................ 63
limiting number displayed in navigator................................................................ 62
Recordings sorting
most recent first........................................................................................................... 58
oldest first ........................................................................................................................ 58
Reports ........................................................................................................................................ 77
alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 79
automated ........................................................................................................................ 109
balancing .............................................................................................................................. 80
creating your own......................................................................................................... 341
exception .............................................................................................................................. 81
last 8 measurements...................................................................................................... 82
last measurement ............................................................................................................ 82
machine assessment ..................................................................................................... 82
printing................................................................................................................................ 186
route ..................................................................................................................................... 107
routes due ......................................................................................................................... 106
structure ............................................................................................................................. 107
Restoring a database ....................................................................................................... 327
Reusing components ........................................................................................................ 286
Revolutions, displaying on charts .............................................................................. 128
Route
creating.................................................................................................................................. 65
report ................................................................................................................................... 107
route entry............................................................................................................................ 65
RPM
assigning the 1X value................................................................................................ 127
creating data collector prompt.............................................................................. 265
updating ............................................................................................................................. 259
S
Save .............................................................................................................................................. 56
Schedule entry ............................................................................................................. 41, 267
average value.................................................................................................................. 249
creating.................................................................................................................................. 41
453
Index
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 274

editing........................................................................................................................267, 273
keypad................................................................................................................................. 242
setting the parameters............................................................................................... 267
tachometer ....................................................................................................................... 252
Schemes .................................................................................................................................. 188
customising/editing ..................................................................................................... 190
file storage directory.................................................................................................... 433
sending scheme files ................................................................................................... 433
Selecting multiple items ..................................................................................................... 62
Sensor
calibration values .......................................................................................................... 279
editing........................................................................................................................267, 279
settling times ................................................................................................................... 279
triaxial .................................................................................................................................. 278
Serial data input
Serial port................................................................................................................................... 70
Shortcut keys ........................................................................................................................ 193
Site
opening an entire site ................................................................................................. 287
Software Licensing...................................................................................................................3
Standard deviation ............................................................................................................ 398
Statistical alarms ................................................................................................................ 383
creating............................................................................................................................... 388
deleting alarms............................................................................................................... 388
envelopes........................................................................................................................... 413
generation parameters ....................................................................................387, 403
creating.......................................................................................................................... 417
editing............................................................................................................................. 418
MAD, median absolute deviation .......................................................................... 399
mean .................................................................................................................................... 398
outliers.......................................................................................................................398, 399
overview ............................................................................................................................. 383
pre-defined alarms, using......................................................................................... 388
standard deviation ....................................................................................................... 398
suspicious recordings ................................................................................................. 399
thresholds.......................................................................................................................... 409
updating ............................................................................................................................. 396
Statistical outliers .....................................................................................................398, 399
Storage capacity .................................................................................................................... 21
454
Index
Suspicious recordings ...................................................................................................... 399

T
Tagging
exporting tagged items.............................................................................................. 289
Technical support ............................................................................................................... 445
Template machines ........................................................................................................... 305
child machine, creating.............................................................................................. 308
child machine, updating ............................................................................................ 309
creating............................................................................................................................... 306
exporting and importing............................................................................................ 307
previewing......................................................................................................................... 310
releasing............................................................................................................................. 311
The Proven Method............................................................................................................ 368
Timezones............................................................................................................................... 313
changing ............................................................................................................................ 313
Trending................................................................................................................................... 161
overall RMS alarms ....................................................................................................... 225
peak band alarms ......................................................................................................... 215
power band alarms ...................................................................................................... 215
single frequency............................................................................................................. 167
Triaxial measurement setup ......................................................................................... 278
U
Undo ............................................................................................................................................. 56
Units of measurement
setting preferences ...................................................................................................... 141
Upgrading.....................................................................................................................................2
User accounts....................................................................................................................... 429
V
vb instrument
maintaining data integrity with Ascent ................................................................ 75
sending a folder to........................................................................................................... 70
Velocity
power level........................................................................................................................ 140
Views ......................................................................................................................................... 153
assigning keyboard shortcuts ................................................................................ 352
copying parts ................................................................................................................... 353
455
Index
creating............................................................................................................................... 341
deleting ............................................................................................................................... 367
design mode .................................................................................................................... 364
including baseline in .................................................................................................... 135
layout, designing............................................................................................................ 362
renaming............................................................................................................................ 341
reusing................................................................................................................................. 353
saving .................................................................................................................................. 354
selectors ............................................................................................................................. 355
system defaults, restoring ........................................................................................ 354
W
Waterfall chart ..................................................................................................................... 122
depth/direction ............................................................................................................... 122
reverse plot order .......................................................................................................... 122
Waveform analysis ............................................................................................................ 136
audio playback ............................................................................................................... 138
converting to spectra .................................................................................................. 140
long time waveforms................................................................................................... 140
true peak to peak .......................................................................................................... 138
Z
Zooming................................................................................................................................... 112
456

Ascent Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ascent Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ascent Reference Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Software Reference Guide

COPYRIGHT © 1999-2013 Bently Nevada and GE Energy (New Zealand)

All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Names